Introduction 1

Operator Components/ 2
Operating Sequences

SINUMERIK 840D sl Example of Operation 3

HMI-Embedded Machine 4
Operating Area

Parameters 5
Operating Manual Operating Area

Program 6
Operating Area

Services 7
Operating Area

Diagnostics 8
Operating Area

Start-up 9
Operating Area

Maintenance 10

Valid for Appendix A

PLC Software
version
SINUMERIK 840D sl/840DE sl

Software Version

NCU System Software for 840D sl/840DE sl 1.5

with HMI Embedded 7.5

01/2008
SINUMERIK® Documentation

Printing history

Brief details of this edition and previous editions are listed below.

The status of each version is indicated by the code in the "Remarks" columns.

Status code in the "Remarks" column:

A .... New documentation.

B .... Unrevised reprint with new order number.
C .... Revised edition with new status.

Issue Order No. Comment

02.01 6FC5298-6AC00-0BP0 A
11.01 6FC5298-6AC00-0BP1 C
11.02 6FC5298-6AC00-0BP2 C
03.04 6FC5298-6AC00-0BP3 C
08/2005 6FC5398-1AP10-0BA0 C
11/2006 6FC5398-1AP10-1BA0 C
01/2008 6FC5398-1AP10-2BA0 C

Registered trademarks
All designations with the trademark symbol ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. Other designations in
this documentation may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes may infringe the rights
of the owner.

Exclusion of Liability
We have checked that the contents of this document correspond to the hardware and software described. Since
deviations cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full agreement. The information contained in
this document is, however, reviewed regularly and any necessary changes will be included in the
next edition.

Copyright © Siemens AG 1995 - 2008

Order No. 6FC5398-1AP10-2BA0

Siemens AG 2008.
We reserve the right to make technical changes
 0 0
01/2008 Preface
Proper use

Preface

Structure of the The SINUMERIK documentation is organized in 3 parts:

Documentation • General documentation
• User documentation
• Manufacturer/Service Documentation

An overview of publications, which is updated monthly and also provides

information about the language versions available, can be found on the
Internet at:
http://www.siemens.com/motioncontrol
Follow the menu items "Support" "Technical Documentation"
"Overview of Publications".

The Internet version of DOConCD (DOConWEB) is available at:

http://www.automation.siemens.com/doconweb

Information about training courses and FAQs (Frequently Asked

Questions) can be found in internet under::
http://www.siemens.com/motioncontrol under menu item "Support"

Validity These Operating Instructions are valid for HMI Embedded SW 7.5

Technical Support If you have any questions, please contact our hotline:
Europe and Africa:
A&D Technical Support
Tel.: +49 (0) 180 / 5050 - 222
Fax: +49 (0) 180 / 5050 - 223
Internet:http://www.siemens.com/automation/support-request

America:
A&D Technical Support
Tel.: +1 423 262 2522
Fax: +1 423 262 2289
E-mail: mailto:[email protected]

Asia/Pacific:
A&D Technical Support
Tel.: +86 1064 719 990
Fax: +86 1064 747 474
E-mail: mailto:[email protected]

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 iii
 0 0
Preface 01/2008
Proper use

Note
National telephone numbers for technical support are provided under the
following Internet address:

http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support

SINUMERIK http://www.siemens.com/sinumerik
Internet address

Standard scope This Operator’s Guide describes only the functionality of the standard
version. Additions or revisions made by the machine manufacturer are
documented by the machine manufacturer.

Other functions not described in this documentation might be executable

in the control. However, no claim can be made regarding the availability
of these functions when the equipment is first supplied or in the event of
servicing.

Qualified persons The associated device/system may only be set-up and operated in
conjunction with this documentation. The equipment / system may only
be commissioned and operated by qualified personnel. For the purpose
of the safety information in this documentation, a “qualified person” is
someone who is authorized to energize, ground, and tag equipment,
systems, and circuits in accordance with established safety procedures.

Designated use Note the following:

WARNING The device may be used only for the applications described in the
catalog and in the technical description, and only in combination with the
equipment, components and devices of other manufacturers where
recommended or permitted by Siemens. To ensure trouble-free and safe
operation of the product, it must be properly transported, stored, and
installed, and maintained and operated with care.

Structure of the All functions and operating options have been described according to the
descriptions same internal structure as far as this is meaningful and practicable. The
various levels of information have been organized such that you can
selectively access the information you need for the task in hand.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

iv SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 0 0
01/2008 Preface
Proper use

Explanation of symbols
Function

The theoretical section is primarily intended as learning material for the

NC entry-level user and includes important information to assist the user
to understand the operator functions.
You should work through the manual at least once to get an idea of the
operational scope and capability of your SINUMERIK control.

Sequence of operations

This section contains the sequence of keys required for operation at a

glance. If inputs have to be made at individual stages of the sequence or
if you require additional information, you will find this next to the key
illustrations.

Notes

This symbol appears in this documentation whenever it is necessary to

draw your attention to an important item of information.

Machine manufacturer

For safety reasons, some functions are disabled to protect them from
unauthorized access. The machine manufacturer can customize or
modify the described functionality. Please comply fully with the
instructions of the machine-tool manufacturer.

Additional information

For safety reasons, some functions are disabled to protect them from
unauthorized access. The machine manufacturer can customize or
modify the described functionality. Please comply fully with the
instructions of the machine-tool manufacturer.

References

This symbol appears whenever specific information can be found in other

documentation.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 v
 0 0
Preface 01/2008
Proper use

Ordering data option

In this documentation, you will find this symbol with a reference to an

ordering data option. The described function can only run if the control
contains the designated option.

Safety information This Manual contains information which you should carefully observe to
ensure your own personal safety and the prevention of material damage.
The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the
manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring to property damage
only, have no safety alert symbol. Depending on the hazard level,
warnings are indicated in a descending order as follows:

Danger Indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper
precautions are not taken.

WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper
precautions are not taken.

Caution means that there can be slight physical injury if the corresponding safety
measures are not followed.

Caution without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if
proper precautions are not taken.

Notice indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the

corresponding information is not taken into account.

If multiple levels of hazards can occur, the warning is always displayed

with the highest possible level. If a warning notice with a safety alert
symbol is to indicate physical injury, the same warning may also contain
information about damage to property.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

vi SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 0 0
01/2008 Contents

Contents

Introduction 1-15
1.1 The SINUMERIK 840D sl.......................................................................................... 1-16

1.2 Switching the control on/off....................................................................................... 1-17

1.3 Operating areas ........................................................................................................ 1-18

Operator Components/Operating Sequences 2-21

2.1 Operator panels ........................................................................................................ 2-22
2.1.1 Keys on the control panels........................................................................................ 2-23

2.2 Machine control panels ............................................................................................. 2-27

2.3 Keys on the machine control panel........................................................................... 2-28

2.3.1 Emergency Stop key................................................................................................. 2-28
2.3.2 Operating modes and machine functions ................................................................. 2-28
2.3.3 Feedrate control........................................................................................................ 2-30
2.3.4 Spindle control .......................................................................................................... 2-31
2.3.5 Key-operated switches.............................................................................................. 2-32
2.3.6 Program control ........................................................................................................ 2-34
2.3.7 Standard PC keyboard MF-II .................................................................................... 2-35

2.4 Screen layout ............................................................................................................ 2-36

2.4.1 Overview ................................................................................................................... 2-36
2.4.2 Global machine status display .................................................................................. 2-38
2.4.3 Program control display ............................................................................................ 2-41

2.5 General operating sequences................................................................................... 2-42

2.5.1 Program overview and program selection ................................................................ 2-42
2.5.2 Selecting and opening a directory/file....................................................................... 2-43
2.5.3 Editor......................................................................................................................... 2-43
2.5.4 Contour programming ............................................................................................... 2-45
2.5.5 Summary of ranges................................................................................................... 2-45
2.5.6 Toggling between menu windows............................................................................. 2-45
2.5.7 Edit inputs/values...................................................................................................... 2-46
2.5.8 Confirming/canceling input ....................................................................................... 2-47
2.5.9 Editing a part program in the ASCII editor ................................................................ 2-47
2.5.10 Channel switchover................................................................................................... 2-52
2.5.11 Pocket calculator....................................................................................................... 2-54
2.5.12 Entering fittings ......................................................................................................... 2-55
2.5.13 “Blue screen” error status screen ............................................................................. 2-56

Example of Operation 3-57

3.1 Typical operating sequence...................................................................................... 3-58

Machine operating area 4-59

4.1 Data structure of the NCK control............................................................................. 4-60

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 Edition vii
 0 0
Contents 01/2008

4.1.1 Operating modes and machine functions .................................................................4-60

4.1.2 Operating mode group and channels........................................................................4-62
4.1.3 Selecting / changing operating mode........................................................................4-63

4.2 General functions and displays .................................................................................4-65

4.2.1 Start/stop/abort/continue part program .....................................................................4-65
4.2.2 Displaying a program level........................................................................................4-66
4.2.3 Toggle between machine/workpiece coordinate system (MCS/WCS) .....................4-67
4.2.4 Actual value display: Settable zero point system, SZS.............................................4-69
4.2.5 Displaying axis feedrates ..........................................................................................4-69
4.2.6 Displaying spindles ...................................................................................................4-70
4.2.7 Displaying auxiliary functions ....................................................................................4-71
4.2.8 Display transformations, G functions, and swivel data record ..................................4-72
4.2.9 Handwheel ................................................................................................................4-73
4.2.10 Preset ........................................................................................................................4-74
4.2.11 Setting the actual value .............................................................................................4-75
4.2.12 Inch/metric switchover...............................................................................................4-76
4.3 Approaching a reference point ..................................................................................4-77

4.4 Jog mode...................................................................................................................4-79

4.4.1 Function and main screen.........................................................................................4-79
4.4.2 Traversing axes.........................................................................................................4-82
4.4.3 Inc: dimension ...........................................................................................................4-83
4.4.4 REPOS......................................................................................................................4-84
4.4.5 SI (Safety Integrated): User confirmation..................................................................4-85
4.4.6 Scratching/Determining the work offset ....................................................................4-86

4.5 MDA mode ................................................................................................................4-89

4.5.1 Function and main screen.........................................................................................4-89
4.5.2 Saving a program ......................................................................................................4-91
4.5.3 Teach In ....................................................................................................................4-91

4.6 Automatic mode ........................................................................................................4-94

4.6.1 Function and main screen.........................................................................................4-94
4.6.2 Executing programs ..................................................................................................4-96
4.6.3 Program editing .........................................................................................................4-97
4.6.4 Setting the block search/search target......................................................................4-98
4.6.5 Accelerated block search for execution from external source ................................4-101
4.6.6 Overstoring..............................................................................................................4-102
4.6.7 Program control.......................................................................................................4-104
4.6.8 DRF offset ...............................................................................................................4-105

Parameters operating area 5-107

5.1 Tool data .................................................................................................................5-109
5.1.1 Tool offset structure ................................................................................................5-109
5.1.2 Tool types and tool parameters...............................................................................5-110

5.2 Tool offset................................................................................................................5-123

5.2.1 Tool offset function and main screen ......................................................................5-123
5.2.2 Creating a new tool .................................................................................................5-125

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

viii SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 Edition
 0 0
01/2008 Contents

5.2.3 Displaying a tool...................................................................................................... 5-126

5.2.4 Finding a tool........................................................................................................... 5-126
5.2.5 Deleting a tool ......................................................................................................... 5-127
5.2.6 Creating a new cutting edge ................................................................................... 5-128
5.2.7 Displaying a cutting edge........................................................................................ 5-129
5.2.8 Finding a cutting edge............................................................................................. 5-129
5.2.9 Deleting a cutting edge ........................................................................................... 5-129
5.2.10 Determining tool offsets .......................................................................................... 5-130
5.2.11 Tool offsets with D numbers only (flat D No.) ......................................................... 5-131
5.2.12 Make active tool offset effective immediately ......................................................... 5-132

5.3 Tool management ................................................................................................... 5-133

5.3.1 Tool management main screen .............................................................................. 5-134
5.3.2 Selecting a tool ....................................................................................................... 5-136
5.3.3 Displaying and modifying tool data ......................................................................... 5-137
5.3.4 Loading a tool ......................................................................................................... 5-138
5.3.5 Unloading a tool ...................................................................................................... 5-140
5.3.6 Relocating a tool ..................................................................................................... 5-141
5.3.7 Finding and positioning a tool ................................................................................. 5-142

5.4 ShopMill tool management ..................................................................................... 5-143

5.4.1 Range of functions .................................................................................................. 5-145
5.4.2 Selecting a tool list .................................................................................................. 5-145
5.4.3 Creating a new tool ................................................................................................. 5-146
5.4.4 Creating more than one cutting edge per tool ........................................................ 5-147
5.4.5 Changing a tool name............................................................................................. 5-148
5.4.6 Creating a replacement tool.................................................................................... 5-149
5.4.7 Manual tools............................................................................................................ 5-149
5.4.8 Entering tool wear data ........................................................................................... 5-150
5.4.9 Activating tool monitoring........................................................................................ 5-151
5.4.10 Managing the magazine list .................................................................................... 5-154
5.4.11 Deleting a tool ......................................................................................................... 5-155
5.4.12 Changing a tool type ............................................................................................... 5-155
5.4.13 Loading or unloading a tool into or from the magazine .......................................... 5-156
5.4.14 Relocating a tool ..................................................................................................... 5-158
5.4.15 Positioning a magazine........................................................................................... 5-160
5.4.16 Sort tools in the tool list........................................................................................... 5-160

5.5 ShopTurn tool management ................................................................................... 5-161

5.5.1 Range of functions .................................................................................................. 5-162
5.5.2 Selecting a tool list .................................................................................................. 5-163
5.5.3 Creating a new tool ................................................................................................. 5-163
5.5.4 Creating more than one cutting edge per tool ........................................................ 5-165
5.5.5 Creating replacement tools ..................................................................................... 5-166
5.5.6 Sorting tools ............................................................................................................ 5-167
5.5.7 Deleting tools .......................................................................................................... 5-167
5.5.8 Load or unload tool in the magazine....................................................................... 5-168
5.5.9 Relocating a tool ..................................................................................................... 5-169
5.5.10 Positioning a magazine........................................................................................... 5-171

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 Edition ix
 0 0
Contents 01/2008

5.5.11 Entering tool wear data ...........................................................................................5-171

5.5.12 Activating tool monitoring ........................................................................................5-172
5.5.13 Managing magazine locations.................................................................................5-174

5.6 R parameters...........................................................................................................5-175
5.6.1 Function...................................................................................................................5-175
5.6.2 Edit/delete/find R parameters..................................................................................5-175

5.7 Setting data .............................................................................................................5-176

5.7.1 Working area limitation............................................................................................5-176
5.7.2 Jog data...................................................................................................................5-177
5.7.3 Spindle data ............................................................................................................5-178
5.7.4 Dry run feedrate for DRY mode ..............................................................................5-179
5.7.5 Starting angle for thread cutting ..............................................................................5-180
5.7.6 Other types of setting data ......................................................................................5-181
5.7.7 Protection zones......................................................................................................5-182

5.8 Work offset ..............................................................................................................5-183

5.8.1 Function...................................................................................................................5-183
5.8.2 Displaying work offsets ...........................................................................................5-185
5.8.3 Changing settable work offset (G54 ...) ..................................................................5-186
5.8.4 Activate work offset and basic frame immediately ..................................................5-188
5.8.5 Global work offset/frame (basic WO) ......................................................................5-188

5.9 Displaying system frames .......................................................................................5-190

5.10 User data/user variables (GUD, PUD, LUD)...........................................................5-191

5.10.1 General information.................................................................................................5-191

Program operating area 6-193

6.1 Program types .........................................................................................................6-194
6.1.1 Part program ...........................................................................................................6-194
6.1.2 Subprogram.............................................................................................................6-194
6.1.3 Workpiece ...............................................................................................................6-194
6.1.4 Cycles......................................................................................................................6-194
6.1.5 Storing programs.....................................................................................................6-194

6.2 Program main screen..............................................................................................6-195

6.3 Editing programs .....................................................................................................6-197

6.3.1 Text editor ...............................................................................................................6-197
6.3.2 Selective Program Protection: RO ..........................................................................6-198
6.3.3 Hidden program lines: Display HD..........................................................................6-199
6.3.4 Reserved character string .......................................................................................6-199
6.3.5 Define and activate user data (GUD, LUD).............................................................6-200

6.4 Free contour programming......................................................................................6-202

6.4.1 General information.................................................................................................6-202
6.4.2 Graphical illustration of the contour ........................................................................6-203
6.4.3 Creating a contour...................................................................................................6-204
6.4.4 Changing a contour.................................................................................................6-207
6.4.5 Contour elements: General .....................................................................................6-208

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

x SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 Edition
 0 0
01/2008 Contents

6.4.6 Create, change, delete contour elements............................................................... 6-209

6.4.7 Help......................................................................................................................... 6-213
6.4.8 Parameter description of straight line, circle and pole contour elements............... 6-214
6.4.9 Programming examples for free contour programming .......................................... 6-216

6.5 Program simulation ................................................................................................. 6-219

6.5.1 Turning simulation................................................................................................... 6-219
6.5.2 Simulating milling before machining ....................................................................... 6-221
6.5.3 Simulating milling during machining ....................................................................... 6-222

6.6 Managing programs ................................................................................................ 6-224

6.6.1 Overview ................................................................................................................. 6-224
6.6.2 File types, blocks and directories............................................................................ 6-225
6.6.3 Templates ............................................................................................................... 6-227
6.6.4 Calling a workpiece/part program ........................................................................... 6-228
6.6.5 Create workpiece directory ..................................................................................... 6-229
6.6.6 Creating a program/data in a workpiece directory.................................................. 6-230
6.6.7 Selecting a program for execution .......................................................................... 6-231
6.6.8 Enable workpiece/program ..................................................................................... 6-233
6.6.9 Copy file and paste ................................................................................................. 6-234
6.6.10 Renaming a file ....................................................................................................... 6-235
6.6.11 Deleting a file .......................................................................................................... 6-236

6.7 Memory info ............................................................................................................ 6-237

6.8 EXTCALL ................................................................................................................ 6-237

Services operating area 7-241

7.1 Function .................................................................................................................. 7-242

7.2 Directory structure................................................................................................... 7-242

7.2.1 Directories ............................................................................................................... 7-242
7.2.2 Data selection ......................................................................................................... 7-243

7.3 Formats for saving and importing data ................................................................... 7-246

7.3.1 Punched tape format............................................................................................... 7-247
7.3.2 PC format binary format.......................................................................................... 7-250

7.4 Services main screen.............................................................................................. 7-251

7.4.1 Series machine startup ........................................................................................... 7-252
7.4.2 Output error/transmission log ................................................................................. 7-254
7.4.3 Read ISO programs in/out ...................................................................................... 7-255

Diagnostics operating area 8-259

8.1 Diagnostics main screen......................................................................................... 8-260

8.2 Displaying alarms and messages ........................................................................... 8-260

8.3 Service display........................................................................................................ 8-262

8.3.1 Service axis............................................................................................................. 8-262
8.3.2 Service drive ........................................................................................................... 8-263
8.3.3 Safety Integrated service ........................................................................................ 8-264

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 Edition xi
 0 0
Contents 01/2008

8.3.4 Displaying system resources ..................................................................................8-267

8.3.5 Alarm log .................................................................................................................8-268
8.3.6 Communication error log.........................................................................................8-269
8.3.7 Traverse log ............................................................................................................8-269

8.4 Calling the version display ......................................................................................8-270

8.4.1 Displaying the version display for the cycles ..........................................................8-271
8.4.2 Display version screen of loadable Compile cycles................................................8-273
8.4.3 Displaying the version display for the definitions ....................................................8-274
8.4.4 Displaying the hardware version .............................................................................8-274

8.5 PLC..........................................................................................................................8-275
8.5.1 General information.................................................................................................8-275
8.5.2 Change/delete operand value .................................................................................8-276
8.5.3 Select/create operand form for PLC status.............................................................8-278
8.5.4 Set time / date .........................................................................................................8-279

8.6 Activating remote diagnostics .................................................................................8-281

Commissioning operating area 9-283

9.1 Commissioning main screen ...................................................................................9-284

9.2 Displaying machine data .........................................................................................9-286

9.2.1 Display options: Display filters ................................................................................9-288

9.3 NC settings..............................................................................................................9-290

9.4 PLC..........................................................................................................................9-291

9.5 Changing the HMI user interface ............................................................................9-292

9.5.1 Color setting ............................................................................................................9-292
9.5.2 Language selection .................................................................................................9-293
9.5.3 Traverse log ............................................................................................................9-294
9.5.4 Editor (HMI only) .....................................................................................................9-295

9.6 Setting up logical drives ..........................................................................................9-296

9.7 Initiate NCK reset ....................................................................................................9-296

9.8 Set, delete, change password................................................................................9-296

9.9 Display or modify system resources .......................................................................9-298

9.10 Licensing .................................................................................................................9-299

Maintenance 10-301
10.1 Operating data.......................................................................................................10-302

10.2 Cleaning ................................................................................................................10-302

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

xii SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 Edition
 0 0
01/2008 Contents

Appendix A-303
A Abbreviations ..........................................................................................................A-304

B Terms ......................................................................................................................A-313

I Index ........................................................................................................................ I-337

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 Edition xiii
 0 0
Contents 01/2008

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

xiv SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 Edition
 1 1
01/2008 Introduction

Introduction

1.1 The SINUMERIK 840D sl.......................................................................................... 1-16

1.2 Switching the control on/off....................................................................................... 1-17

1.3 Operating areas ........................................................................................................ 1-18

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 1-15
 1 1
Introduction 01/2008
1.1 The SINUMERIK 840D sl

1.1 The SINUMERIK 840D sl

General SINUMERIK 840D sl is a CNC control system (Computerized
Numerical Control) for machine tools.
The SINUMERIK 840DE sl is available as an export version for use in
countries where approval is required.

The heart of the SINUMERIK 840D sl is the Numerical Control Unit -

NCU 710. It combines NCK, PLC, HMI, control and communications
functions.

You can use the front control panel to implement the following basic
functions for a machine tool:
• Creation and adaptation of part programs
• Execution of part programs
• Manual control
• Reading in and reading out of part programs and data
• Editing of data for programs
• Displaying and troubleshooting alarms
• Editing of machine data
• Establishing communications connections between one or more
TCUs.

The user can call up all the functions via the user interface.
The user interface consists of:
• Display units such as screen, LEDs, etc.
• Operator controls such as keys, switches, hand wheels, etc.

These operating instructions describe the operation of the

HMI Embedded software, SW 7.5

The HMI Embedded software is on the CompactFlash Card on

delivery of the NCU.

Read Chapter 2 "Operation" carefully before proceeding with further

chapters.
All subsequent chapters are written on the assumption that you have
done so!

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

1-16 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 1 1
01/2008 Introduction
1.2 Switching the control on/off

1.2 Switching the control on/off

Function

Switching the control ON A variety of methods can be employed to switch on the power supply
to the control system or to the whole plant.

Machine manufacturer Please follow the machine manufacturer's instructions!

After the control has been switched on, the "Reference point
approach" display or another basic display programmed by the
machine manufacturer will appear.

Switching the control OFF Please follow the instructions below for switching off the control or the
entire system!

Machine manufacturer Please follow the machine manufacturer's instructions!

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 1-17
 1 1
Introduction 01/2008
1.3 Operating areas

1.3 Operating areas

The basic functions are grouped in the following operating areas in
the control (in gray boxes):

Operating Areas
Execution
of parts programs, MACHINE
manual control

Editing data
for programs/ PARAMETERS
tool management

Development
and adaptation PROGRAM
of part programs

Reading in/out SERVICES

programs and data

Alarm displays,
service displays DIAGNOSIS

Adaptation of CNC START-UP

data to machine,
system settings

Only for CYCLES

cycles option

Sequence of operations

When you press the "Area switchover" key, operating areas are
displayed on the horizontal softkey bar and operating modes are
displayed on the vertical softkey bar. You can use this key to go to the
area menu bar from any location in the menu hierarchy if you wish to
select another operating mode or a different operating area.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

1-18 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 1 1
01/2008 Introduction
1.3 Operating areas

By pressing the "Area switchover" key twice, you can toggle between
the operating areas last selected, e.g. between the "Parameters" and
"Machine" areas.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 1-19
 1 1
Introduction 01/2008
1.3 Operating areas

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

1-20 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 2 2
01/2008 Operator Components/Operating Sequences

Operator Components/Operating Sequences

2.1 Operator panels ........................................................................................................ 2-22

2.1.1 Keys on the control panels........................................................................................ 2-23

2.2 Machine control panels ............................................................................................. 2-27

2.3 Keys on the machine control panel........................................................................... 2-28

2.3.1 Emergency Stop key................................................................................................. 2-28
2.3.2 Operating modes and machine functions ................................................................. 2-28
2.3.3 Feedrate control ........................................................................................................ 2-30
2.3.4 Spindle control .......................................................................................................... 2-31
2.3.5 Key-operated switches.............................................................................................. 2-32
2.3.6 Program control......................................................................................................... 2-34
2.3.7 Standard PC keyboard MF-II .................................................................................... 2-35

2.4 Screen layout ............................................................................................................ 2-36

2.4.1 Overview ................................................................................................................... 2-36
2.4.2 Global machine status display .................................................................................. 2-38
2.4.3 Program control display ............................................................................................ 2-41

2.5 General operating sequences................................................................................... 2-42

2.5.1 Program overview and program selection ................................................................ 2-42
2.5.2 Selecting and opening a directory/file....................................................................... 2-43
2.5.3 Editor......................................................................................................................... 2-43
2.5.4 Contour programming ............................................................................................... 2-45
2.5.5 Summary of ranges................................................................................................... 2-45
2.5.6 Toggling between menu windows............................................................................. 2-45
2.5.7 Edit inputs/values...................................................................................................... 2-46
2.5.8 Confirming/canceling input........................................................................................ 2-47
2.5.9 Editing a part program in the ASCII editor ................................................................ 2-47
2.5.10 Channel switchover................................................................................................... 2-52
2.5.11 Pocket calculator....................................................................................................... 2-54
2.5.12 Entering fittings ......................................................................................................... 2-55
2.5.13 “Blue screen” error status screen.............................................................................. 2-56

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 2-21
 2 2
Operator Components/Operating Sequences 01/2008
2.1 Operator panels

2.1 Operator panels

Example The controls available for operation of the SINUMERIK controller and
the machine tool are described below using the SINUMERIK OP 010
operator panel as an example.

Operating panel OP 010

A Display
B Alphanumeric keypad
Correction/cursor keys

1 Machine area key

2 Recall (return)
3 Softkey bar (horizontal)
4 ETC key
(menu extension)
5 Area switchover key
6 Softkey bar (vertical)

The keys are described in the following sections.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

2-22 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 2 2
01/2008 Operator Components/Operating Sequences
2.1 Operator panels

2.1.1 Keys on the control panels

The elements of the operator panel keyboard and the symbols used to
represent them in this manual are shown and explained below.
The keys marked with an * correspond to the key symbols in US
layout.

MACHINE
Direct branch to the "Machine" operating area.

Recall key
Return to the higher-level menu. Recall closes a window.

ETC key
Expansion of the softkey bar in the same menu.

MENU SELECT
You can call the main menu from any operating area by pressing this
key. Pressing the key twice in succession changes from the current
operating area to the previous one and back again.
The standard main menu branches into the following operating areas:
1. Machine
2. Parameter
3. Program
4. Services
5. Diagnostics
6. Commissioning

ALARM CANCEL
By pressing this key, you can acknowledge the alarm marked by this
Cancel symbol.

CHANNEL
In a configuration with several channels, it is possible to switch
between channels (switch from channel 1 through to channel n).
When a "Channel menu" is configured, all existing communication
links plus the associated channels are displayed on softkeys.
(See also Section "Switch over channel")

HELP
This key displays explanatory information about the current operating
status (e.g. support for programming, diagnostics, PLC, alarms).
The letter "i" displayed in the user response line indicates that
information is available.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 2-23
 2 2
Operator Components/Operating Sequences 01/2008
2.1 Operator panels

SHIFT
Depress the Shift key to enter the upper character shown on the dual
input keys.

CTRL
Use the following key combinations to navigate in the process plan
and in the G code editor:
Ctrl + Pos1: Jump to the beginning.
Ctrl + End: Jump to the end.
Ctrl + C: Copy a selected area to the same global
memory. If nothing is selected, the content of the
entire field is saved in the buffer.
Ctrl + X: Copy a selected area to the same global
memory and cut.
CTRL +V: Insert the contents from the global memory to the cursor
position.

ALT

Blank, space character

BACKSPACE
• Delete the value in the input field from the right.
• In insertion mode, it deletes the character after the cursor.

DEL
• Delete the value in the parameter field
• In insertion mode, it deletes the character marked by the
cursor.

INSERT
• Switch over to edit mode in tables and input fields (in this case,
the input field is in insert mode) or
• UNDO function on table elements and input fields (the value is
not validated when you exit a field using the edit key; instead it is
reset to the previous value = UNDO).
• Activate pocket calculator mode

TAB
Tab key

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

2-24 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 2 2
01/2008 Operator Components/Operating Sequences
2.1 Operator panels

INPUT
• Accepts an edited value
• Open/close a directory or program

NEXT WINDOW
If several windows are displayed on the screen, it is possible to make
the next window the active one using the window selection key (the
active window has a thicker border).
Keyboard input e.g. the page keys, is possible only in the active
window.

Cursor up
Navigate between different fields or lines.

PAGE DOWN
You "page" down by one display.
In a part program you can scroll the display down (towards end of
program).
With the page keys you scroll the visible/displayed area of the window
that is active. The scroll bar indicates which part of the
program/document/... is selected.

Cursor to the left

• Navigate between different fields or lines.
• Switch to the higher level directory.

SELECT
This key has the same function as the "Alternat." softkey.
• Selection key for values set in input fields and selection lists
labeled with this key symbol.
• Activate/deactivate a field:

= active = active
= not active = not active

Multiple option button Single-option button/option

(you can select several options or (only one option can be active at a
none) time)

• Switch Select mode on and off in the editor

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 2-25
 2 2
Operator Components/Operating Sequences 01/2008
2.1 Operator panels

Cursor to the right

• Navigate between different fields or lines.
• Opens a directory or program.

END
• With this key, the cursor is moved to the end of the line in the
page opened in the editor.
• Rapid positioning of the cursor on a group of related input
fields.

Cursor down
Navigate between different fields or lines.

PAGE UP
You "page" up by one display. With the page keys you scroll the
visible/displayed area of the window that is active. The scroll bar
indicates which part of the program/document/... is selected.

PROGRAM (OP 010 and OP 010C only)

Opens the "Program" operating area.
This key has the same function as the "Prog. edit" softkey.

OFFSET = (only OP 010 and OP 010C)

Tool management
Opens the "Tools/Offsets" operating area.
This key has the same function as the "Tool zero point" softkey

PROGRAM MANAGER (only OP 010 and OP 010C)

Open the "Program" operating area.
This key has the same function as the "Program" softkey.

ALARM (OP 010 and OP 010C only)

In the main diagnostic display, open the "Messages/Alarms" overview
of alarms.
This key has the same function as the "Alarm list" softkey.

CUSTOM
The customer configures this key.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

2-26 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 2 2
01/2008 Operator Components/Operating Sequences
2.2 Machine control panels

2.2 Machine control panels

Standard turning Actions on the machine tool, for example traversing the axes or
machines/milling program start, can only be initiated via a machine control panel.
machines
The machine tool can either be equipped with a standard machine
control panel from SIEMENS or with a specific machine control panel
from the machine-tool manufacturer.

The machine control panel described in this document is the panel

supplied by SIEMENS. If you are using another machine control
panel, please consult the operating instructions of the machine-tool
manufacturer.

The standard machine control panel from SIEMENS is equipped with

the following operator controls:

1 4 2 3 5 6 7 8
1 EMERGENCY STOP
button
2 Operating modes (with
machine functions)
3 Incremental mode
4 Program control
Machine control panel for turning machines
instructions
5 Direction key with rapid
1 4 2 3 5 6 7 8
traverse
override
6 Spindle control
7 Feedrate control
8 Key-operated switch

Machine control panel for milling machines

Machine control panel

OP 032S

Machine control panel OP 032S

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 2-27
 2 2
Operator Components/Operating Sequences 01/2008
2.3 Keys on the machine control panel

2.3 Keys on the machine control panel

2.3.1 Emergency Stop key

Press this red key in emergency situations:

1. if life is at risk
2. When there is a danger of the machine or workpiece being
damaged.
An EMERGENCY STOP generally shuts down all drives with the
greatest possible braking torque in a controlled manner.

For details of other or additional reactions to an EMERGENCY STOP:

Machine manufacturer Please follow the instructions of the machine manufacturer.

2.3.2 Operating modes and machine functions

If you press a "Mode key", the corresponding mode is selected if

permissible, and all other modes and functions are deselected.

The active mode is signaled and confirmed by the associated LED,

which lights up.

Jog
Jog Select "Machine Manual" operating mode. Axis travel in jog mode via:
• Continuous motion of the axes using the direction keys, or
• Incremental motion of the axes using the direction keys, or
• The handwheel.

Teach In
Teach In Creation of programs in interactive mode with the machine in
"MDA" mode.

MDA (Manual Data Automatic)

MDA Select “Machine Automatic” operating mode.
Control of machine through execution of a block or a sequence of
blocks. The blocks are entered on the operator panel front.

Automatic
Auto Select “Machine Automatic” operating mode.
Control of machine through automatic execution of programs.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

2-28 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 2 2
01/2008 Operator Components/Operating Sequences
2.3 Keys on the machine control panel

Inc keys You can activate the Inc functions in conjunction with the following
modes:
• "JOG" operating mode
• "MDA/Teach-in" operating mode

VAR (Incremental feed variable)

VAR Incremental traverse with variable increment size (see "Parameters"
*
operating area, setting data).

Inc (Incremental feed)

1 10 100 Incremental traverse with preset increment size of 1, 10, 100, 1,000,
10,000 increments.
1000 10000

The way that the incremental value is evaluated depends on the

setting in the machine data.

Please refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Machine functions

REPOS
Repos Repositioning
Reposition, re-approach contour in "Jog" mode.

Ref Point
Ref Point Approaching a reference point
Approach the reference point (Ref) in "Jog" mode.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 2-29
 2 2
Operator Components/Operating Sequences 01/2008
2.3 Keys on the machine control panel

2.3.3 Feedrate control

Feedrate Rapid traverse override (Feedrate

override switch)
Control range:
0% to 120% of programmed feedrate.
In rapid traverse, the 100% value is not exceeded.

Settings,
0%, 1%, 2%, 4%, 6%, 8%, 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%,
75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 100%, 105%, 110%, 115%, 120%

Feed Stop
Feed Stop
• Execution of the current program is stopped
• The axis drives are brought to a standstill under control,
• The associated LED illuminates as soon as feed stop has been
accepted by the control,
• FST (= feed stop) appears in the header (program control display)

Example:
− In "MDA" mode, an error is detected during execution of a block.
− A tool change is to be carried out.

Feed Start
Feed Start
If you press the "Feed start" key:
• The part program is continued in the current block,
• The feedrate is accelerated to the value specified by the program,
• The associated LED lights up as soon as feed start has been
accepted by the control.

Axis keys (for turning machines):

Traverse the selected axis (X ... Z).

X Y Z
Axis keys (for milling machines):

Select the axis (X ... 9) for traversing

Z ....
9th Axis

in the positive direction by pressing the "+" key or

+
in the negative direction by pressing the "-" key.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

2-30 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 2 2
01/2008 Operator Components/Operating Sequences
2.3 Keys on the machine control panel

Rapid
Rapid Traverses axis at rapid traverse (fastest speed).

Machine manufacturer − The specified increments and control range apply to standard
machines.
− Increments and control range can be modified by the machine tool
manufacturer to suit specific applications.
− Feedrate/rapid traverse and the values for the feedrate override
switch settings (if the feedrate override switch is also operative in
rapid traverse) are defined in a machine data.
Please follow the machine manufacturer's instructions!

WCS/MCS
WCS MCS Switches between the workpiece coordinate system (WCS = work)
and machine coordinate system (MCS = machine).

2.3.4 Spindle control

Spindle override (spindle speed override switch)

• The rotary switch with latch positions allows you to increase or
decrease the programmed spindle speed "S" (equivalent to 100%).
• The set spindle speed value "S" is output as an absolute value and
a percentage in the "Spindles" display (vertical softkey on main
screen).

Control range:
50% to 120% of programmed spindle speed

Increment:
5% between latch positions

Spindle stop
Spindle Stop
When you press the "Spindle stop" key:
• The spindle is decelerated down to zero speed and
• The associated LED lights up as soon as "Spindle stop" is
reached.

Example:
• To change a tool
• To enter S, T, H, M functions during setup

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 2-31
 2 2
Operator Components/Operating Sequences 01/2008
2.3 Keys on the machine control panel

Spindle start
Spindle Start
When you press the "Spindle start" key:
• The spindle speed is accelerated to the value defined in the
program and
• The associated LED lights up as soon as "Spindle start" has been
accepted by the control.

Machine manufacturer − The specified increment and the control range apply to standard
machine data (MD). These MD can be edited by the machine-tool
manufacturer to suit the specific application.
− The maximum spindle speed and the values for the spindle speed
override position are defined in the machine data and setting data
(see information supplied by the machine-tool manufacturer).

2.3.5 Key-operated switches

SIEMENS key switch The keylock switch on the SINUMERIK 840D, 810D has 4 settings to
which protection levels 4 to 7 are assigned.

Machine manufacturer Functions can be assigned to key-operated switch positions by the

machine manufacturer. Using machine data, it is also possible to set
access to programs, data and functions to suit the user's
requirements.
The key-operated switch has three different colored keys which can
be removed in the specified positions:

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

2-32 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 2 2
01/2008 Operator Components/Operating Sequences
2.3 Keys on the machine control panel

Key positions

Position 0 Lowest
No key Access authorization
Protection level 7 ⏐
⏐
⏐
⏐
Position 1 ⏐
⏐
⏐
Key 1 black ⏐
⏐
Protection level 6 ⏐
⏐
⏐
⏐
⏐
Position 2 ⏐
⏐
Key 1 green ⏐
⏐
⏐
Protection level 5 ⏐
⏐
⏐
⏐
Position 3 ⏐
⏐
↓
Key 1 red Highest
Protection level 4 Access authorization

Changing access The screen is not automatically updated after a change in access
authorization authorization (e.g., when the key-operated switch position is
changed), but only when the screen is next refreshed (e.g., on closing
and opening a directory).
The currently valid access authorization is checked every time a
function is executed.

If the PLC is in the stop state, the input image of the machine control
panel is not scanned. For this reason, the key-operated switch
positions are not evaluated during commissioning.

Passwords Access authorization can also be set through the input of three
passwords in the basic display of the "Start-Up" operating area.
If the password is set, the key-operated switch positions are
irrelevant.

References Commissioning Manual, Commissioning Base software and HMI-

Embedded; Commissioning HMI-Embedded (IM2): Protection levels

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 2-33
 2 2
Operator Components/Operating Sequences 01/2008
2.3 Keys on the machine control panel

2.3.6 Program control

Cycle Start
Cycle Start Start execution of a selected program:
The associated LED illuminates.

Cycle Stop
Cycle Stop Stop processing of a running parts program:
The associated LED illuminates.
Press the “Cycle Start” key to continue processing.

Single Block
Single Block Execute a part program block by block You can activate the "Single
Block" function in "Automatic" and "MDA" modes. If single block is
activated, the associated LED on the machine control panel lights up.
If single block execution is active,

• Stop is displayed on the screen in the cycle (in the program

control line)
• The message "Stop: Block completed in single block" is
displayed in the channel operational message line (in interrupt
state).
• the current block of the part program is only processed once
you press the "Cycle Start" key,
• Program processing is stopped after one block is executed.
• you can execute the next block by pressing the "Cycle Start" key
again.

You can deselect the function by pressing the "Single block" key
again.

The current status is shown in the program control display (global

machine status display, see Chapter 2 Screen Layout)

This function is dependent on the settings under "Program control" in

the Machine operating area.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

2-34 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 2 2
01/2008 Operator Components/Operating Sequences
2.3 Keys on the machine control panel

Reset (Reset)
Reset
• Execution of the current part program is aborted.
• Messages from the cycle monitoring are deleted (except for
POWER ON, Cycle Start and “Acknowledge alarm” alarms).
• The channel is set to "Reset" state, i.e.,
− The NCK remains synchronized with the machine.
− The control is in its initial state and ready for a new program
run.
(See also)
References Function Manual, Basic Functions; Axes, Coordinate System, Frames
(K1): Mode group, channel, program operation mode

2.3.7 Standard PC keyboard MF-II

A standard PC keyboard can be connected. However, a machine

control panel is required in addition to this keyboard.

The special function keys on the operator panel front can also be
used with the standard PC keyboard. The following table shows the
keys on which the horizontal and vertical softkeys are mapped:

Standard F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12

PC
Keyboard
vertic vertic vertic vertic vertic vertic vertic vertic
with
Soft. Soft. Soft. Soft. Soft. Soft. Soft. Soft. CUSTOM
SHIFT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
horiz horiz horiz horiz horiz horiz horiz horiz
without
Soft. Soft. Soft. Soft. Soft. Soft. Soft. Soft.
SHIFT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Standard Num Block

Page Page
PC Esc Insert Home Up Down Enter Tab
5 1 3 7 9
keyboard

with
SHIFT

without
SHIFT

switched PROGRAM
off OFFSET MANAGER

Num Block

Caution
The standard PC keyboard does not meet the requirements (EMC) of
a SINUMERIK control. For this reason, it should only be used for
installation and servicing purposes.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 2-35
 2 2
Operator Components/Operating Sequences 01/2008
2.4 Screen layout

2.4 Screen layout

2.4.1 Overview

Softkeys
Keys to which functions are assigned by means of a menu bar
displayed on the screen.
− It is possible to access further menu levels via the horizontal
softkeys in any operating area. Each horizontal menu item has a
vertical menu bar/softkey assignment.
− The vertical softkeys are assigned functions for the currently
selected horizontal softkey.

A function is called up by pressing one of the vertical softkeys. The

assignments of the vertical softkey bar can change if further
subsidiary functions are classified under a function.

1. Operating areas
2. Channel status
3. Program status
4. Channel name
5. Alarm and message line
6. Mode
7. Program name/path of the selected program
8. Channel operational messages
9. Program control
10. Additional information (help)
i You can display information by pressing the i key
^ Recall: Return to higher-level menu
> ETC.: Expansion of the softkey bar in the same Menu

11. Working windows, NC displays

The working windows (program editor) and NC displays
(feedrate, tool) available in the selected operating area are
displayed here.
The unit for positional data is preceded by the diameter symbol ∅
in work panes if the axis is currently the transverse axis and the
tool coordinate system is set. If diameter programming is
disabled with DIAMOF, the symbol preceding the unit is no
longer visible.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

2-36 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 2 2
01/2008 Operator Components/Operating Sequences
2.4 Screen layout

12. User response line with user information

Here user information is displayed for the selected function (if
available).

13. Focus
The selected pane is highlighted by a frame. The window header
display is inverted. Data entered on the operator panel front
apply to this window.

14. Horizontal softkeys

15. Vertical softkeys

The softkey functions available in the selected operating area are
displayed in the horizontal and vertical softkey menus
(corresponding to F1 to F8 on the full keyboard).

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 2-37
 2 2
Operator Components/Operating Sequences 01/2008
2.4 Screen layout

2.4.2 Global machine status display

1 Operating areas The currently selected operating area is displayed (Machine,

Parameters, Program, Services, Diagnostics, Commissioning).

2 Channel status The current channel status is displayed

• Channel reset
• Channel interrupted
• Channel active

3 Program status The current status of the running part program is

output:
• Program aborted
• Program running
• Program stopped

4 Channel name Name of channel in which program is running.

5 Alarm and message line • Alarms and messages or

• Instructions that were programmed in the part program using the
MSG command (if no alarms are active)

6 Operating mode display The currently selected operating mode, i.e. Jog, MDA or AUTO
(automatic) is displayed.

7 Program name This program can be executed with Cycle Start.

8 Channel operational 1 Stop: No NC ready

messages 2 Stop: No mode group ready
3 Stop: EMERGENCY STOP active
4 Stop: Alarm active with stop
5 Stop: M0/M1 active
6 Stop: Block ended in SBL mode
7 Stop: Cycle stop active
8 Wait: No read-in enable
9 Wait: No feed enable
10 Wait: Remaining dwell time: ... secs

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

2-38 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 2 2
01/2008 Operator Components/Operating Sequences
2.4 Screen layout

11 Wait: No aux. funct. ackn.

12 Wait: No axis enable
13 Wait: Exact stop not reached
14 Waiting for positioning axis
15 Waiting for spindle
16 Waiting for other channel
17 Wait: Feedrate override to 0%
18 Stop: Error in NC block
19 Waiting for NC blocks from external
20 Waiting due to SYNACT instruction
21 Wait: Block search active
22 Wait: No spindle enable
23 Wait: Axis feedrate value is 0
24 Waiting for tool change acknowledgement
25 Waiting for gear stage change
26 Waiting for position control
27 Waiting for thread cut
28 Wait:
29 Waiting for punching
30 Waiting for safe operation
31 Stop: Channel not ready
32 Stop: Oscillation active
33 Stop: Axis replacement active (block change inhibited
because axis replacement in progress)
34 Waiting for axis container rotation
35 Wait: AXCT axis active as slave axis
36 Wait: AXCT axis active as master axis
37 Wait: AXCT axis changing to follow-up
38 Wait: AXCT internal status change in axis
• Activation of position control
• Requesting of zero marker
• Reference point approach active
• Parameter block change active
• Change of measuring system active
• Measurement on-the-fly active
• Closed-loop controller enable removed
• Axis/spindle disable, status changes

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 2-39
 2 2
Operator Components/Operating Sequences 01/2008
2.4 Screen layout

39 Wait: AXCT axis/spindle disable

40 Wait: AXCT axis overlaid motion active
41 Wait: AXCT axis axis replacement active
42 Wait: AXCT axis interpolator active
43 WAIT_FOR_CC_ENABLE: Waiting for compile cycle
44 Waiting for access to system variable
45 Stop; Serupro has found search target and the NCK has
stopped.
ERUPRO is the abbreviation for SEarchRUn by
PROgramtest; it is a new type of block search. SERUPRO is
activated via PI service "_N_FINDBL" parameter == 5; SW
$[[SW410000]] and later.
46 = Stop; ESR activated
47 Wait: Axis container rotation waiting for spindle stop
48 Wait: Axis container rotation waiting for synchronization of MD
data (New-Config)
49 Waiting for axis replacement: Axis currently coupled
50 Waiting for axis replacement: Liftfast active
51 Waiting for axis replacement: New-Config active
52 Waiting for axis replacement: Axis container rotation active
53 Waiting for axis replacement: Waitp active
54 Waiting for axis replacement: Axis is currently in another
55 channel
Waiting for axis replacement: Axis is currently PLC axis

56Waiting for axis replacement: Axis is currently reciprocating

57axis
58Waiting for axis replacement: Axis is currently jog axis
59Waiting for axis replacement: Axis is currently command axis
60Waiting for axis replacement: Axis is currently OEM axis
Waiting for axis replacement: Axis is currently slave axis in
61 master-value coupling
Waiting for axis replacement: Axis is currently coupled-motion
62 axis
Waiting for axis replacement: Axis is currently coupled slave
axis
9 Program control Functions that have been activated are displayed (settable via
"Program control").

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

2-40 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 2 2
01/2008 Operator Components/Operating Sequences
2.4 Screen layout

2.4.3 Program control display

Only functions that have been activated are visible (settable via
"Program control"). The channel status line is displayed irrespective of
the selected menu.

SKP Skip block

References Function Manual, Basic Functions; Axes, Coordinate System, Frames

(K1): Program control

DRY If you select this softkey, all traversing motions will be performed with
DRY run feedrate the feedrate value specified via the "Dry run feed" setting data. The
dry run feedrate function replaces the programmed travel commands.

ROV The feedrate override switch will also act on the rapid traverse
Rapid traverse override override.

M01 When this function is active, processing of the program is stopped at

Programmed stop every block in which miscellaneous function M01 is programmed.
The message "Stop: M00/M01 active" is then displayed on the screen.
You restart processing with the Cycle Start key. If the function is not
activated, special function M01 (from the part program) is not taken
into account.

M101 According to option set.

Halt at cycle end

DRF When the "DRF" function is active, DRF offsets are applied.
DRF selection

PRT If "Program test" is selected, the output of setpoints to axes and

Program test spindles is disabled. The setpoint display "simulates" the traverse
movements.

FST The activated feed stop is displayed.

Feed stop
This function is not activated/deactivated under Program Control, but
via the Feed Start/Feed Stop keys on the machine control panel.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 2-41
 2 2
Operator Components/Operating Sequences 01/2008
2.5 General operating sequences

2.5 General operating sequences

Keys A range of keys is available in the various operating areas and

menus. The function of the keys is the same in all operating areas.

Functions The following section describes functions which you can select in
several operating modes.

2.5.1 Program overview and program selection

Function
After selection of a workpiece or program overview, individual
workpieces or programs can be enabled or disabled for execution.

Sequence of operations

"AUTO" is selected in the “Services” or "Machine" operating area.

The appropriate channel is selected.
The channel is in reset state.
The workpiece/program to be selected is in the memory.

Program An overview of all workpiece directories/programs that exist is

overview displayed.

Position the cursor on the desired workpiece/program.

Select the workpiece/program for execution:

Program The name of the selected workpiece is displayed on the screen in field
selection "Program name" at the top. The program is then loaded.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

2-42 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 2 2
01/2008 Operator Components/Operating Sequences
2.5 General operating sequences

2.5.2 Selecting and opening a directory/file

The "Direction keys" can be used to position the cursor on the desired
directory/file.
If you enter a character on the alphanumeric keyboard, the cursor
moves to the first name that begins with the character.

Open/close directory:
You can open a directory with the "INPUT" key.

Press "Recall" to close it again.

Open file:
You can open a file with the "INPUT" key if you wish to edit it in the
ASCII editor. The editor is opened automatically.

2.5.3 Editor

Function

The editor is used to create, update and modify programs and texts
(e.g. alarm texts).

Machine manufacturer Please note information supplied by machine tool manufacturer!

Opening a second editor window:

You have the option of opening a second program and displaying this
alongside the one already open on the screen.

Sequence of operations

Press the ETC key. The horizontal softkey menu displays the "2nd file"
2nd file softkey. After pressing the softkey, select another program and open it
using the input key. Now both editor windows are displayed alongside
each other on the screen.
Use the "NEXT WINDOW" key to toggle between the windows.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 2-43
 2 2
Operator Components/Operating Sequences 01/2008
2.5 General operating sequences

Enlarge If you press the "Enlarge window" softkey, the program where the
window cursor is displayed over the whole screen.

Decrease If you press the "Decrease window" softkey, both editor windows are
window displayed next to each other.

Close editor
Close
Editor The current program overview appears again when you activate the
"Close editor" softkey.
Changes are saved in the program immediately when the cursor
leaves the modified line.

Editor settings
You can define the following values in the "Editor Settings" window:
• Newly created program enabled automatically after it is closed.
• Hide the "Line feed“ block end,
see also Chapter 6: Selective Program Protection: RO
• Display hidden lines (HD) in the program,
see also Chapter 6: Hidden program lines: display HD
• Shorten time for positioning in a large file (e.g. in mold
construction). Enter the size of the file in KB from which you wish
to disable line checking.

Sequence of operations

Press the horizontal softkey "Settings"

Settings

Editor Press the vertical softkey “Editor Settings” to open the window for the
Settings Editor settings:

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

2-44 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 2 2
01/2008 Operator Components/Operating Sequences
2.5 General operating sequences

2.5.4 Contour programming

Contour Press the “Contour settings” softkey to open the window and make
Settings the settings for contour programming.
• Enter in the line below "Text output at the end of the contour
programming" the text that is to appear after each contour, e.g.
"Contour end"
• Setting the technology: Select “Turning”
• Display the softkeys for contour elements as symbols or text.

For information on what to do next, see Section 6: Free contour

programming

2.5.5 Summary of ranges

Program Press the “Program overview” softkey to select one of the available
overview drives, which become the default selection for operations such as
saving.

2.5.6 Toggling between menu windows

You can toggle between individual menu windows with the “NEXT
WINDOW” key. You only need to do this if you wish to enter data on
the operator panel front. The focus changes to the selected menu
window (the header and border of the active window appear in a
different display format).

Scroll in menu window:

If a window contains more information than can be shown at once, a
scroll bar is shown and you can scroll through the contents of the
window with “PAGE UP” and “PAGE DOWN”.

Position cursor in menu window:

You can position the cursor at the desired point in the menu window
with the direction keys.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 2-45
 2 2
Operator Components/Operating Sequences 01/2008
2.5 General operating sequences

2.5.7 Edit inputs/values

If you wish to edit inputs/values, the corresponding key is always

displayed automatically on the right of the input field. The following
input fields are available:

1. Option buttons (single selection button/multiple option

button):
You can use the "Select" key to activate or deactivate a selection
field.
Multiple selector button Single-option button/option button
(you can select several options or (only one option can be active at a
none) time)

= active = active
= not active = not active

2. Input fields:
Position the cursor on the input field and start to type. When you
begin typing, you automatically switch to Insert mode.

Always confirm your input with the "INPUT" key. The value is
accepted.

To explicitly alter an existing value, press the "INSERT" key to switch

to input mode

Enter the value or word (e.g. file name, etc.) on the alphanumeric
keypad.

In some fields you can choose between several preset values using
the "SELECT" key.

The editor displays only the characters which can be input via the
operator panel front keyboard.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

2-46 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 2 2
01/2008 Operator Components/Operating Sequences
2.5 General operating sequences

2.5.8 Confirming/canceling input

Confirming input:

Your inputs are accepted when you press the "OK" softkey. The
OK
selected function is executed. The window is closed, and you return to
the menu level from which the window was called.

Canceling input:
Abort Your inputs are rejected if you select the "Abort" softkey. The selected
function is aborted. The window is closed and you return to the menu
level from which the window was called.
The response is the same on return from a function (vertical softkey
bar).

The "Edit" key can also have an "Undo" function if you abandon the
input/modification you have just entered. The cursor remains
positioned in the currently selected field.

Switch from the horizontal menu level back to the call menu level.

2.5.9 Editing a part program in the ASCII editor

Function

The editor provides you with the following functions:

• Switch between insert and overwrite mode
• Select, copy, delete block
• Paste block
• Position cursor / find/replace text
• Create contour (programming support)
• Parameterize cycles (drilling, milling, turning)
• Start simulation
• Recompile (cycles, free contour programming)
• Renumbering blocks
• Change settings

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 2-47
 2 2
Operator Components/Operating Sequences 01/2008
2.5 General operating sequences

Additional information
A part program selected in the NCK can generally only be edited
when the channel is in the reset state.
When a part program is selected and the relevant channel is in the
"Channel Reset" state, the program can be fully edited.

Sequence of operations

The following functions are fully enabled in the Program operating

area but only partially in the Machine, Services and IBN operating
areas.
In the Machine operating area the ASCII editor is called via the
program editor, and in the Services operating area by selecting a file
in the file manager.

You have selected the file that you want to edit in the directory and
you press the INPUT key:
The vertical softkey bar changes.
Your selected file is opened in the text editor.

Cursor block:

Use the "Direction keys" to position the cursor in the text.

You can page up and down using the "Page" keys.

The character on which the cursor is positioned is deleted.

Press the BACKSPACE key to delete the character to the left of the
cursor.

Press the INPUT key to end a block. "LF" ("Line Feed") is

automatically generated. The block will not be accepted for
processing without a line feed character.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

2-48 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 2 2
01/2008 Operator Components/Operating Sequences
2.5 General operating sequences

Vertical softkeys

Overwrite
Overwrite The cursor toggles between insert and overwrite modes.

Select Block
Select
When you press this softkey, the vertical softkey bar changes. The
block
area marked by the cursor is selected.

Copy The selected block is copied to a buffer. It remains stored in the buffer
block even if another part program
is selected.

Delete The selected block is deleted.

block

You can cancel select mode with softkey "Select block" or “SELECT”.
Select
A block generated with the support function is not automatically
block or
selected.

A limit is applied to the block area which can be selected. When the
limit is reached the following warning appears in the dialog line:
"Buffer limit for selection reached".

Paste block
Paste
This softkey pastes the cut or copied block from the buffer into the text
block
in front of the cursor position.

Find/Go to...
Find/
Go to The "Find/Go to..." window is opened.
You can select functions for positioning and searching via the vertical
softkeys:

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 2-49
 2 2
Operator Components/Operating Sequences 01/2008
2.5 General operating sequences

The following search methods are available:

Start of • Search to the beginning of the part program (cursor on the first
Program or character in the program)

End of • the end of the part program (cursor on the last character in the
Program or program) and

Find
• Search for a particular character string with "Find"
Go to • Or proceed to a particular NC block with "Go to.."

Enter the block number you are looking for.

• If the line being searched for contains an "N" or ":” you are taken
to the block in question.
• A message is output if there is no block with the specified
number.

OK
Press the "OK" softkey or the "INPUT" key to position the cursor on
the block number/line number of your choice.
The "Go to..." window is closed.

Abort
If you press “Abort” the positioning process is stopped and the window
closed.
Find
"Find"
Enter the character string you wish to find.

The string you enter is sought downwards from the current cursor
position, the find result appears as highlighted text.

You can start a new search by pressing the "Find Next" softkey or the
Find
"INPUT" key.
next or

Enter the new text with the "Replace" softkey.

Replace The text found is replaced by the replacement text. The new text is
or
replaced when you press "INPUT". Every time you press "INPUT", a
new find and replace process is started.

Abort
If you press “Abort”, the Find + Replace process is stopped and the
window closed. You are in "Edit mode" again.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

2-50 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 2 2
01/2008 Operator Components/Operating Sequences
2.5 General operating sequences

Modifications are saved in the file in the editor by pressing the "Save
Save file" softkey.
file

Additional information
Please note that the changes to programs stored in the NCK memory
take immediate effect.

Horizontal softkeys
Free contour programming
New You can call the free control programming function via softkeys
Support
Contour "Support" and "New contour".

Accept The part program block is inserted in the part programs with the
contour appropriate parameter settings.

Cycle parameterization
The following programming support functions are available:
• Drilling, milling, turning (cycles)
• Contouring (free contour programming)

You can call up the relevant cycle parameter settings via the Drilling,
Drilling Milling
Milling, Turning vertical softkeys.
Turning
Enter the new values for the cycle parameters.

OK
The part program block is inserted in the part programs with the
appropriate parameter settings.
Example:
CYCLE81 (110, 100, 2, 35)
References Programming Manual Cycles

Simulation
Simulation
The simulation function is called.
Pressing the "Cycle Start" key starts the graphics simulation.
See Section: 6, Subsection on "Program Simulation"

Recompilation
If program steps (cycle/contour) have already been parameterized but
must be changed, you can display and edit the parameter values with
their meanings.

Position the cursor in the text editor on the line with the program step
(contour/cycle) whose parameters you wish to change.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 2-51
 2 2
Operator Components/Operating Sequences 01/2008
2.5 General operating sequences

A screen form containing the parameter settings for the selected

Recompil.
cycle/contour appears on the screen.

Change the parameters.

OK
The part program block is automatically inserted in the part program
with the new parameter settings.

Renumber
The block numbering in the program shown in the editor is executed
again according to the values defined under the "Settings" softkey.
Once the softkey is selected another window opens. Specify the
"Block number" and the "Increment".

Machine manufacturer The coordinate system and the technology to be used are set via the
machine data.
Please follow the machine manufacturer's instructions!

References Commissioning Manual, Commissioning Base software and HMI-

Embedded; Commissioning HMI-Embedded (IM2): Coordinate
systems

2.5.10 Channel switchover

It is possible to switch between channels when several are in use.

Since individual channels may be assigned to different mode
groups, a channel switchover command is also an implicit mode
switchover command.
When a "Channel menu" is configured, all existing communication
links are displayed on softkeys.

Channel statuses The following three channel statuses can occur in each mode:
1. Channel reset
The machine is in the initial state, e.g., after power-on or after end
of program. The initial state is defined by the machine-tool
manufacturer in the PLC program.

2. Channel active
A program has been started, program execution or reference point
approach is in progress.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

2-52 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 2 2
01/2008 Operator Components/Operating Sequences
2.5 General operating sequences

3. Channel interrupted
The running program or reference point approach has been
interrupted.

In this context, a program can be a main program, subprogram, cycle

or a series of NC blocks.

There are different levels:

1. Switch to next channel.
2. Switch over configured channel group/channels (1 NCU).

Function
You can set up a link in any operating area between the HMI unit and
the connected NCK/PLC units via the operator interface.

Activate the channel switchover key. The currently existing connection

is displayed by means of the highlighted softkeys (horizontal, vertical)
if the channel menu is active.

Channel switchover
You can switch to other channels by means of the vertically arranged
softkeys.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 2-53
 2 2
Operator Components/Operating Sequences 01/2008
2.5 General operating sequences

Additional information

• A channel selection is triggered by selection of a vertical softkey.

• Channels that are configured in the channel menu, but defined as
a channel gap in the corresponding NCK, will not be displayed.

2.5.11 Pocket calculator

Prerequisite:
The cursor is positioned on an input field or input/output field.

You can switch to Pocket calculator mode with the equals key.
=
In this state, if you enter a basic arithmetic symbol (+, -, /, *) followed
by a value (e.g. 13.5) and

then press the input key, the next value entered is calculated with the
preceding value.
If the input/output field is opened with the input or equals key, the
editor is in insert mode; if the field is opened directly with a character,
the editor is in write-over mode.

Help display
If pocket calculator mode is active, you can call a help display which
explains how to operate the input editor by pressing the Info key.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

2-54 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 2 2
01/2008 Operator Components/Operating Sequences
2.5 General operating sequences

2.5.12 Entering fittings

Function
The letter "F" ("f") is used to identify a fitting. The letter is followed by
the diameter/length specification. This is followed by the tolerance
class and the tolerance quality identifier.
The arithmetic mean is calculated from the upper and lower limiting
value and displayed in the field.

Note

Angle specifications are not supported.

Example:
F20H7 This input stands for 20H7
or: F20h7 This input stands for 20H7
or:
F = fitting
20 = diameter/length specification (1... 500 mm)
H (h) = tolerance class (tolerance classes for drill holes and shafts:
A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, J, JS, T, U, V, X, Y,
Z, ZA, ZB, ZC)
7 = tolerance quality identifier (01... 18, DIN standard 7150
limits the area!)

Limitations: 1. The diameter/length must be specified as an integer.

2. Quality identifiers 6, 7, 8 are available for class J.
3. For class j, only qualities 5, 6, 7 and 8 are available for diameter
1...3 mm.
4. Only qualities 8...18 are available for classes P, R, S; T, U, V, X,
Y, Z, ZA, ZB, ZC, p, r, s, t, u, v, x, y, z, za, zb, zc.
5. Qualities CD, EF, FG, cd, ef, fg are only available for up to
10 mm.
6. According to the standard,
7. classes T, t are only available for diameters > 24 mm,
classes T, t are only available for diameters > 14 mm,
classes Y, y are only available for diameters > 18 mm,
Recompilation of the value is not possible.

Upper / lower case:

Because the control panel has lower-case lettering and there is not
option for shifting to upper case, an external keyboard is required for
input of upper and lower case.

When you have finished, press the ENTER key to confirm your input.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 2-55
 2 2
Operator Components/Operating Sequences 01/2008
2.5 General operating sequences

2.5.13 “Blue screen” error status screen

In the event of a system crash, an error status screen displays the

current system information. The screen shows a brief description of
the error and displays any relevant process registers.
You will find various options for saving system information in the
following documentation:
References Commissioning Manual, Commissioning Base software and HMI-
Embedded; Commissioning HMI-Embedded (IM2): "Blue screen" error
status screen

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

2-56 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 3 3
01/2008 Example of Operation

Example of Operation

3.1 Typical operating sequence ...................................................................................... 3-58

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 3-57
 3 3
Example of Operation 01/2008
3.1 Typical operating sequence

3.1 Typical operating sequence

To provide support for entry-level users or an orientation guide for
others, this section uses a typical operating sequence (from control
system power-up to back-up of a user-generated part program) to
explain how the functions described can be located.

Step Described in
Section
Setup • Switch on machine 1.2

• Reference point approach 4.3

• Clamp workpiece/blank 5

• Select tools 5

• Define workpiece zero for coordinate inputs 5.8

• Enter tool offsets 5.2

• Calculate speeds and feedrates 4.2

• Define a reference point (scratching) 4.4

Enter/test a program • Create a part program or read 6.4

one in via an external data interface 7.5
• Select a part program 4.6

• Execute a trial program run (without a tool)

- Start a part program 4.2
(e.g., in single block)
- Edit part program using program editing
function or diagnostics guide/help 4.6
8.1
• Optimize a part program 4.2

Machining the workpiece • Use tool and execute machining program 5.2

Store a program • Save a part program 6.7

- on external storage devices 4.6, 7.5

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

3-58 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 4 4
01/2008 Machine operating area

Machine operating area

4.1 Data structure of the NCK control ............................................................................. 4-60

4.1.1 Operating modes and machine functions ................................................................. 4-60
4.1.2 Operating mode group and channels ....................................................................... 4-62
4.1.3 Selecting / changing operating mode ....................................................................... 4-63

4.2 General functions and displays................................................................................. 4-65

4.2.1 Start/stop/abort/continue part program ..................................................................... 4-65
4.2.2 Displaying a program level........................................................................................ 4-66
4.2.3 Toggle between machine/workpiece coordinate system (MCS/WCS) ..................... 4-67
4.2.4 Actual value display: Settable zero point system, SZS ............................................ 4-69
4.2.5 Displaying axis feedrates .......................................................................................... 4-69
4.2.6 Displaying spindles ................................................................................................... 4-70
4.2.7 Displaying auxiliary functions.................................................................................... 4-71
4.2.8 Display transformations, G functions, and swivel data record.................................. 4-72
4.2.9 Handwheel ................................................................................................................ 4-73
4.2.10 Preset........................................................................................................................ 4-74
4.2.11 Setting the actual value............................................................................................. 4-75
4.2.12 Inch/metric switchover .............................................................................................. 4-76
4.3 Approaching a reference point.................................................................................. 4-77

4.4 Jog mode .................................................................................................................. 4-79

4.4.1 Function and main screen......................................................................................... 4-79
4.4.2 Traversing axes......................................................................................................... 4-82
4.4.3 Inc: dimension ........................................................................................................... 4-83
4.4.4 REPOS...................................................................................................................... 4-84
4.4.5 SI (Safety Integrated): User confirmation ................................................................. 4-85
4.4.6 Scratching/Determining the work offset .................................................................... 4-86

4.5 MDA mode ................................................................................................................ 4-89

4.5.1 Function and main screen......................................................................................... 4-89
4.5.2 Saving a program...................................................................................................... 4-91
4.5.3 Teach In .................................................................................................................... 4-91

4.6 Automatic mode ........................................................................................................ 4-94

4.6.1 Function and main screen......................................................................................... 4-94
4.6.2 Executing programs .................................................................................................. 4-96
4.6.3 Program editing......................................................................................................... 4-97
4.6.4 Setting the block search/search target ..................................................................... 4-98
4.6.5 Accelerated block search for execution from external source ................................ 4-101
4.6.6 Overstoring.............................................................................................................. 4-102
4.6.7 Program control....................................................................................................... 4-104
4.6.8 DRF offset ............................................................................................................... 4-105

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 4-59
 4 4
Machine operating area 01/2008
4.1 Data structure of the NCK control

4.1 Data structure of the NCK control

Function

• NCK with part program memory

• Part programs are processed in different channels (one program
per channel).

HMI-Embedded The data are always in the NCK and are also directly modified there.

HMI
Embedded

RS-232
interface

Display
Edit Edit
data

Tool offset TOA Program memory Channel 1 Axis

Work offset ZOA Parts program
R Variables Subroutine Channel n Axis

HMI Embedded GUD Workpieces NC

4.1.1 Operating modes and machine functions

Function

The Machine operating area includes all functions and influencing

variables which initiate actions on the machine tool or measure its
status.
There are three different modes in this area:
• Jog:
"Jog" is the mode required for manual operation and setting up of
the machine. The setup functions provided are "Reference point
approach", "Repositioning", "Handwheel" or "Traverse in preset
increments" and "Redefine control zero" (preset).

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

4-60 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 4 4
01/2008 Machine operating area
4.1 Data structure of the NCK control

• MDA: Semi-automatic operation

Part programs can be set up and processed block by block in this
mode. The tested blocks can then be stored in the part program.
• Teach In:
In “Teach In” mode, positions can be traversed and stored to
generate motion sequences which are then stored in the MDA
program.
• Automatic: Fully automatic operation
Part programs are executed fully automatically in “Automatic”
mode, i.e., part programs are selected, started, corrected,
selectively controlled (e.g., single block) and executed in
Automatic.

Select machine area

You can switch to the "Machine" area at any time from any of the
other operating areas simply by pressing the "Machine area" key.
Machine

When you switch on the control, it is usually in the "Machine"

operating area and in "Jog" mode. (Please consult the machine
manufacturer's documentation!)

Machine manufacturer The state after power-up can be configured and might therefore
deviate from the default.

Machine functions In operating mode "Jog" you can select the following machine
functions via the machine control panel or softkeys in the basic menu:

Inc (traverse in preset increments)

VAR
Repos (repositioning according to a defined position)
Repos

Ref (reference point approach to coordinate machine with the control

Ref Point zero points)

In "MDA" mode, it is possible to select "Teach-in" (storage of motion

Teach In sequences in a part program through position approach) by pressing
the MCP key.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 4-61
 4 4
Machine operating area 01/2008
4.1 Data structure of the NCK control

Preparation for To start actual production, some preparatory measures must be

production taken:
1. Set up the tools and workpiece
2. Traverse the tools/workpiece to the start position specified in the
setup plan
3. Download the part program to the control memory
4. Check/enter the work offsets
5. Check/enter the tool offsets

4.1.2 Operating mode group and channels

Function

Every channel behaves like an independent NCK in which a maximum

of one part program can be processed.
• Control with one channel:
Only one operating mode group exists.
• Control with several channels:
Channels can be grouped to form several "mode groups."
Example:
Control with 4 channels, where machining is carried out in 2
channels and 2 other channels are used to control the transport
of the new workpieces.
Mode Group1 Channel 1 (machining)
Channel 2 (transport)
Mode Group2 Channel 3 (machining)
Channel 4 (transport)

Technologically-related channels can be combined to form a mode

group.
Axes and spindles of the same mode group can be controlled by one
or more channels.
An operating mode group is in one of "Automatic", "Jog" or "MDA"
operating modes, i.e., several channels of an operating mode group
can never assume different operating modes.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

4-62 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 4 4
01/2008 Machine operating area
4.1 Data structure of the NCK control

4.1.3 Selecting / changing operating mode

Function

The defined modes for operating a SINUMERIK control system are

Jog, MDA and Automatic. They are selected via the MCP or by means
of softkeys.

Machine manufacturer Whether the requested mode can be accessed and the manner in
which it is accessed can be configured for a specific machine in the
PLC program.

Mode change Not all mode changes are permitted.

An error message is output if a mode change request is rejected by
the system. The error message will indicate the error cause and
possibly the remedy.

Sequence of operations

Selection of mode
The selected mode is displayed in the mode field on the screen.

Machine Jog
1
Channel Reset
Program aborted

1 = operating mode

Press one of the keys on the machine control panel to select the
modes:
Jog • Jog

MDA • MDA

Auto • Automatic

or
Press the “MENU SELECT” range switching key and the
corresponding vertical softkey:

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 4-63
 4 4
Machine operating area 01/2008
4.1 Data structure of the NCK control

AUTO
• Automatic

MDA
• MDA

JOG
• JOG

When a mode is selected, the LED next to the selection key on the
MCP lights up. The same status is signaled in the mode field on the
screen.

Additional information

The main screen of the selected mode appears on the screen.

If a mode change is not possible, please contact your installation

engineer, the machine-tool manufacturer or our service personnel.
In many cases, a mode change is enabled for trained personnel only
on safety grounds. To provide this type of protection, the control
system offers a facility for disabling or enabling mode changes.

References Function Manual, Fundamentals; Mode group, Channel, Program

operation mode (K1)

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

4-64 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 4 4
01/2008 Machine operating area
4.2 General functions and displays

4.2 General functions and displays

4.2.1 Start/stop/abort/continue part program

Function
The following section describes how to start and stop part programs
and to resume them after they have been aborted.

Sequence of operations

"AUTO" mode is selected in the "Machine" operating area.

Prerequisite:
• No alarms are pending.
• The program is selected.
• Feed enable is active.
• Spindle enable is set.

Start part program:

Cycle Start The part program is started and executed.

Stop/abort part program:

The program run is interrupted, but can be restarted with "Cycle Start"
Cycle Stop

The current program is aborted.

Reset

Continue part program:

After a program interruption ("Cycle Stop") you can retract the tool
("Jog") from the contour in manual mode. The control saves the
coordinates of the point of interruption. The distances traversed are
displayed.

Repositioning:
Select the "Machine" operating area.
Machine

Select "Jog" mode.

Press the "Repos" key to reposition the tool on the contour.
Repos

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 4-65
 4 4
Machine operating area 01/2008
4.2 General functions and displays

Turning machine:
Press the "+X" or "-X" key.
+X ...
X
Milling machine:
Select the axis to be traversed and
X ...
9th Axis

press the "+" or "–" key.

+ ...
Traverse the axes to the point of interruption.

4.2.2 Displaying a program level

Function
If subprograms are called while a part program is running, the block
numbers for the main program and subprograms together with their
pass number (P) can be displayed.

Sequence of operations

"AUTO" mode is selected in the "Machine" operating area.

Program When you press the "Program level" softkey, the window headed
level "Program level" appears instead of the "Current block" window. The
softkey labeling changes to "Current block".

During execution of a part program, the block numbers for the main
program and subprograms, together with their pass number (P), are
displayed in the "Program level" window. The main level is always
visible, a nesting depth of up to 12 can be displayed.

Current When you press the "Current block" softkey, the "Current block"
block window containing the program blocks of the current part program is
displayed again.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

4-66 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 4 4
01/2008 Machine operating area
4.2 General functions and displays

4.2.3 Toggle between machine/workpiece coordinate system (MCS/WCS)

Function

The display can be toggled between the machine and workpiece

coordinate systems by means of special key "MCS/WCS" on the MCP
or via softkeys (depending on MCP model and user program). The
actual position display for the distance-to-go and the corresponding
axes change.

Machine axes Machine axes are axes that actually exist on the machine and have
been parameterized during installation.

Geometry axes and These are the axes programmed in the part program. Geometry axes
special axes and special axes are offset by the selected work offset relative to the
machine axes.
Three is the maximum number of Cartesian geometry axes.

MCS The machine coordinate system (= MCS) refers to the coordinates of

the machine axes, i.e., all machine axes are displayed in the machine
coordinate system.

Machine position Repos offset

X
Y
Z
WCS An offset (e.g., work offset, rotation) can be used to set up a
relationship, e.g., with the workpiece clamp. This relationship defines
the position of the workpiece coordinate system (= Work) in relation to
the machine coordinate system. The workpiece is always represented
in a Cartesian coordinate system.
All geometry axes and special axes are displayed in the workpiece
coordinate system.

Work position Repos offset

X1
Y1
C1

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 4-67
 4 4
Machine operating area 01/2008
4.2 General functions and displays

Machine manufacturer Machine data are used to define whether the programmed frames are
to be calculated when displaying the WCS (settable zero system =
SZS display).
Please follow the machine manufacturer's instructions!

Sequence of operations

"Jog" mode is selected in the "Machine" operating area.

Act. val The actual values of the machine axes and their positions are
MCS displayed.
The softkey label changes to "Act. val. WCS".
The machine coordinate system comprises all the physically existing
machine axes. References points, tool and pallet change points are
defined in the MCS.

Act. Val. When you press the "Act. val. WCS" softkey, the geometry and
WCS auxiliary axes plus their positions appear in the "Position" window.
The softkey label changes to "Act. val. MCS".

The workpiece coordinate system is assigned to a specific workpiece.

Settings in the NCK program refer to the WCS.

Zoom Once the “Zoom actual value” softkey has been pressed, the display
act. val. comes up in enlarged view.
You can get back to normal view via the Recall key.

• You can also toggle between the workpiece and machine

WCS MCS coordinate systems by pressing the "WCS/MCS" key on the
MCP.
• The number of places displayed after the decimal point and units
of measurement can be set in machine data.

Function

Coordinate system for Via the MD you can define whether the actual values are to be
changing the actual value displayed
display • without the programmed offsets = WCS or
• including programmed offsets = SZS (settable zero offset
system).

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

4-68 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 4 4
01/2008 Machine operating area
4.2 General functions and displays

Example:
Program WCS display SZS display
....
N110 X100 100 100
N120 X0 0 0
N130 $P_PFRAME=CTRANS(X,10) 0 0
N140 X100 100 110
N150 ...

References Function Manual, Fundamentals; Axes, Coordinate Systems, Frames

(K2)

4.2.4 Actual value display: Settable zero point system, SZS

Function

You can set which data must be displayed in the actual value display
via MD:
• The position of the workpiece coordinate system, WCS (=
programmed position, corresponds to default setting) or
• the tool holder position of the active tool relative to workpiece zero
(settable zero offset system)

For configuring instructions, see:

References Commissioning Manual, Commissioning Base software and HMI-
Embedded; Commissioning HMI-Embedded (IM2): Work offset

4.2.5 Displaying axis feedrates

Function
In operating mode "Jog" or "MDA" or "AUTO", you can display the
current feedrate, residual path information and the associated
override data.

Sequence of operations

"Jog" mode is selected in the "Machine" operating area.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 4-69
 4 4
Machine operating area 01/2008
4.2 General functions and displays

Press the "Axis feedrate" softkey:

Axis • With "Machine" the feed window is displayed with the current
feedrate feedrates and distance-to-go information as well as the
associated override.
• With "Work" the feed window for the axes taking part in the
interpolation is displayed with the current feed and the distance-
to-go information with path override; for the remaining axes the
current feed and distance-to-go information is displayed with
single-axis override.

You can use the "Page" keys to display other axes if required.
or

4.2.6 Displaying spindles

Function
The current spindle values (actual speed, setpoint speed, position on
oriented spindle stop, spindle override and power) are displayed.

Sequence of operations

"AUTO"/"MDA"/"Jog" mode is selected in the "Machine" operating

area.

The “Spindle” window section is activated and shows the following

Spindle
data:
• Spindle speed setpoint and actual value
• Spindle position
• Spindle override switch position
• Spindle power (%)
• Spindle load (for max. 2 analog spindles)

Using the "Page" keys you can scroll up and down to display other
spindles if any are configured.
or
Additional information

• The "Spindle" window is only displayed if at least one spindle is

configured.
• If a master spindle “S1” is configured, this is automatically
displayed in the spindle window, even if it is not the first spindle.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

4-70 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 4 4
01/2008 Machine operating area
4.2 General functions and displays

4.2.7 Displaying auxiliary functions

Function
Auxiliary functions that are active in the selected channel are
displayed.
Modal M functions remain active until they are deleted or overwritten
by another command.
M functions are not merely displayed block-by-block, but also remain
visible for as long as they are active.
Sequence of operations

"AUTO"/"MDA"/"Jog" mode is selected in the "Machine" operating

area.

Auxiliary The “Auxiliary function” window section is shown.

function

The statuses of M functions are displayed as follows:

M function active
M function retrieved during search, but not yet output to PLC
M function output to PLC but not yet acknowledged
(yellow text on black background signifies: Wait)
Window division
4 lines are displayed:
1. Row: Standard M functions:
M03/M04/M05/M19, M7/M8, M40/M41/M42/M43/M44/M45
2. Row: customized, grouped together M functions
3. Row: non-grouped M functions
4. Row: H functions

The lines are oriented toward the actual value positions.

A maximum of 5 M functions and 3 H functions can be displayed on
each line.
Example:

References Function Manual Fundamentals

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 4-71
 4 4
Machine operating area 01/2008
4.2 General functions and displays

4.2.8 Display transformations, G functions, and swivel data record

Function
Active transformations and G functions can be displayed in the active
channel.

Sequence of operations

"AUTO"/"MDA"/"Jog" mode is selected in the "Machine" operating

area.

Transform./ The window "Transformation/ G functions" with the active G functions

G functions and transformations is displayed.

Using the "Page" keys you can scroll up and down to display other G
functions.
or

Additional information
Every G group has a fixed location.
The group number (no.) and the current G function of the G groups
are displayed only if a G function is active.

References Function Manual Fundamentals

Swivel data status display Prerequisite:

The swivel function (CYCLE800) has been set up by the machine
manufacturer.

The active swivel data record (toolholder with orientation capability

TOOLCARRIER) is displayed along with the transformations.
The following values are displayed:
TCARR = 1 .. n* *n max. no. of set swivel
data (TOOLCARRIER) that are active.

References Programming Manual Cycles: Swiveling

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

4-72 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 4 4
01/2008 Machine operating area
4.2 General functions and displays

4.2.9 Handwheel

Function
Using the "Handwheel" function, you can assign an axis to the
handwheels and activate them.

Sequence of operations

"Jog" mode is selected in the "Machine" operating area.

Handwheel
The “Handwheel” window section is activated.

Position the cursor on the handwheel of your choice (1-3).

An axis identifier is suggested in the "Axis" field. All other existing

axes can be selected via the "SELECT" key. The settings are
accepted immediately and an axis is assigned to each handwheel (1-
3).

Every time you press the "SELECT" key in the "Enable" field you
activate or deactivate enabling of the relevant handwheel. The
settings become active immediately.
When you turn the handwheel, the assigned axis traverses by the
number of increments set for it ("Inc" keys).

OK
Confirm these settings with the "OK" softkey.

Machine manufacturer The machine manufacturer is responsible for the design of

handwheels. Operation may therefore differ from the explanation
above.
Please follow the machine manufacturer's instructions!

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 4-73
 4 4
Machine operating area 01/2008
4.2 General functions and displays

4.2.10 Preset

Function

The "Preset" function can be used to redefine the control zero in the
machine coordinate system.
The preset values act on machine axes.
Axes do not move when "Preset" is active.

Danger

After the actual value has been reset, none of the protection zones or
software limit switches are operative! The protection zones and
software limit switches are only reactivated following another
reference point approach.

Additional information

A new position value is entered for the current axis positions.

Machine manufacturer Please follow the machine manufacturer's instructions!

Sequence of operations

"Jog" mode is selected in the "Machine" operating area.

The "Preset" window appears on the screen.

Preset

Enter the new actual value, which must in future correspond to the
current axis position, for each individual axis. By doing so, you are
redefining the control zero in the MCS. When the control zero is
redefined, the tool change point, for example, also changes.

OK
Confirm the settings with the “OK” softkey.

Additional information

Machine manufacturer The "Preset" function can be disabled by means of protection levels
(keylock switch position).

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

4-74 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 4 4
01/2008 Machine operating area
4.2 General functions and displays

4.2.11 Setting the actual value

Function

The "Set actual value" function sets the workpiece coordinate system
to a defined actual coordinate and calculates the resultant offset
between the old and a newly entered actual value in the WCS in the
1st basic offset.

The "Set actual value" function can only be used if the control is in the
workpiece coordinate system.
The functions are stored under the same softkey as “Preset”.

Machine manufacturer Please follow the machine manufacturer's instructions!

References Commissioning Manual, Commissioning Base software and HMI-

Embedded; Commissioning HMI-Embedded (IM2)

Set actual value assigns the 1st base offset, rough.

Sequence of operations

Set actual The new position setpoint of the axes in the workpiece coordinate
value system can be entered using "Set actual value" in the actual value
1 9 window. When you transfer a value to the system by pressing "Input",
... the deviation from the current actual value is entered in the basic
offset. The new actual value is displayed in the "Position" column.

Delete "Delete Basic WO" can be selected to undo all the previously entered
Basic WO offset settings.
OK
Confirm with "OK".

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 4-75
 4 4
Machine operating area 01/2008
4.2 General functions and displays

4.2.12 Inch/metric switchover

Function

The control system can operate with the inch or the metric system of
measurement. You can switch between the inch and metric
measuring systems in the "Machine" operating area. The control
converts the values accordingly.

Machine manufacturer The switchover is only possible if:

• The corresponding machine data have been set.
• All channels are in the Reset state.
• Axes are not traversing with JOG, DRF or PLC control.
• Constant grinding wheel peripheral speed (GWPS) is not active.

The display resolution for the inch system of measurement is defined

by machine data.

Actions such as part program start or mode change are disabled for
the duration of the switchover.

Sequence of operations
"AUTO"/"MDA"/"Jog" mode is selected in the "Machine" operating
area.
Press the “ETC” key followed by

the “Switch mm > inch” softkey.

Switch
mm > inch
When the measuring system is changed, all length-related parameters
are automatically converted to the new measuring system from the
perspective of the user.

The switchover is displayed with a corresponding message on the

user interface, e.g.:
“Notice! Measuring system is switched from metric to inches”

References Function Manual, Fundamentals; Velocities, Setpoint-Actual Value

Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) Metric/inch measuring system
Commissioning Manual, Commissioning Base software and HMI-
Embedded; Commissioning HMI-Embedded (IM2)

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

4-76 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 4 4
01/2008 Machine operating area
4.2 General functions and displays

4.3 Approaching a reference point

Function
The "Ref Point" function ensures that the control and machine are
synchronized after Power ON.
Before a reference point approach can be carried out, the axes must
be located at positions (if necessary, traversed to these positions
using the axis keys/handwheel) from where the machine reference
point can be approached without collision.
If reference point approach is called from a part program, all axes can
be traversed simultaneously.

Reference point approach can only be performed by machine axes.

The actual value display does not match the real position of the axes
when the control is switched on.

Caution
• If the axes are not safely positioned, you must traverse them to
safe positions in "Jog" or "MDA" mode.
• You must follow the axis motions directly on the machine!
• Ignore the actual value display until the axes have been
referenced!
• The software limit switches are not active!

Machine manufacturer Please follow the machine manufacturer's instructions!

Sequence of operations

"Jog" or "MDA" is selected in the "Machine" operating area.

The channel for reference point approach is selected.

The "Ref Point" machine function is selected.

Ref Point REF
or
Turning machine:
Press the "Axis" keys.
+X ...
X
Milling machine:
Select the axis to be traversed and
X ...
9th Axis

then press the "+" or "-" key.

+

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 4-77
 4 4
Machine operating area 01/2008
4.2 General functions and displays

The selected axis moves to the reference point. The direction and
sequence is defined by the machine manufacturer in the PLC
program.
If you have pressed the wrong direction key, the action is not
accepted and the axes do not move.
The display shows the reference point value.

No symbol is displayed for axes that are not referred to a

reference point.

This symbol appears for axes that must be

referenced.

This symbol is displayed next to the axis when the reference

point has been reached.

The axis, once started, can be stopped before it reaches the

Feed Stop reference point.

Turning machine:
+X ...
X Press the "Axis" keys.

Milling machine:
X ...
9th Axis Select the axis to be traversed and
then press the "+" or "-" key.
+ The selected axis moves to the reference point.

Caution

The machine is synchronized as soon as the reference point is

reached. The actual value display is set to the reference point value.
The display is the difference between the machine zero and the slide
reference point. From now on, path limits, such as software limit
switches, are active.

You can end the function by selecting another operating mode ("Jog",
"MDA" or "Automatic").

• All axes of a mode group can approach the reference point

simultaneously (depending on the PLC program of the machine-
tool manufacturer).
• The feedrate override is active.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

4-78 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 4 4
01/2008 Machine operating area
4.4 Jog mode

Machine manufacturer Your machine manufacturer will instruct you how to select axes if you
intend to enter more than nine.

Additional information
The sequence in which axes must be referenced can be defined by
the machine-tool manufacturer.

The machine can be started in Automatic mode only when all axes
with a defined reference point (see machine data MD) have reached
it.

4.4 Jog mode

4.4.1 Function and main screen

Function
In manual mode you can:
1. Synchronize the control measuring system with the machine
(reference point approach),
2. Set up the machine, i.e., activate manually-controlled motions on
the machine using the keys and handwheels provided on the
machine control panel.
3. Activate manually-controlled motions on the machine using the
keys and handwheels provided on the machine control panel while
a part program is being interrupted.

The following basic display "Jog" is displayed when you press the
"Area switchover" key
followed by the "Jog" key.
Jog JOG
or
The "Jog" main screen contains values relating to position, feedrate,
spindle and tool.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 4-79
 4 4
Machine operating area 01/2008
4.4 Jog mode

Explanation of the Jog

main screen
Motion symbol in actual value window: The axes are still moving, i.e.
they are not within the exact stop window.

Displays the addresses of the existing axes with the machine axis
WCS
identifier (MCS) or with the geometry axis identifier (WCS).
+ X2*
(see also Section "Toggling between Machine/Workpiece Coordinate
Y2*
System (MCS/WCS)")
Z2*

Machine manufacturer Machine data are used to define whether the programmed frames are
to be calculated when displaying the WCS (settable zero system =
SZS display). Please follow the machine manufacturer's instructions!

• If the axis identifier can only be displayed in an abbreviated form,

this is indicated by the character *.
• If you traverse an axis in the positive (+) or negative (-) direction, a
plus or minus sign is shown in the relevant field.
The axis is in position if neither + nor - is displayed in the position
display.

Location The actual position of each configured axis in the machine (MCS) or
0.0 work (WCS) is displayed in these fields.
0.1 The sign is only displayed for negative values.
–0.1
1.1
0.0

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

4-80 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 4 4
01/2008 Machine operating area
4.4 Jog mode

Repos. offset If the axes are traversed in the "Program interrupted" status "in "Jog"
0.0 mode, the path traversed by every axis with respect to the point of
0.1 interruption is displayed in the REPOS offset.
–0.1
1.1
0.0

Spindle Spindle window (if spindle is available)

U/min Displays the set and actual value of the spindle speed, the position of

the spindle, the position of the spindle override switch , and

the spindle power.

Nibbling
The spindle window is replaced by a nibble window if the "Nibbling"
technology option is set.
The active function, if any, appears at the top left in the window
header:
• PON Punching ON
• SON Nibbling ON
• SPOF Punching/nibbling OFF

The following values are displayed:

• The "Path section" and "Stroke rate" are displayed in reverse
video if you have programmed the automatic block division with
"Path section length" or "Number of path sections".
• The "delay time" can only be displayed if you have set "Punching
with delay time".

Feedrate Feedrate window

mm/min Display of the setpoint and actual value of the feedrate as well as the

position of the feedrate override switch (in %). The actual

setpoint to be traversed is dependent on the override switch.
When G00 (rapid traverse movement) is programmed, the rapid
override value is displayed.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 4-81
 4 4
Machine operating area 01/2008
4.4 Jog mode

Tool Tool window

Display of active tool offset (e.g., D1), tool currently in use (T no.),
preselected tool (on milling machines) plus currently active motion
commands (e.g., G01, SPLINE, ...) or
tool radius compensation not active (e.g., G40).

Zoom Increases the size of the actual-value display.

act. val.

4.4.2 Traversing axes

Traverse rate The initial settings for traversing velocity and feed mode are stored in
setting data for JOG mode.
Traverse rates are defined by the machine manufacturer. The default
setting for the feedrate is mm/min.
See operating area "Parameters/Setting data/Jog data".

Sequence of operations

"Jog" mode is selected in the "Machine" operating area.

Traversing axes
Using the "Inc" (increment) function, manually traverse the selected
axis in preset increments in the appropriate direction by pressing an
"Axis key" repeatedly:

• [.] Variable increment can be set via softkey "Inc" (see

VAR Subsection 3.2.5).

• [1], [10], ..., [10000] fixed increment

1 10000
...

Turning machine:
Press the "Axis" keys.
+X ...
X
If necessary, set the rate with the override selector.

If you press "Rapid traverse override" at the same time, you can
Rapid traverse the axis in rapid traverse mode.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

4-82 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 4 4
01/2008 Machine operating area
4.4 Jog mode

Milling machine:
Select the axis to be traversed and
X ...
9th Axis

then press the "+" or "-" key.

+ ...
Feedrate and rapid traverse override switches can be operative.

One or several axes can be selected at the same time (depending on

PLC program).

Additional information
• When the control is switched on, the axes can be traversed right
up to the limits of the machine as the reference points have not
yet been approached and the axes referenced. Emergency limit
switches might be triggered as a result.
• The software limit switches and the working area limitation are
not yet operative!
• The feedrate enable must be set (FST display must not light up in
the program control display).

Machine manufacturer If no advantage is to be gained from moving several axes

simultaneously, the machine manufacturer must implement the
appropriate interlock in the PLC program.

4.4.3 Inc: dimension

Function

The "INC" (Increment) function can be used to enter a settable

increment value for Inc variable traversing.

Sequence of operations

"Jog" mode is selected in the "Machine" operating area.

The "Increment traverse keys" window appears on the screen.

INC

Enter the desired “INC-Var” increment size

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 4-83
 4 4
Machine operating area 01/2008
4.4 Jog mode

Abort
Jump to the previous screen form again without accepting value.

OK
Click on “OK” to save.

Press this key in manual mode together with the "Axis" key to traverse
VAR the selected axis in the appropriate direction in accordance with the
increments set above (see also Section "Traversing axes").
Increment keys with preset increment sizes are temporarily
inoperative.

4.4.4 REPOS

Function
After a program interruption in Automatic mode (e.g., to take a
measurement on the workpiece or to compensate tool wear values or
after tool breakage), you can retract the tool manually from the
contour after selecting "Jog" mode. In such cases, the control stores
the coordinates of the point of interruption and displays the path
distances traversed by the axes in "Jog" mode as a "Repos" offset
(Repos = repositioning) in the actual value window.

"Repos" offsets can be displayed in the machine coordinate system

(MCS) or workpiece coordinate system (WCS).

Sequence of operations

"Jog" mode is selected in the "Machine" operating area.

The axes have been moved away from the point of interruption.

Select machine function "Repos".

Repos REPOS
or
Turning machine:
+X ...
X Press the "Axis" keys.
Milling machine:
X ...
9th Axis Select the axis to be traversed and
press the "+" or "–" key.
...
+

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

4-84 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 4 4
01/2008 Machine operating area
4.4 Jog mode

It is not possible to overtravel the point of interruption.

The feedrate override switch is active.

WARNING
The rapid traverse override key is active.
Non-adjusted Repos offsets are adjusted on switchover to Automatic
mode followed by start with program advance and linear interpolation.

4.4.5 SI (Safety Integrated): User confirmation

Function

If the "User enabling" option is installed on the NCK, you must enable
or disable the function depending on the keyswitch position in the
"Approach reference point" operating mode.

User agreement can only be granted if keylock switch position 3 or

higher applies in respect of the access rights.

The displayed values always refer to the machine (MCS).

Sequence of operations

"Jog Ref" mode is selected in the "Machine" operating area.

The channel to be referenced is already selected.

User Press the "User agreement" softkey.

agreement The "Confirm Machine Positions" window is opened.
The machine axes in the MCS are displayed, together with the current
position and a checkbox for activating/deactivating user agreement.

Place the cursor on the required machine axis.

Activate or deactivate the user confirmation for the selected machine
axis via the "Select" key.

Check whether the axis is referenced. If not, error message "Please

reference axis first" is displayed. User agreement cannot be activated
for the axis until it has been referenced.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 4-85
 4 4
Machine operating area 01/2008
4.4 Jog mode

Additional information

The user agreement function is only provided if user enabling is

required for at least one axis of the channel.

For more information please refer to:

References Function Manual Safety Integrated

4.4.6 Scratching/Determining the work offset

Function
You can determine the work offset by "scratching" the workpiece,
taking an (active) tool and, if necessary, the basic offset into account.
A window is provided for the "Scratching" function.

Scratch
Sequence of operations
1. Press the "Scratch" softkey:
• The active plane is displayed and can be altered (via "Select"
key).
• The active WO is displayed and can be altered (via "Select" key).
• The active tool is displayed. No tool is displayed if none is active
(message).

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

4-86 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 4 4
01/2008 Machine operating area
4.4 Jog mode

Meanings of columns in the "Scratch" window:

• "Offset": Current value of offset to be determined. The coarse
offset is displayed. The fine offset is taken into account and
remains valid.
• "Position setpoint": Input of subsequent position setpoint for
scratched edge.
"Approach direction": Selection fields for positive/negative approach
direction.

Use the cursor to select the first axis to be traversed in the "Scratch"
display.

X 2. Move the axis up to the workpiece, enter the chosen setpoint

position (e.g. "0") and press the "Input" key. The offset is then
calculated.
Repeat the process for other axes.

3. Press "OK" to transfer all values to the selected WO. The offset
OK is always calculated in relation to the current work (WCS).

4. To change the direction of approach, position the cursor on the

axis to be modified in the "Approach direction" column and press
the "Select" key.

Example:
Set "+R" using the
Y "Select" key.
R

Approach
direction

The values defined by scratching are displayed in the basic screen

"Overview of WO" under system frame "Set zero position" if G500 was
selected as work offset. Otherwise, the data are saved in the
"selected settable WO".

Machine manufacturer Please follow the machine manufacturer's instructions!

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 4-87
 4 4
Machine operating area 01/2008
4.4 Jog mode

Scratching in swiveled Prerequisite:

plane The swivel function (CYCLE800) has been set up by the machine
manufacturer.
The "Activate swivel data" softkey is only displayed if a
TOOLCARRIER is active.

The "Swivel Adjust" softkey is used to declare the swiveled plane as

the new "zero" plane for the active swivel data record
(TOOLCARRIER).
In this case, when you select "Swivel", positioning is at this swiveled
plane with rotation through
X=0
Y=0
Z=0
The following messages are output for checking purposes:
"Swivel: Adjustment terminated"
"Swivel: Adjustment not possible"

References Programming Manual Cycles: Swiveling

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

4-88 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 4 4
01/2008 Machine operating area
4.5 MDA mode

4.5 MDA mode

4.5.1 Function and main screen

In "MDA" (Manual Data Automatic) mode, you can write part

programs block by block and execute them. You can transfer the
required motions as single part program blocks to the control using
the operator panel.
The control starts processing the entered blocks when you press the
"Cycle Start" key.

Caution
The same safety interlocks must be applied as used in fully automatic
operation. The same preconditions must be fulfilled as for fully
automatic operation.
The automatic functions (traverse blocks) are active in "MDA" mode.

Teach In The functions associated with "Jog" are active in submode "Teach-in"
and can be accessed via an MCP key. You can therefore create and
store a program in the input and manual modes by alternating
between "MDA" and "Teach-in".
You can use the editor to edit the program blocks in the MDA window.
You can view blocks that have already been executed by paging
upwards.
Blocks that have already been executed can only be edited in the
Reset state.
Further blocks can be added with "Input".
Blocks can only be input and executed with the channel in the
"Channel Reset" or "Channel interrupted" state.
The program created in MDA mode is saved in the "MPF" directory as
a part program (MPF).

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 4-89
 4 4
Machine operating area 01/2008
4.5 MDA mode

MDA (automatic function)

Teach in (Jog functions)

Working- Main memory

memory

Clipboard

MDA- Parts
program programs

The "MDA" main screen contains values relating to position, feedrate,

spindle and tool as well as the contents of the MDA buffer.

Explanation of "MDA" As with the Jog main screen, the actual value window, spindle
basic display window, feedrate window and tool window are output.

Vertical softkeys
Like the Jog basic display, the MDA contains the "G Fct.+Transf.,"
"Auxiliary functions", "Spindles" (if spindle is configured), “Axis
feed”, Zoom actual value”, and “MCS actual value” softkeys.

Delete MDA The contents of the MDA program in the NCK are erased.
program

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

4-90 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 4 4
01/2008 Machine operating area
4.5 MDA mode

4.5.2 Saving a program

Function

A program that has been created in MDA is saved in the

"MPF"directory on the CompactFlash Card and inserted as a
program.

Save MDA The system will ask you to enter a name for the file to be saved to the
program MDA program.
The program is saved/stored as a part program (MPF.dir) under the
specified name in directory "MPF".

4.5.3 Teach In

Function
With the "Teach-in" function, part programs (main programs and
subprograms) for motion sequences or simple workpieces can be
created, edited and executed by approaching and then storing
positions in combination with the "MDA" function.

There are two possible methods of writing programs with

"Teach-in" and "MDI":
• Manual positioning
• Manual input of coordinates and additional information

Both entry of blocks (input, delete, insert) and automatic insertion by

manual approach of positions are possible only at points that have not
yet been executed.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 4-91
 4 4
Machine operating area 01/2008
4.5 MDA mode

1. Manual positioning

Sequence of operations

"MDA" mode is selected in the "Machine" operating area.

The program is not running.
Submode "Teach-in" is selected.
Teach In After selection of the function, the cursor is located in the first blank
line of the "Teach-in program" window.

+X ...
X Turning machine:
Press the "Axis" keys.

X ...
9th Axis
Milling machine:
Select the axis to be traversed.

and then press the "+" or "–" key.

+
The axis name and the path being traversed are displayed
continuously on the screen in the "Teach-in program" window.
The axis identifier and axis positions are transferred to the MDA
program as values referred to the workpiece coordinate system.

Saving the position value:

Cycle Start The position values of the axes can be altered in the clipboard until
this block is saved with the "Cycle Start" key.

When you use the "Save block" function for the first time you will be
asked to enter the name of the teach program.
The teach program is now set for the duration of the MDA/Teach in
procedure.
After "Jog" or "AUTO" mode has been selected, a new Teach program
can be set.

Additional functions:
Place the cursor at the desired position in the "Buffer" window.

Enter the additional functions (e.g. feedrates, auxiliary functions, etc.)

in the program (if permitted).

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

4-92 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 4 4
01/2008 Machine operating area
4.5 MDA mode

Delete/insert/save block:
Position the cursor at the desired point.

Delete The block is deleted automatically.

block

Insert The block stored in the delete memory is automatically inserted in

block front of the line in which the cursor is located.

Save New position values and miscellaneous functions are saved.

block

When "Cycle Start" is pressed, the appropriate travel motions and

Cycle Start functions additionally entered are executed as program blocks. While
the program is being processed, the blocks traversed by the NCK are
displayed in the "Current block" window.

2. Manual input of coordinates

Sequence of operations

"MDA" mode is selected in the "Machine" operating area.

Save position values/additional functions:

Transfer the coordinates of the traversing positions plus
any additional functions (preparatory functions, auxiliary functions,
etc.) to the program by entering them in the "MDA program" window.

Additional information
• Changes to the zero offset cause the axis to execute
compensatory motions after Cycle Start.
• In the case of G64, the end point response will differ when the
part program is executed in "Automatic" mode.
• All the G functions can be used.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 4-93
 4 4
Machine operating area 01/2008
4.6 Automatic mode

4.6 Automatic mode

4.6.1 Function and main screen

You can execute part programs fully automatically in "Automatic"

mode; this is the normal operating mode for part machining.
Preconditions The following conditions must be fulfilled before you can execute part
programs:
• You have already synchronized the control measuring system
with the machine (i.e. "approached" reference points).
• You have already downloaded the associated part program to the
control.
• You have checked or entered the necessary offset values, such
as work offsets or tool offsets.
• The required safety interlocks are already active.

The "Automatic" main screen contains values relating to position,

feedrate, spindle and tool as well as the block currently being
processed or program pointer.

Explanation of main Like the Jog main screen, the Automatic main screen contains actual
screen value, spindle, feedrate and tool windows.

If the NCK detects G0 during part program execution, the current

value of the rapid traverse override is displayed in the "Feedrate"
window.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

4-94 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 4 4
01/2008 Machine operating area
4.6 Automatic mode

Horizontal softkeys
Program The workpiece or program overview is displayed. In this area, it is
overview possible to select programs for execution.

Vertical softkeys
Current The "Current block" window is also displayed.
block The current block is highlighted while the program is running.
The name of the program to which the blocks on the screen belong is
output in the window header.

Program When you press the "Program level" softkey, the window headed
level "Program pointer" appears instead of the "Current block" window.
The program nesting depth (P = number of passes) is displayed.

Program Current In program control, it is possible to toggle between the "Program

level or block level" and "Current block" displays.

Program 7 program blocks of the current program are displayed together with
blocks the current position in the part program.
The 7-block display always shows the programmed part program and
not the actual program run. In particular with subroutine calls, the
block displayed as next block after the UP is only the block which is
executed after the UP call, not the first block of the subprogam
(program execution).

Additional information
The other softkeys are described in the sections below.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 4-95
 4 4
Machine operating area 01/2008
4.6 Automatic mode

4.6.2 Executing programs

Function
After selection of a workpiece or program overview, individual
workpieces or programs can be enabled or disabled for execution.

Sequence of operations

The "Auto" operating mode is selected in the "Machine" operating

area.
The appropriate channel is selected.
The channel is in reset state.
The workpiece/program to be selected is in the memory.

Program When you press softkey "Program overview", the software

overview automatically changes to the "Program" operating area. An overview
of all workpiece directories/programs is displayed.
See Chap. 6: Execute program in NCK

Once you have selected the desired workpiece/program for execution,

use the machine area key to change back to the "Machine" operating
area.

The program starts running when you press the "Cycle Start" key, and
Cycle Start you can track the axis position, spindle, etc in the display.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

4-96 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 4 4
01/2008 Machine operating area
4.6 Automatic mode

4.6.3 Program editing

Function
As soon as a syntax error in the part program is detected by the
control, program execution is interrupted and the syntax error is
displayed in the alarm line.
You can make small changes in the stop or reset state.

Sequence of operations

"AUTO" mode is selected in the "Machine" operating area.

It is not possible to overtravel the point of interruption. The feedrate

override switch is active.
The program status is in the "Stop" or "Reset" state.

Correct The correction editor is displayed with this softkey. If an error occurs,
program the faulty block is highlighted and can be corrected. The cursor is
positioned on the error.

After the override close the editor and continue processing with the
Close Cycle Start “Cycle Start” key.

• Stop state:
Only program lines that have not yet been executed can be
edited.
• Reset status:
All program lines can be edited.
• Program Running state:
Program cannot be edited!

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 4-97
 4 4
Machine operating area 01/2008
4.6 Automatic mode

4.6.4 Setting the block search/search target

Function
The block search function allows you to run the part program forward
until you reach the block you require. Three types of search are
available:

1. With calculation on contour:

During block search with calculation, the same calculations are
performed as in normal program control. The complete target
block is then executed in the same way as with normal program
execution.

2. With calculation at block end point:

During block search with calculation, the same calculations are
performed as in normal program control. The interpolation mode
valid in the target block is then applied to approach its end point
or the next programmed position.

3. Without calculation:
No calculations are made during block search.
The values stored in the control remain the same as they were
before the block search.

You can define the search target by

• by direct positioning or
• by specifying a block number, a label, a string, a program name
or any character string.

References For further information about block search, please refer to:
Function Manual, Fundamentals; Mode group, Channel, Program
operation mode (K1)

Sequence of operations

"AUTO" mode is selected in the "Machine" operating area.

The channel is in reset status
The program in which the block search is to be performed is selected.

Block Calls up the "Search position" function.

search Position the cursor on the target block.
The block search is started when you press one of the following three
softkeys:
Calculate
Block search start with calculation on contour
contour

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

4-98 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 4 4
01/2008 Machine operating area
4.6 Automatic mode

• When you press "Cycle Start", the axes execute a compensatory

motion between the current actual position and the position of the
block located by the block search.
• The new position is determined by the program status (all axis
positions, active auxiliary functions) at the beginning of the
selected block, i.e. after the block search, the control is
positioned at the end position of the last NC block before the
search destination.

Calc. block
Block search start with calculation at block end point
end point

without Block search start without calculation

calculation
• If the target block is found, this block becomes the current block.
HMI Embedded signals "Search target found" and displays the
target block in the current block display.
• Alarm 10208 is output to indicate that operator interventions such
as Overstore or Mode Change after JOG are permissible.
• After "Cycle Start" the program is started and executed from the
target block.

Block search can be aborted with Reset.

Reset

Define search target in program editor:

Search The currently selected program level is displayed.
position

Position the cursor bar on a target block of your choice in the part
program.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 4-99
 4 4
Machine operating area 01/2008
4.6 Automatic mode

Program Program-
If the program interruption occurred in a subprogram level, you can
level + or level -
change program levels here.

Define search target in search pointer:

Search Once the "search pointer" softkey has been pressed, a screen form
pointer with the program pointer is displayed.

This contains input fields for program name, search type (block
number, text, ...) and search target (content). The cursor is
positioned in the input field for the "search type".

5 You must enter your selected search type for the search target in the
0
... "Type" input field.

Information about the available search types is displayed in the user

response line.

The following search types can be entered:

Search type (= jump to ...) Value in search type field
End of program 0
1
Block number
Jump label 2
3
Any character string
Program name 4
5
Line number

Different search types can be specified for different program levels.

Z You can enter your chosen search target (according to search type) in
A
... the "Search target" field.

9 You can enter the corresponding number of program passes in the

0
... "P" field (pass counter).

Preassign search target as last program interruption point:

Interrupt. The search pointer is assigned the data of the last program
point interruption point.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

4-100 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 4 4
01/2008 Machine operating area
4.6 Automatic mode

4.6.5 Accelerated block search for execution from external source

Function
The block search function allows you to run the part program forward
until you reach the block you require.
In the "Search position" and "Search pointer" menus, you can use the
"External w/o calc." softkey to start an accelerated block search on
programs executed from an external device.
You can define the search target by
• Directly positioning the cursor on the target block, or
• by specifying a block number or a line number.

Block search sequence:

In certain circumstances, external program parts are not transferred or
are only partially transferred to the NCK.
Only those programs and program parts which are needed in order to
reach the specified search target and to continue program execution
are transferred to the NCK. This applies to the following:
• "Execution from external source" function
• Execution of EXTCALL instructions.

Notice
Since certain program parts may not have been transferred to the
NCK, it must be assumed that modal functions such as feed and
motion commands are incorrect at the target block (main block).
Consequently, when using the variants "Without calculation" and
"External – without calculation", you will either need to make sure that
any information required for machining is available in the selected
target block (main block) and following blocks, or use the overstore
function to complete the necessary settings.

Sequence of operations

"AUTO" mode is selected in the "Machine" operating area.

The channel is in the reset state.
The program in which the block search is to be performed is selected.

Block Switches to the "Search position" dialog.

search

Define search target in program editor:

Search The currently selected program level is displayed.
position The block search via "Search position" is only possible for programs
which have been loaded onto the NCK and not for programs executed
from the CompactFlash card.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 4-101
 4 4
Machine operating area 01/2008
4.6 Automatic mode

without Start search without calculation for external programs.

calculation

Position the cursor bar on a target block of your choice in the part
program.
Program Program- If an interruption point is available on the NCK, you can switch back
level + or level - and forth between the program levels.

Define search target in search pointer:

Search Once the "search pointer" softkey has been pressed, a screen form
pointer with the program pointer is displayed.
This contains input fields for program name, search type (block
number, text, ...) and search target (content). The cursor is
positioned in the input field for the "search type".
Type 1 (block number) and type 5 (line number) are possible as
search target types.

without Start search without calculation for programs.

calculation

4.6.6 Overstoring

Function
In "AUTO" mode, you can overstore technological parameters
(auxiliary functions, all programmable instructions ...) in the working
memory of the NCK. You can also enter and execute any NC block.

Sequence of operations

"AUTO" mode is selected in the "Machine" operating area.

Stop the program by selecting "Cycle Stop."

Cycle Stop

Overstore
The "Overstore" window is opened.

In this window, you can now enter the NC blocks that are to be
executed.

On "Cycle Start" the entered blocks are executed, the "Current block"
Cycle Start window displayed and the softkeys hidden. The "Overstore" window
and associated softkeys are not displayed again until the "Channel
interrupted, "Stop" or "Reset" state is reached.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

4-102 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 4 4
01/2008 Machine operating area
4.6 Automatic mode

More blocks can be added (to the overstore buffer) when these blocks
have been executed.

Note:
• After "Overstore" a subroutine with the content REPOSA is
executed. The program is displayed for the user.
• Overstoring is not possible in the "Program running" state.

Additional information
• You can close the window and exit the Overstore function by
pressing the "Recall" key. You have now exited the Overstore
function.
• You cannot change operating modes until you have deselected
"Overstore" with the "Recall" key.
• In "AUTO" mode the program selected prior to the overstore
operation is now executed when you press "Cycle Start" again.
• Overstore does not alter the programs stored in the part program
memory.
• The function is also available in single-block mode.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 4-103
 4 4
Machine operating area 01/2008
4.6 Automatic mode

4.6.7 Program control

Function
You can use this function to change a program sequence in "Auto"
and "MDA" modes. The following program control functions can be
activated or deactivated:
SKP Skip block
DRY Dry run feedrate
ROV Rapid traverse override
M01 Programmed stop
M101 Halt at cycle end (optional)
DRF Select DRF offset
PRT Program test
SBL1 Single block with STOP after each machine function block
SBL2 Single block with STOP after each block

Display all blocks in the current block display.

Display only traversing blocks in the current block display.
See Chapter 2, “Program Control Display”

The display is dependent on the machine data of the operator panel

front in which access authorization can be set.

References Function Manual, Fundamentals; different interface signals (A2) or

Function Manual, Fundamentals; Mode group, channel, program
operation mode (K1)

Sequence of operations

"AUTO" or "MDA" mode is selected in the "Machine" operating area.

Program The "Program control" window appears on the screen.

control

Place the cursor at the required position.

Every time you press the "Select" key you activate or deactivate the
selected function.

OK
Confirm selection with "OK".

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

4-104 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 4 4
01/2008 Machine operating area
4.6 Automatic mode

4.6.8 DRF offset

Function
DRF (Differential Resolver Function) is a method of axial traversing
that takes place in the basic coordinate system. Selecting the
handwheel is only permissible via the axial interface; i.e. only machine
axis names can be used.

Switch-on/switch-off The DRF offset can be switched on and off for specific channels by
means of the "Program control" function.
It remains stored until
• Power ON is performed for all axes
• DRFOF (selection of DRF via part program)
• PRESETON (modification of the actual value through Preset)

Alter DRF You can alter the DRF offset by traversing the appropriate machine
axis using the handwheel (the actual value display does not change).

Sequence of operations

"AUTO" mode is selected in the "Machine" operating area.

The standard axis assignment is defined.

Handwheel
Enter the desired handwheel or select via the MCP.

Enter the desired increment or select via the MCP.

INC VAR
or
DRF The "DRF offset" window is displayed.
offset

Traverse the required axes using the handwheel.

Using the same operating sequence, you can also return the DRF
offset to the value "0".

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 4-105
 4 4
Machine operating area 01/2008
4.6 Automatic mode

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

4-106 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 5 5
01/2008 Parameters operating area

Parameters operating area

5.1 Tool data ................................................................................................................. 5-109

5.1.1 Tool offset structure ................................................................................................ 5-109
5.1.2 Tool types and tool parameters .............................................................................. 5-110

5.2 Tool offset ............................................................................................................... 5-123

5.2.1 Tool offset function and main screen ...................................................................... 5-123
5.2.2 Creating a new tool ................................................................................................. 5-125
5.2.3 Displaying a tool...................................................................................................... 5-126
5.2.4 Finding a tool........................................................................................................... 5-126
5.2.5 Deleting a tool ......................................................................................................... 5-127
5.2.6 Creating a new cutting edge ................................................................................... 5-128
5.2.7 Displaying a cutting edge........................................................................................ 5-129
5.2.8 Finding a cutting edge............................................................................................. 5-129
5.2.9 Deleting a cutting edge ........................................................................................... 5-129
5.2.10 Determining tool offsets .......................................................................................... 5-130
5.2.11 Tool offsets with D numbers only (flat D No.) ......................................................... 5-131
5.2.12 Make active tool offset effective immediately ......................................................... 5-132

5.3 Tool management ................................................................................................... 5-133

5.3.1 Tool management main screen .............................................................................. 5-134
5.3.2 Selecting a tool........................................................................................................ 5-136
5.3.3 Displaying and modifying tool data ......................................................................... 5-137
5.3.4 Loading a tool.......................................................................................................... 5-138
5.3.5 Unloading a tool ...................................................................................................... 5-140
5.3.6 Relocating a tool ..................................................................................................... 5-141
5.3.7 Finding and positioning a tool ................................................................................. 5-142

5.4 ShopMill tool management ..................................................................................... 5-143

5.4.1 Range of functions .................................................................................................. 5-145
5.4.2 Selecting a tool list .................................................................................................. 5-145
5.4.3 Creating a new tool ................................................................................................. 5-146
5.4.4 Creating more than one cutting edge per tool ........................................................ 5-147
5.4.5 Changing a tool name............................................................................................. 5-148
5.4.6 Creating a replacement tool.................................................................................... 5-149
5.4.7 Manual tools............................................................................................................ 5-149
5.4.8 Entering tool wear data ........................................................................................... 5-150
5.4.9 Activating tool monitoring........................................................................................ 5-151
5.4.10 Managing the magazine list .................................................................................... 5-154
5.4.11 Deleting a tool ......................................................................................................... 5-155
5.4.12 Changing a tool type ............................................................................................... 5-155
5.4.13 Loading or unloading a tool into or from the magazine........................................... 5-156
5.4.14 Relocating a tool ..................................................................................................... 5-158
5.4.15 Positioning a magazine........................................................................................... 5-160
5.4.16 Sort tools in the tool list........................................................................................... 5-160

5.5 ShopTurn tool management ................................................................................... 5-161

5.5.1 Range of functions .................................................................................................. 5-162
5.5.2 Selecting a tool list .................................................................................................. 5-163

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 5-107
 5 5
Parameters operating area 01/2008

5.5.3 Creating a new tool .................................................................................................5-163

5.5.4 Creating more than one cutting edge per tool.........................................................5-165
5.5.5 Creating replacement tools .....................................................................................5-166
5.5.6 Sorting tools ............................................................................................................5-167
5.5.7 Deleting tools...........................................................................................................5-167
5.5.8 Load or unload tool in the magazine .......................................................................5-168
5.5.9 Relocating a tool......................................................................................................5-169
5.5.10 Positioning a magazine ...........................................................................................5-171
5.5.11 Entering tool wear data ...........................................................................................5-171
5.5.12 Activating tool monitoring ........................................................................................5-172
5.5.13 Managing magazine locations.................................................................................5-174

5.6 R parameters...........................................................................................................5-175
5.6.1 Function...................................................................................................................5-175
5.6.2 Edit/delete/find R parameters..................................................................................5-175

5.7 Setting data .............................................................................................................5-176

5.7.1 Working area limitation............................................................................................5-176
5.7.2 Jog data...................................................................................................................5-177
5.7.3 Spindle data ............................................................................................................5-178
5.7.4 Dry run feedrate for DRY mode ..............................................................................5-179
5.7.5 Starting angle for thread cutting ..............................................................................5-180
5.7.6 Other types of setting data ......................................................................................5-181
5.7.7 Protection zones......................................................................................................5-182

5.8 Work offset ..............................................................................................................5-183

5.8.1 Function...................................................................................................................5-183
5.8.2 Displaying work offsets............................................................................................5-185
5.8.3 Changing settable work offset (G54 ...)...................................................................5-186
5.8.4 Activate work offset and basic frame immediately ..................................................5-188
5.8.5 Global work offset/frame (basic WO) ......................................................................5-188

5.9 Displaying system frames .......................................................................................5-190

5.10 User data/user variables (GUD, PUD, LUD) ...........................................................5-191

5.10.1 General information.................................................................................................5-191

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

5-108 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 5 5
01/2008 Parameters operating area
5.1 Tool data

5.1 Tool data

5.1.1 Tool offset structure

A tool is selected in the program with the T function. Numbers T0 to

T32000 can be assigned to tools. Each tool can have up to 9 cutting
edges: D1-D9. D1 to D9 activates the tool offset of a cutting edge for
the active tool.
The tool length compensation is applied with the first traversing
motion (linear or polynomial interpolation) of the axis.
A tool radius compensation is activated by programming of G41/42 in
the active plane (G17, 18, 19) and in a program block with G0 or G1.

Tool wear Allowances for changes in the active tool shape can be made in the
tool length (tool parameters 12-14) and tool radius (tool parameters
15-20).

Tool offset with Tool management is implemented outside the NCK. T numbers are
D numbers only irrelevant. This function is activated via the MD.
The D number range increases to 1 - 32000. A D number can be
assigned only once for each tool, i.e., each D number represents
precisely one tool offset data record.

Tool cutting edges Each tool can have up to 9 cutting edges:

D1–D9.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 5-109
 5 5
Parameters operating area 01/2008
5.1 Tool data

5.1.2 Tool types and tool parameters

Entries T No. Number of the tool

D No. Number of the cutting edge
Every data field (offset memory) that can be called with a D number
contains not only the geometric information for the tool but also further
entries, i.e., the tool type (drill, milling cutter, turning tools with cutting
edge position, etc.).

Tool types Tool type classification:

• Group with type 1xy (milling cutter):
100 Milling cutter to CLDATA
110 Ball-end cylindrical die-sinking cutter
120 End milling cutter without corner rounding
121 End mill with corner rounding
130 Angle head cutter without corner rounding
131 Angle head mill with corner rounding
140 Facing tool
145 Thread cutter
150 Side mill
155 Bevel cutter without rounding
156 Bevel cutter with rounding
157 Tapered die-sinking cutter

Required offset values

for a milling cutter Entries in
tool parameters
DP1 1xy
Radius

DP3 Length 1 F

DP6 Radius

Length 1

Wear values Effect

according to G17: Length 1 in Z
requirement Radius in X/Y

Other values must G18: Length 1 in Y

be set to zero Radius in Z/X

Length1 in X F: Toolholder
G19: reference point
Radius in Y/Z

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

5-110 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 5 5
01/2008 Parameters operating area
5.1 Tool data

Milling cutter with Entries in

tool parameters F' F
adapter DP1 1xy

DP3 Length 1 -Geometry

Length 1 Length 1 adapter

DP6 Radius -Geometry
Length 1 total
DP21 Length -Adapter
F: Adapter reference point (when tool is
inserted = toolholder reference point)
Wear values Effect
according to Length 1 in Z
requirements G17: Radius in X/Y
Length 1 in Y F´: Toolholder
Other values must G18: Radius in Z/X reference point
be set to zero
Length 1 in X
G19: Radius in Y/Z

• Group type 2xy (drills):

200 Twist drill
205 Drill
210 Boring bar
220 Center drill
230 Countersink
231 Counterbore
240 Tap regular thread
241 Tap fine thread
242 Tap Whitworth thread
250 Reamer

Required offset values Entries in

tool parameters
for a drill DP1 2xy F

DP3 Length 1

Length 1

Wear values
according to
requirements Effect
G17: Length 1 in Z F: Toolholder
Other values must reference point
G18: Length 1 in Y
be set to zero
G19: Length 1 in X

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 5-111
 5 5
Parameters operating area 01/2008
5.1 Tool data

• Group type 4xy (grinding tools):

400 Surface grinding wheel
401 Surface grinding wheel with monitoring
403 Surface grinding wheel with monitoring
without tool base dimension for grinding wheel
peripheral speed GWPS
410 Facing wheel
411 Facing wheel with monitoring
413 Facing wheel with monitoring without tool base
dimension for
grinding wheel peripheral speed (GWPS)
490 Dresser

Offset values required

Entries in e.g. F
by a surface grinding tool parameters G18: Z/X plane
STC_DP1 403
wheel STC_DP3 Length 1
X

Length 1 (X)
STC_DP4 Length 2
STC_DP6 Z
Radius

Radius

F: Toolholder reference point

Effect Length 2 (Y)
Length 1 in Y
G17: Length 2 in X
Wear values Radius in X/Y
according to Length 1 in X
requirements G18: Length 2 in Z
Radius in Z/X
Other values must Length 1 in Z
be set to zero G19: Length 2 in Y
Radius in Y/Z

Required offset values Entries in STC_TPG1 Spindle number

tool parameters STC_TPG2 Chaining rule
for inclined grinding STC_DP1 403 STC_TPG3 Minimum wheel radius
STC_DP3 Length 1
STC_TPG4 Minimum wheel width
wheel with implicit STC_DP4 STC_TPG5 Current wheel width
Length 2
monitoring selection STC_DP6 Radius STC_TPG6 Maximum speed
STC_TPG7 Max. surface speed
Wear values according STC_TPG8 Angle of the inclined wheel
to requirement STC_TPG9 Parameter no. for radius calculation
F: Toolholder reference point
Other values must
be set to zero
∝
Effect
Length 1 in Y
G17:
Length 2 in X
F'
Radius in X/Y
Length 1 (X)

Length 1 in X
G18:
Length 2 in Z
Radius in Z/X Radius

G19: Length 1 in Z
Length 2 in Y
Radius in Y/Z

Length 2 (Z)

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

5-112 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 5 5
01/2008 Parameters operating area
5.1 Tool data

Required offset values Entries in STC_TPG1 Spindle number

tool parameters STC_TPG2 Chaining rule
for inclined grinding STC_DP1 403 STC_TPG3 Minimum wheel radius
STC_DP3 Length 1STC_TPG4 Minimum wheel width
wheel with implicit STC_DP4 STC_TPG5 Current wheel width
Length 2
monitoring selection STC_DP6 Radius STC_TPG6 Maximum speed
STC_TPG7 Max. surface speed
STC_TPG8 Angle of the inclined wheel
Wear values according STC_TPG9 Parameter no. for radius calculation
to requirement F: Toolholder reference point
Other values must
be set to zero ∝
Effect

G17: Length 1 in Y
Length 2 in X
F'
Radius in X/Y

Length1
Length 1 in X

Geometry
G18:

Length 1
Base
Length 2 in Z
Radius in Z/X Radius

G19: Length 1 in Z F
Length 2 in Y
Radius in Y/Z Base Length 2

Geometry
Length 2

Required offset values of Entries in STC_TPG1 Spindle number

tool parameters STC_TPG2 Chaining rule
a surface grinding wheel STC_DP1 403 STC_TPG3 Minimum wheel radius
STC_DP3 Length 1 STC_TPG4 Minimum wheel width
without base dimension STC_DP4 Length 2 STC_TPG5 Current wheel width
for GWPS STC_DP6 Radius STC_TPG6 Maximum speed
STC_DP21 L1 base STC_TPG7 Max. surface speed
STC_DP22 L2 base STC_TPG8 Angle of the inclined wheel
STC_TPG9 Parameter no. for radius calculation
Wear values according
to requirement F: Toolholder reference point
F
Other values must
be set to zero
Effect
Length 1
Length 1 in Y
Base

G17:
Length 2 in X
Radius in X/Y
Length 1 in X F'
G18:
Length 2 in Z
Radius in Z/X
Geometry
Length 1

G19: Length 1 in Z Base

Length2 in Y Radius
Length 2
Radius in Y/Z

Geometry
Length 2

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 5-113
 5 5
Parameters operating area 01/2008
5.1 Tool data

Required offset values of a Entries in STC_TPG1 Spindle number

tool parameters STC_TPG2 Chaining rule
facing wheel with STC_DP1 403 STC_TPG3 Minimum wheel radius
STC_DP3 Length 1
STC_TPG4 Minimum wheel width
monitoring parameters STC_DP4 Current wheel width
STC_TPG5
Length 2
STC_DP6 Radius STC_TPG6 Maximum speed
STC_TPG7 Max. surface speed
Wear values according STC_TPG8 Angle of the inclined wheel
to requirement STC_TPG9 Parameter no. for radius calculation
F: Toolholder reference point
Other values must e.g.
be set to zero
G18: Z/X plane
Effect X

G17: Length 1 in Y
Length 2 in X Z F
Radius in X/Y

Length 1 (X)
G18: Length 1 in X
Length 2 in Z Radius
Radius in Z/X

G19: Length 1 in Z
Length 2 in Y
Length 2 (Z)
Radius in Y/Z

Assignment of Parameter Description Data type

tool-specific Tool-specific parameters

Parameter $TC_TPG1 Spindle number Integer

$TC_TPG2 Chaining rule Integer
$TC_TPG3 Minimum wheel radius Real
$TC_TPG4 Minimum wheel width Real
$TC_TPG5 Current wheel width Real
$TC_TPG6 Maximum speed Real
$TC_TPG7 Maximum Real
peripheral speed
$TC_TPG8 Angle of the inclined wheel Real
$TC_TPG9 Parameter number for Integer
radius calculation
Additional parameters
$TC_TPC1 Angle of the inclined wheel Real
to
$TC_TPC10 Real

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

5-114 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 5 5
01/2008 Parameters operating area
5.1 Tool data

• Group type 5xy (turning tools):

500 Roughing tool
510 Finishing tool
520 Plunge cutter
530 Parting tool
540 Threading tool

Required offset values

Turning tool
for a turning tool with e.g. G18: Z/X plane
F: Toolholder reference point
tool radius X
compensation F
R S

P
Length 1 (X)

R: Tool nose radius (tool radius)

S: Tool nose center position
Length 2 (Z)

Tool tip P
(Cutting edge 1 = D n)
Z

Required offset values Tool parameter DP2 defines the tool nose position.
Any value between 1 and 9 can be entered.
for a turning tool with
X Tool nose position DP2
tool radius 1 2 3 4 5

compensation P
Z

X
6 7 8 9
P=S

Note:
Length 1, length 2 refer to point P for edge
positions 1–8;
but in case of 9 to S (S = P)

Entries in Effect
Wear values
tool parameters
according to G17: Length 1 in Y
DP1 5xy requirements Length 2 in X
DP2 1...9
G18: Length 1 in X
DP3 Length 1 Other values must
Length 2 in Z
DP4 Length 2 be set to zero
G19: Length 1 in Z
DP6 Radius Length 2 in Y

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 5-115
 5 5
Parameters operating area 01/2008
5.1 Tool data

• Group type 7xy special tools

700 Slotting saw
710 3D probe
711 Edge probe

Example of required offset Slot width b

Entries in
values for a slotting saw tool parameters Tool base
Length 2
DP3 Length 1 - Base

DP4 DP3 Length 2 - Base Projection

k
DP6 Diameter - Geometry

Diameter d
DP7 Zero width - Geometry

Length 1
DP8 Projection - Geometry

Tool base
Wear values according
Effect
to requirement
G17: Semi-diameter (L1) in Z Plane selection
Projection in (L2) Y 1st–2nd axis (X–Y)
Saw blade in (R) X/Y
Other values must be
set to zero G18: Semi-diameter (L1) in Y Plane selection
Projection in (L2) X 1st–3rd axis (X–Z)
Saw blade in (R) Z/X
L1 = DP3 + DP6/2 G19: Semi-diameter (L1) in Z Plane selection
L2 = DP4 + DP7/2 - DP8 Projection in (L2) Z 2nd–3rd axis (Y–Z)
R = DP7/2 Saw blade in (R) Y/Z

The offset data (TOA data) you can enter for tool type 700 "slotting
saw" are as follows:

Geometry Wear Basis

Length compensation
Length 1 $TC_DP3 $TC_DP12 $TC_DP21 mm
Length 2 $TC_DP4 $TC_DP13 $TC_DP22 mm
Length 3 $TC_DP5 $TC_DP14 $TC_DP23 mm
Radius compensation
Diameter $TC_DP6 $TC_DP15 mm
Slot width b $TC_DP7 $TC_DP16 mm
Projection k $TC_DP8 $TC_DP17 mm

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

5-116 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 5 5
01/2008 Parameters operating area
5.1 Tool data

Calculation of tool Types 1xy (milling cutters), 2xy (drills), and 5xy (turning tools) are
parameters calculated according to the same scheme.

Several entries exist for the geometric variables (e.g., length 1 or

radius). These are added together to produce a value (e.g. total length
1, total radius) which is then used for the calculations.

Tool parameter Description Comment

number (P)
1 Tool type For overview see list
2 Length of cutting edge only for turning tools
Geometry Length compensation
3 Length 1 Calculation according to type and
plane
4 Length 2
5 Length 3
Geometry Radius
6 Radius Does not apply to drills
7 Reserved
8 Reserved
9 Reserved
10 Reserved
11 Reserved

Wear Length and radius compensation

Radius compensation
12 Length 1
13 Length 2
14 Length 3
15 Radius
16 Reserved
17 Reserved
18 Reserved
19 Reserved
20 Reserved
Tool base dimension/ Length compensations
adapter
21 Length 1
22 Length 2
23 Length 3
Technology
24 Clearance angle For turning tools
25 Clearance angle

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 5-117
 5 5
Parameters operating area 01/2008
5.1 Tool data

Offsets that are not required must be assigned the value 0 (= default
when the offset memory is set up).
The individual values of the offset memory (P1 to P25) can be read
and written by the program via system variables.

The tool offsets can be entered not only via the operator panel front
but also via the data input interface.

Calculation of tool base Entries in Tool base

tool parameters F´: Tool base
dimensions for two- reference point
Length 1
DP1 5xy
F: Toolholder F
dimensional millhead reference point
DP3 Length 1 - Geometry

Tool base
Length2
Radius
DP6 Radius - Geometry
F'
DP21 Length 1 - Base
DP22 Length 2 - Base
DP23 Length 3 - Base
Length 1
- Geometry

Effect
G17: Length 1 in Z Z
Length 2 in Y
Length 3 in X Y
Radius in Y/Z X
Wear values according Y
G18: Length1 in Y
to requirements
Length 2 in X
Length 3 in Z X
Other values must be Radius in X/Y Z
set to zero Length 1 in X X
G19:
Length 2 in Z
Length 3 in Y Z
Radius in Z/X Y

Calculation of tool base Entries in Tool base

tool parameters Length 2 F
dimensions for three-
DP1 5xy
Length 1
Tool base

dimensional millhead:
DP3 Length 1- Geometry Tool base
F' Length 3
DP6 Radius - Geometry

DP21 Length 1 - Base F´: Tool base reference point

DP22 Length 2 - Base F: Toolholder reference point
DP23 Length 3 - Base

Radius

Effect
G17: Length 1 in Z Z
Length 2 in Y
Length 3 in X Y
Radius in Y/Z X
Wear values according G18: Length 1 in Y Y
to requirements Length 2 in X
Length 3 in Z
X
Other values must Radius in X/Y Z
be set to zero G19: Length 1 in X X
Length2 in Z
Length 3 in Y Z
Radius in Z/X Y

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

5-118 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 5 5
01/2008 Parameters operating area
5.1 Tool data

Required length Entries in

tool parameters
compensation values for DP1 5xy Turning tool
e.g. G18: Z/X plane F
turning tools: DP3 Length 1
X

Length1 (X)
DP4 Length 2

Tool tip P
(Cutting edge 1 = D n )

Length 2 (Z)
Effect
Wear values according
to requirements G17: Length 1 in Y
Length 2 in X

Other values must

G18: Length 1 in X
be set to zero Length 2 in Z

F: Toolholder
G19: Length 1 in Z reference point
Length 2 in Y

Turning tool with several Entries in Grooving tool

tool parameters e.g. G18: Z/X plane
cutting edges - length DP1 5xy F

Dn: Length 1 (X)

Dn: Length 1 (X)
compensation: DP3 Length 1
X

DP4 Length 2

DP1 5xy Z

DP3 Length 1 Tool tip P Tool tip P

DP4 Length 2 (Cutting edge 1 = D n )
(Cutting edge 2 = D n)

Effect Dn: Length 2 (Z)

Wear values according G17: Length 1 in Y
to requirement Length 2 in X

Other values must be G18: Length 1 in X

set to zero Length 2 in Z

F: Toolholder
G19: Length 1 in Z reference point
Length 2 in Y

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 5-119
 5 5
Parameters operating area 01/2008
5.1 Tool data

Calculation of tool base Entries in

tool parameters
dimensions for turning DP1 5xy Turning tool
e.g. G18 Z/X plane
machine: DP3 Length 1-Geometry
DP4 Length 2-Geometry Tool base
X Length 2 F

Tool base
Length 1
DP21 Length 1 - Base
F'
DP22 Length 2 - Base

-Geometry
Z

Length 1
Length 2
Effect -Geometry
G17: Length 1 in Y
Length 2 in X
Wear values
according to G18: Length 1 in X
requirements Length 2 in Z
F´: Tool base
reference point
Other values must G19 : Length 1 in Z F: Toolholder
be set to zero Length 2 in Y reference point

Tool type 4xy (grinding tools) is calculated separately.

For the geometric values (e.g. length or radius), there are several
entry components.

Parameter Grinding Grinding wheel Dresser Dresser

wheel-comp. comp. right left right
left
Tool-specific parameters
$TC_DP1 Tool type 0 Tool type Tool type
*(2 =1)
$TC_DP2 Length of Length of Length of Length of
cutting edge cutting edge cutting edge cutting edge
Geometry tool length compensation
$TC_DP3 Length 1 2 Length 1 Length 1
*(2 =4)
$TC_DP4 Length 2 3 Length 2 Length 2
*(2 =8)
$TC_DP5 Length 3 4 Length 3 Length 3
*(2 =16)
$TC_DP6 Radius Radius Radius Radius
$TC_DP7 to Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
$TC_DP11
Wear tool length compensation
$TC_DP12 Length 1 11 Length 1 Length 1
*(2 =2048)
$TC_DP13 Length 2 12 Length 2 Length 2
*(2 =4096)
$TC_DP14 Length 3 13 Length 3 Length 3
*(2 =8192)
$TC_DP15 Radius Radius Radius Radius
$TC_DP16 to Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
$TC_DP20
Base dimension/adapter dimension tool length compensation
$TC_DP21 Basic length 1 Basic length 1 Basic length 1
20
*(2 =1048576)

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

5-120 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 5 5
01/2008 Parameters operating area
5.1 Tool data

$TC_DP22 Basic length 2 Basic length 2 Basic length 2

21
*(2 =2097152)
$TC_DP23 Basic length 3 Basic length 3 Basic length 3
22
*(2 =4194304)

Technology
$TC_DP24 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
$TC_DP25 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
Additional parameters
$TC_DPC1
to
$TC_DPC10

* Value of the chaining parameter if the compensation parameters is to be chained.

Parameter no. for radius With this parameter it is possible to define which offset value is used
calculation for grinding wheel peripheral speed, tool monitoring and centerless
$TC_TPG9 grinding. The value always refers to cutting edge D1.

$TC_TPG9 = 3 Length 1 (geometry + wear + base, depending on tool type)

$TC_TPG9 = 4 Length 2 (geometry + wear + base, depending on tool type)
$TC_TPG9 = 5 Length 3 (geometry + wear + base, depending on tool type)
$TC_TPG9 = 6 Radius

*: The tool parameter of cutting edge 2 is chained to the parameter of

cutting edge 1 (see tool-specific grinding data $TC_TPG2, chain rule).
Here, typical chains are shown and the associated place value is
specified in brackets.

Spindle number This parameter contains the number of the spindle to which the
$TC_TPG1 monitoring data and GWPS refer.

Chain rule $TC_TPG2 This parameter defines which tool parameters of the right wheel edge
(D2) and left wheel edge (D1) must be chained (see TOA data). If the
value of one of the chained parameters is changed, it is then
automatically included in the chained parameter.

It must be noted that the minimum grinding wheel radius must be

specified in the Cartesian coordinate system for an inclined grinding
wheel. The length compensations always specify the distances
between the toolholder reference point and the tool tip in Cartesian
coordinates.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 5-121
 5 5
Parameters operating area 01/2008
5.1 Tool data

The monitoring data apply to both the left-hand and the right-hand
cutting edge of the grinding wheel.
The tool lengths are not automatically compensated when the angle is
altered.
On inclined axis machines the same angle must be specified for the
inclined axis and the inclined wheel.

Offsets that are not required must be assigned the value 0 (= default
when the offset memory is set up).
The tool offsets can be entered not only via the operator panel front
but also via the data input interface.

For programming of compensation data see

References Function Manual Basic Functions

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

5-122 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 5 5
01/2008 Parameters operating area
5.2 Tool offset

5.2 Tool offset

5.2.1 Tool offset function and main screen

Tool offset data consist of data which describe the geometry, wear,
identification, tool type and the assignment to parameter numbers.
The unit used for the dimensions of the tool is displayed.
The input field is highlighted.
If no tool management, e.g. Standard, ShopMill, ShopTurn is
available, the following window appears after selecting the
“Parameters” operating area:

Every offset number contains up to 25 parameters, depending on the

tool type.
The number of parameters shown in the window is that for the tool
type.

The maximum number of offset parameters (T and D numbers) can

be set by means of machine data.

Machine manufacturer Please note information supplied by machine tool manufacturer!

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 5-123
 5 5
Parameters operating area 01/2008
5.2 Tool offset

Horizontal softkeys
You can select different data types with the horizontal softkeys:
Tool Selection of "Tool offset" menu
offset

R Selection of "R parameters" menu

Parameters

Setting Selection of "Setting data" menu

data

Work Selection of "Work offset" menu

offset

User Selection of "User data" menu

data

Determine Support in determining tool offsets. This softkey is not required if the
compensa. tool management function is available.

Vertical softkeys
The vertical softkeys support data input:
Selection of the next tool
T No. +

Selection of the previous tool

T No. -

Selection of next highest offset number (cutting edge)

D No. +

Selection of next lowest offset number (cutting edge)

D No. -

Delete
Deletion of a tool or cutting edge

Find any tool or the active tool

Go to

List of all available tools

Overview

New cutting edge or a new tool

New

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

5-124 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 5 5
01/2008 Parameters operating area
5.2 Tool offset

5.2.2 Creating a new tool

Function
If you create a new tool, the relevant tool types are automatically pre-
selected as input support when you select the tool group.

Sequence of operations

The "Tool offset" window is displayed automatically.

New Press the “New” softkey and then the "New tool" softkey.
New
tool

The "Create new tool" window is displayed and the classification of

tool types appears beneath it.
1xx Milling tools
2xx Drilling tools
4xx Grinding tools
5xx Turning tools
7xx Special tools

As soon as you enter the first characters in the string for the tool type,
for example
• 5xx Turning tools
all available tool types in the 5xx group are automatically displayed for
you to select, i.e.,
• 500 Roughing tool
• 510 Finishing tool
• 520 Plunge cutter
• 530 Parting tool
• 540 Threading tool

Enter the digits for your selections via the alphanumeric keypad or
select one from the displayed list.

Abort
No new tool is created. Input is discarded.

OK
The new tool is created.
The window is closed and the tool list is overlaid.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 5-125
 5 5
Parameters operating area 01/2008
5.2 Tool offset

5.2.3 Displaying a tool

Function
You can select tools that you have created and access their tool offset
data.

Sequence of operations

The "Tool offset" window is displayed automatically.

If the "Parameters” area has already been selected, the window and
the last tool selected when the area was exited are displayed.
The tool offset data of the current tool are displayed immediately. If no
tool has yet been selected, the data of the first tool are shown
together with its first D number.
If no tools are available in the area, a message is output.

Select the created tools.

T No. + T No. -

Additional information
Input of the geometry and wear data of the tool can be disabled using
the keylock switch.

5.2.4 Finding a tool

Function
There are two methods by which you can find tools and view their tool
offset data.

Sequence of operations

1. Find tool by selecting softkey "Overview":

The "Tool offset" window is displayed automatically.

Press the "Overview” softkey. The list of the available tools is

Overview
displayed.
OK
Position the cursor on the tool you wish to find and confirm your
request by pressing the "OK" softkey.
The new tool is selected and displayed in the "Tool offset" window.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

5-126 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 5 5
01/2008 Parameters operating area
5.2 Tool offset

2. Find tool by selecting softkey "Go to":

Softkey "Go to" opens a window in which you can enter the T or D
Go to
number you wish to find or in which you can select the pre-selected or
active tool using the vertical softkeys.
Preselect. Active
T/D No. or T/D No.

OK
The tool you are searching for is positioned with "OK". Its tool offsets
are then displayed.

5.2.5 Deleting a tool

Function
The tool is deleted together with all its cutting edges and the tool list
updated accordingly.

Sequence of operations

The "Tool offset data" window is displayed automatically.

Scroll until you reach the tool to be deleted.

T No. + T No. -

Delete
The vertical softkey bar changes when the "Delete" softkey is
selected.

Delete Press the "Delete tool" softkey.

tool
The tool with all edges is deleted and the tool offsets of the tool before
the deleted tool are displayed.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 5-127
 5 5
Parameters operating area 01/2008
5.2 Tool offset

5.2.6 Creating a new cutting edge

Function
To help you to select a new cutting edge, the associated tool types
are displayed automatically when you select a tool group.
Sequence of operations

The "Tool offset" window is displayed automatically.

New First press the “New” softkey and then the “New edge” softkey.
New
edge The "New cutting edge" window is displayed.
As soon as you enter the first characters in the string for the tool
group, for example
• 5xx Turning tools
all available tool types in the 5xx group are automatically displayed for
you to select, i.e.,
• 500 Roughing tool
• 510 Finishing tool
• 520 Plunge cutter
• 530 Parting tool
• 540 Threading tool

See also section: Tool types and tool parameters

Abort
Press "Abort" to discard entered values.

OK
Press "OK" to save the entered values.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

5-128 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 5 5
01/2008 Parameters operating area
5.2 Tool offset

5.2.7 Displaying a cutting edge

Function
You can select and modify the edges of tools that you have set up.

Select a tool of your choice and a cutting edge.

T No. + T No. -

5.2.8 Finding a cutting edge

Function
You can use one of two search methods:
1. Find tools with edges by selecting the "Overview" softkey:
Press the "Overview” softkey. The list of the available tools is
Overview
displayed.
OK
Position the cursor on the tool you wish to find and confirm your
request by pressing the "OK" softkey.

2. Find tools with edges by selecting the "Go to" softkey:

Softkey "Go to" opens a window in which you can enter the T or D
Go to
number you wish to find or in which you can select the pre-selected or
active tool using the vertical softkeys.
Preselect. Active
T/D No. or T/D No.

OK
The tool you are searching for is positioned with "OK". Its tool offsets
are then displayed.

5.2.9 Deleting a cutting edge

Function
You can delete one or several edges of a tool. The tool list is updated
automatically.

Select the edge of a tool.

D No. + D No. -

First press the “Delete” softkey and then the “Delete edge” softkey.
Delete Delete
edge
The displayed edge is deleted and the tool list updated.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 5-129
 5 5
Parameters operating area 01/2008
5.2 Tool offset

5.2.10 Determining tool offsets

Function
The "Determine tool offsets" function allows you to change the
absolute coordinates of different axes and then to calculate them.

TO

W
M

TO X

TO Tool offset, absolute coordinate

R Tool mounting point
M Machine zero
W Workpiece zero

Sequence of operations

The "Tool offset" window is displayed automatically.

Position the cursor on the tool parameter you wish to change.
Determine The "Absolute coordinate" window opens.
compensa.

Select the appropriate axis with the "Select key". Alter the reference
value, if necessary, using the numeric keypad.
OK
When you press the "OK" softkey, the current position and
corresponding reference value for the selected tool parameter are
calculated.
The following applies: Position - reference value = input value
The window is closed.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

5-130 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 5 5
01/2008 Parameters operating area
5.2 Tool offset

Calculate Position - reference value is entered in the input field. The window
remains open.
If "Jog" mode is selected, it is also possible to change the position by
traversing the axes.
The control automatically calculates the value from the reference
value and the new position.

5.2.11 Tool offsets with D numbers only (flat D No.)

Function
It is possible to specify that tools with a flat D number can only be
selected via their flat D number. One D number can be assigned only
once per tool, i.e. each D number represents exactly one offset data
record.

Machine manufacturer Please note information supplied by machine tool manufacturer!

References Function Manual Basic Functions; Tool Offset (W1)

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 5-131
 5 5
Parameters operating area 01/2008
5.2 Tool offset

5.2.12 Make active tool offset effective immediately

Function
The machine data can be set to specify that the active tool offset can
be activated immediately if the part program switches to the "Reset"
or "Stop" state.

Additional information
When the function is used in the Reset state, the machine data must
be set such that the offset is not reset when the program switches to
Reset.
Machine manufacturer Please note information supplied by machine tool manufacturer!

References Function Manual, Basic Functions; Axes, Coordinate Systems,

Frames (K2)

Caution
The offset is applied in the next programmed axis motion in the part
program after "Cycle Start" in Reset.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

5-132 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 5 5
01/2008 Parameters operating area
5.3 Tool management

5.3 Tool management

The tool management system is organized by means of various

configurable lists which show different views of the tools used.

Magazine list In the "Magazine list", the tools of a magazine are displayed in order
of ascending magazine location numbers.

You can search for, display and, in the majority of cases, edit the
data.

This list is mainly used to load and unload tools during setup, and to
move tools between magazines.

Tool list In the "Tool list", the tools are displayed in the order of ascending T
numbers.

You use this list if you are working with small tool magazines and
know the exact magazine location of each tool.

ShopMill tool management You can use the ShopMill tool management as an alternative to the
standard tool management. It uses workshop-compatible tool
management for milling machines. You can select it via an MD.

ShopTurn tool management You can use the ShopTurn tool management as an alternative to the
standard tool management. It uses workshop-compatible tool
management for turning machines. You can select it via an MD.

Machine manufacturer For details of the functionality of your tool management system,
please refer to the machine manufacturer's instruction manual.

References Commissioning Manual, Commissioning Base software and HMI-

Embedded; Commissioning HMI-Embedded (IM2): Tool management
CNC Commissioning Manual: ShopMill; tool management
CNC Commissioning Manual: ShopTurn; tool management

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 5-133
 5 5
Parameters operating area 01/2008
5.3 Tool management

5.3.1 Tool management main screen

You can manage your tool magazines in the "Magazine list" basic
display.

The tool management offers the most commonly used tools as tool
types. You can assign geometric and technological data to the tool
types in order to set up your master tool data. There can still be
several versions of each tool. You can assign the actual data of the
tool used (particular tool data) to these versions.

The tool management basic display contains the current "magazine

list" with the following information:

Loc. No. Location number

Tool designation Name of tool

Other displays configured by the machine manufacturer, e.g.

Duplo No. Number of spare tool (replacement tool)

Tool status No display = Replacement tool

A = Active tool
F = Tool enabled
G = Tool disabled
M = Measured tool
V = Warning limit reached
W = Tool is being changed
P = Fixed-location-coded tool
E = Tool was in use

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

5-134 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 5 5
01/2008 Parameters operating area
5.3 Tool management

WZ type Tool type

Depending on the tool type, only certain tool offsets are enabled for
selection when the tool is loaded. All other tool types are preset with
the value “0”.

T number Internal T numbers, which may be needed for reloading tool data.

Geo - L1 ... Tool offsets such as length, radius, wear, monitoring data, etc.
Radius ...

Horizontal softkeys
Magazine The "Magazine list" basic display shows all the tools that are already
list assigned to a magazine location ("loaded").

Tool All tools which are stored as a set of data on the NCK are displayed
list (irrespective of whether or not they have been assigned to a
magazine location).

A magazine location is assigned to the tool.

Load

The tool is deleted from the current magazine location.

Unload

The tool is moved from the current magazine location to another

Relocate
location.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 5-135
 5 5
Parameters operating area 01/2008
5.3 Tool management

Vertical softkeys
Selection of user-specific windows (if configured), e.g.
(Names assigned by
user)
Maglist 1 • General data

Maglist 2 • Geometry data

Maglist 3 • Wear data

Tool Display and edit the tool offset data for a tool.
details

Buffer Buffer Display and hide the buffer window in the magazine list. The display
on or off shows spindles, grippers, etc., i.e., locations which can accommodate
tools but which are not magazine locations.

Find & You can use this softkey to find a tool or tool location in the active tool
position magazine and position the tool. The tool is moved to the loading point.

Next Advance to the next magazine.

magazine

5.3.2 Selecting a tool

Function

If you want to load or unload a tool to/from a magazine, alter or re-edit

the current tool data or create a new tool edge, you must first select
the appropriate tool in the "Magazine list" or "Tool list".

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

5-136 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 5 5
01/2008 Parameters operating area
5.3 Tool management

Sequence of operations

Tool Select softkey "Tool management".

mana- The horizontal and vertical softkey bars change.

Select the menu via the softkey

Magazine Tool "Magazine list" or “Tool list”

list or list

Next Select the appropriate magazine.

magazine

Position the cursor bar on the appropriate tool.

The tool is now selected for editing.

5.3.3 Displaying and modifying tool data

Function
You can view and edit the tool data of the tool selected in the
"Magazine list" or "Tool list."

You can edit the following tool edge data:

• Corrective values
• Monitoring data

Sequence of operations

Magazine Tool "Magazine list" or “Tool list”

list or list

Position the cursor bar on the appropriate tool.

The appropriate tool is selected.

Tool Select the "Tool details" softkey.

details The "Tool data" menu is displayed.
The vertical softkey bar changes again.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 5-137
 5 5
Parameters operating area 01/2008
5.3 Tool management

Display/edit tool data:

You can display and edit tool data in menus:
• "Magazine list" (if the tool data, edge data and tool user data are
configured in the magazine list)
displayed and modified.

Switches forward by one edge.

D No. +

Switches back by one edge.

D No. -

New Creates new edge.

edge Edit compensation data of new edge.

Abort
Abort input.

OK
Confirm and accept input.

A new cutting edge can be attached to a tool at any time (even if the
corresponding tool is already in the magazine). Here you enter the
cutting edge data.

5.3.4 Loading a tool

Function

A tool is loaded to a magazine at the magazine location on which the

cursor bar is positioned in the "Magazine list" or "Tool list" menu.
You can load a tool to a magazine in one of the following ways:
• Loading from the "Magazine list"
You can load all tools in the magazine. The associated tool data
can be loaded from the master data catalog or code carrier (if
available) or entered manually as required.

• Load from "Tool list"

You can load magazines whose data are already stored in the TO
memory (if available).

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

5-138 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 5 5
01/2008 Parameters operating area
5.3 Tool management

Sequence of operations

The "Magazine list" menu is displayed.

The horizontal and vertical softkey bars change.

Load from "Magazine list":

Magazine The "Magazine list" menu is selected.
list The appropriate magazine is selected.

Press the "Load" softkey.

Load
The vertical softkey bar changes.

There are three ways to search the empty location according to

different tool sizes in conjunction with location types:
1. Finding an empty location
2. Current location
3. Load location

1. Enter the "Tool size" and "Location type" in the query window.
Find empty If more than one loading point is configured, select the desired loading
location point from a query window.
The system searches for the corresponding empty location.
The cursor bar is automatically positioned on the magazine location
found in the "Magazine list."

2. You have found an empty location in front of the current loading point.
Current When you select "current location," the tool is loaded to the empty
location location in front of the loading point.
The cursor bar is automatically positioned in the "Magazine list" on the
magazine location found in front of the loading point.

3. Position the cursor on the location of your choice in the magazine list.
Load
location
"Load directly to spindle" is possible if the cursor is positioned on the
spindle magazine location.

Use the input key to accept the entries for the tool identifier, duplo No.
etc.

Abort
Abort the loading operation.

OK
Confirm your entries with "OK".

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 5-139
 5 5
Parameters operating area 01/2008
5.3 Tool management

Load from "Tool list":

Tool The "Tool list" menu is selected.
list The appropriate tool is selected.

Press the "Load" softkey.

Load
The vertical softkey bar changes.
Find empty After pressing the “Find empty location” softkey, the system searches
location for a suitable location and displays it.
Abort
Abort the loading operation.

OK
Initiate the loading operation.

The location found is entered under the location number.

If data are still missing, the tool data display is opened with the
missing data set to their defaults. You can start the loading operation
again.

5.3.5 Unloading a tool

Function

This function allows you to unload a selected tool and to save its data.

Sequence of operations

Unload from "Magazine list":

Magazine The "Magazine list" menu is selected.
list The appropriate magazine is selected.
The appropriate tool is selected.

When you press the “Unload” softkey, the magazine number and load
Unload
point are displayed in the “Unload” window.

If more than one load point is configured, select the appropriate load
point from the selection window.

OK
When you press "OK," the tool is unloaded.

Abort
Press "Abort" to stop the “Unload” process.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

5-140 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 5 5
01/2008 Parameters operating area
5.3 Tool management

"Unload directly from spindle" is only possible if the buffer is selected

and the cursor is positioned on the location of the spindle.

Tool Unload from "Tool list":

list The "Tool list" menu is selected.
The appropriate tool is selected.

When you press the “Unload” softkey, the “Unload” window opens and
Unload
the magazine number and load point are displayed.

If more than one loading point is configured, select the appropriate

loading point from the selection window.

OK
Click "OK" to begin the unloading process or

Abort
Click on “Abort” to abort the process.

Delete The tool data of the selected tool is deleted from the TO memory. You
tool can do this only if the tool is not currently stored in a magazine
location.

5.3.6 Relocating a tool

Function

This function allows you to move a selected tool from one location to
another.

Sequence of operations

Magazine The "Magazine list" menu is displayed.

list

Position the cursor on the tool to be relocated in the magazine list.

When you select the "Relocate" key, the "Relocate tool" window
Relocate
opens.

There are 2 methods by which you can select the new empty location
for the tool:
1. Enter the magazine and location numbers in the "Relocate tool"
window.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 5-141
 5 5
Parameters operating area 01/2008
5.3 Tool management

Find empty 2. Select softkey "Find empty location" and an appropriate empty
or location location is suggested.

OK
Press "OK" to save the tool to the new empty location,

Abort
and the relocation operation is aborted with "Abort".

Use magazine number 9998 to move a tool to or from the spindle.

5.3.7 Finding and positioning a tool

Function

You can find a tool or tool location in the active tool magazine and
position the tool.

Magazine The "Magazine list" menu is displayed.

list
Sequence of operations

Next Select the required magazine.

Maglist x
magazine or

Find & Press the "Find/position" softkey.

position
A dialog box is overlaid. Enter the
tool identifier e.g. T501, duplo No. e.g. 2, as well as the load point.

OK
Press "OK" to execute.
A message appears: e.g. “location 1 found.”

Find & Continue to press the "Find/position" softkey.

position
The vertical softkey bar changes.
Find Press the "Find location" softkey. The system suggests the location.
location

Position
Press the "Position" softkey.
The tool/location is moved to the load point. If there are several load
points, a window opens in which you can select the appropriate point
with the cursor.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

5-142 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 5 5
01/2008 Parameters operating area
5.4 ShopMill tool management

5.4 ShopMill tool management

Function

ShopMill tool management allows workshop-compatible tool

management of milling machines.
The following lists are available to you for this function:
• Tool list
• Tool wear list
• Magazine list
You enter the tools and their offset data and the wear monitoring data
in the tool list/tool wear list. You will be able to identify in the
magazine list which magazine locations are disabled or not.

Tool list The tool list displays all tools and their offset data stored as a tool
data block in the NCK, irrespective of whether they are assigned to a
magazine location. The tool list offers the current tool types for which
geometric and technological data can be assigned.

Loading/unloading
When a tool is loaded, it is taken to a magazine location.
Unloading removes the tool from the magazine.

Sorting
The tools in the tool list and tool wear list can be sorted according
to magazine location, name, and type.

Machine manufacturer Machine data can be set to hide "Load," "Unload" and "Sort" softkeys.

Manual tools
Manual tools are included in the tool list, but not stored in the
magazine. They must be attached to the spindle by hand.

Tool wear list This list specifies which wear data (length and radius/diameter) are to
be taken into account. The following types of monitoring can also be
defined for a tool:
• Monitoring of the effective operating time (tool life)
• Monitoring of number of tool load operations (quantity)
• Monitoring of wear
• Additional tool status data (disable tool, tool in fixed location,
oversized tool)

© Siemens AG 20086 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 5-143
 5 5
Parameters operating area 01/2008
5.4 ShopMill tool management

Fixed/flexible assignment of locations

You can define via a machine data whether all tools are fixed or
variable location coded.
• With fixed location coding, the tool is permanently assigned to a
magazine location. This concept can be used for machines with
disk-type magazine.
• With variable location coding, a tool can also be conveyed to a
magazine location other than the original location. This concept
can be used for machines with chain magazine. Individual tools
can be set to fixed-location-coded in the tool wear screen display
at the operator interface.

Magazine The magazine locations are listed with their tools, magazine locations
are indicated as disabled/not disabled, and the properties assigned to
the active tool (e.g. oversize) are displayed in the magazine list.

References Commissioning Manual, CNC Commissioning: ShopMill: Tool

management

Operating Manual, Operating/Programming ShopMill: Tools and tool

offsets

© Siemens AG 20086 All rights reserved.

5-144 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 5 5
01/2008 Parameters operating area
5.4 ShopMill tool management

5.4.1 Range of functions

Function
ShopMill tool management supports the following tool types, tool
parameters and magazine parameters:
Tool types – 120 End mill
– 200 Twist drill
– 220 Centering tool
– 710 3D probe
– 711 Edge probe
– 110 Cylindrical die-sinking cutter
– 111 Ballhead cutter
– 121 End mill with corner rounding
– 155 Bevel cutter
– 156 Bevel cutter with corner rounding
– 157 Tapered die-sinking cutter
Tool parameters – Magazine location/magazine number
– Tool type
– Tool name
– Duplo number
– Geometry length 1
– Geometry radius
– Wear length 1
– Wear radius
– Type of tool monitoring: Tool life
Quantity
– Tool status: Tool disabled
– Tool status: Tool oversized (right and left half locations)
– Tool status: Tool in fixed location
– Fillet radius
– Angle for taper milling tools

Magazine parameters – Magazine location disabled

5.4.2 Selecting a tool list

Sequence of operations

Tool If “ShopMill” tool management is set up, the tool list menu is
list automatically displayed when you call up the “Parameters” operating
area. Otherwise you can call the tool list via softkey.

© Siemens AG 20086 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 5-145
 5 5
Parameters operating area 01/2008
5.4 ShopMill tool management

5.4.3 Creating a new tool

Function

You create new tools in the tool list. A selection of tool types is
displayed for this purpose. The tool type determines which geometry
data are required and how they will be computed. The following
common tool types are available:

Sequence of operations

Attach the new tool to the spindle.

Tool Select the "Tool list" softkey. The tool list opens.
list
Place the cursor on the location in the tool list that the tool occupies in
the spindle. The location must still be vacant in the list.

New Press the "New tool" softkey.

tool

Cutter 3D tools The vertical bar changes and you can select different tools via the
... softkey.
Additional tool types are available via the "More" softkey.
More

The new tool is created and automatically assumes the name of the
selected tool type.

© Siemens AG 20086 All rights reserved.

5-146 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 5 5
01/2008 Parameters operating area
5.4 ShopMill tool management

Enter a unique tool name.

Enter the offset data of the tool.

In the case of facing tools, angle head cutters, and 3D tools, you must
define parameters in addition to the geometry data in the tool list.

Details
Press the "Details" softkey and enter the additional parameters.

The "Details" softkey is only active when a tool is selected for which
additional information is required.

Name Additional parameters

Angle head mill Length2, Length3, ΔLength2, ΔLength3
Facing tool Outside diameter, tool angle

3D tools

Type Name Additional parameters

110 Cylindrical die mill -
111 Ball end mill Smoothing radius
121 End mill with corner rounding Smoothing radius
155 Bevel cutter Angle for conical tools
156 Bevel cutter with corner rounding Rounding radius, angle of conic. tools
157 Tapered die-sinking cutter Angle for conical tools

5.4.4 Creating more than one cutting edge per tool

In the case of tools with more than one cutting edge, a separate set of
offset data is assigned to each cutting edge. You can create up to 9
cutting edges for each tool.

In the case of ISO programs (e.g. ISO dialect 1) you must specify an
H number. This corresponds to a particular tool offset set.

© Siemens AG 20086 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 5-147
 5 5
Parameters operating area 01/2008
5.4 ShopMill tool management

Sequence of operations

Follow the instructions given above to set up tools with more than one
edge in the tool list and enter the offset data for the 1st edge.

New Then select the "Cutting edges" and "New edge" softkeys.
Edges
.... edge
Instead of the input fields for the first cutting edge, the offset data
input fields for the second cutting edge are displayed.

Enter the offset data for the second cutting edge.

Repeat this process if you wish to create more tool edge offset data.

Delete Select the "Delete edge" softkey if you want to delete the tool edge
edge offset data for an edge.
You can only delete the data for the edge with the highest edge
number.

D No. + D No. -
By selecting softkey "D No. +" or "D No. –", you can display the offset
.... data for the edge with the next highest or next lowest edge number
respectively.

5.4.5 Changing a tool name

A tool that has just been created in the tool list is automatically
assigned the name of the selected tool group. You can change this
name as often as you want to
• a tool name, e.g. "Facing tool_120mm", or
• a tool number, e.g. "1".
The tool name must not exceed 17 characters in length. You can use
letters, digits, the underscore symbol (_), periods (".") and slashes
("/").

© Siemens AG 20086 All rights reserved.

5-148 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 5 5
01/2008 Parameters operating area
5.4 ShopMill tool management

5.4.6 Creating a replacement tool

A replacement tool (also known as a duplo tool) is one that can be

employed to perform the same machining operation as a tool that
already exists (e.g. as a replacement after tool breakage).

When you create a replacement tool, you must use the same name as
is used for a comparable tool.

Sequence of operations

New Create the replacement tool as a new tool. See Section “Create new
tool tool”

Assign the same name as the original tool to the replacement tool.
Confirm the name with the "input" key and the duplo number of the
replacement tool is automatically incremented by 1.

The sequence for inserting a replacement tool is determined by the

duplo number DP.

5.4.7 Manual tools

The "manual tool" function must be set up by the machine

manufacturer.
Manual tools are tools which are required during machining, but are
only available in the tool list but not in the tool-holding magazine.
These tools must be attached/detached manually to/from the spindle.

Machine manufacturer Please note information supplied by machine tool manufacturer!

© Siemens AG 20086 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 5-149
 5 5
Parameters operating area 01/2008
5.4 ShopMill tool management

5.4.8 Entering tool wear data

Tools that are in use for long periods are subject to wear. You can
measure this wear and enter it in the tool wear list. ShopMill then
takes this information into account when calculating the tool length or
radius compensation. This ensures a consistent accuracy in
workpiece machining.
When you enter the wear data, ShopMill checks that the values do not
exceed an incremental or absolute upper limit. The incremental upper
limit indicates the maximum difference between the previous and new
wear value. The absolute upper limit indicates the maximum total
value that you can enter.
The upper limits are set in a machine data code.

Sequence of operations

Tool Select the "Tool wear" softkey.

wear

Example of a tool wear list with variable location allocation

Place the cursor on the tool whose wear data you want to enter.

Enter the differences for length (ΔLength X, ΔLength Z) and

radius/diameter (ΔRadius/Δ∅) in the appropriate columns.

Machine manufacturer Please note information supplied by machine tool manufacturer!

© Siemens AG 20086 All rights reserved.

5-150 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 5 5
01/2008 Parameters operating area
5.4 ShopMill tool management

5.4.9 Activating tool monitoring

ShopMill allows you to monitor the tool life of the tools automatically to
ensure constant machining quality.

You can also disable tools that you no longer want to use, identify
them as oversize or assign them permanently to a magazine location.
In the tool wear list you can assign each tool the following tool
monitoring and properties:
• Tool life (T)
• Count (C)
• Wear (W)
• Other tool properties
− Tool disabled (G)
− Tool in fixed location (P)
− Oversize tool (U)

The tool monitoring functions are activated via machine data.

Machine manufacturer Please follow the machine manufacturer's instructions!

Sequence of operations

Tool Select “Tool wear” via softkey

wear

Tool life T (Time) The tool life is used to monitor the service life of a tool with machining
feedrate in minutes. When the remaining tool life is ≤ 0, the tool is set
to "disabled". The tool is not put into operation on the next tool
change. If a replacement tool is available, it is inserted in its place.
The tool life monitoring function always refers to the selected tool
edge.

© Siemens AG 20086 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 5-151
 5 5
Parameters operating area 01/2008
5.4 ShopMill tool management

Count C (Count) With the count, on the other hand, the number of times a tool is
attached to a spindle is counted. The tool is also disabled in this case,
when the remainder reaches "0".

Wear W (Wear) With wear the greatest value in the wear parameters Δ Length X,
Δ Length Z, or Δ Radius or Δ ∅ in the wear list is monitored. Here, too,
the tool is disabled if one of the wear parameters reaches the value
for wear W.

The wear monitoring function must be set up by the machine

manufacturer.

Machine manufacturer Please follow the machine manufacturer's instructions!

Pre-warning limit The pre-warning limit specifies a tool life, workpiece count or wear at
which the first warning is displayed.

The value for output of a warning due to the wear stage reached is
calculated from the difference between the maximum wear and the
warning limit entered.

Disabled (G) Individual tools can also be disabled manually if you no longer want to
use them for workpiece machining.

Oversize (U) In the case of oversize tools, neighboring magazine locations (left and
right adjacent location) are only reserved alternately, i.e. you can only
insert the next tool in the next magazine location but one. (This can
also contain an oversize tool.)

Fixed-location-coded (F) You can assign tools to a fixed location, i.e., the tool can only be used
in its present magazine location. After machining, the tool always
returns to its old magazine location.

Monitoring tool use

Tool Select the "Tool wear" softkey

wear
Position the cursor on the tool that you want to monitor.

© Siemens AG 20086 All rights reserved.

5-152 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 5 5
01/2008 Parameters operating area
5.4 ShopMill tool management

In the column "T/C" select the parameter that you wish to monitor (T =
Tool life, C = Count, W = Wear).

Enter a pre-warning limit for the tool life, count, or wear.

Enter the scheduled service life for the tool, the scheduled number of
workpieces to be machined or the maximum permissible wear.

The tool is disabled when the tool life, count or wear is reached.

Entering tool statuses

Tool Select the "Tool wear" softkey
wear
Place the cursor on a tool.

Option G Select the option "G" in the first field of the last column if you want to
disable the tool for machining.

-or-

Option U Select the option "U" in the second field of the last column if you want
to mark the tool as oversize.

-or-

Option P Select the option "P" in the third field of the last column if you want
assign the tool to a fixed magazine location.

The tool properties you have set become active immediately.

© Siemens AG 20086 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 5-153
 5 5
Parameters operating area 01/2008
5.4 ShopMill tool management

5.4.10 Managing the magazine list

The magazine locations are listed with their tools, magazine locations
are indicated as disabled/not disabled, and the properties assigned to
the active tool (e.g. oversize) are displayed in the magazine list.

Sequence of operations

Select the "Magazine" softkey

Magazine

Disabling a magazine Magazine locations can be reserved or disabled for specific tools, e.g.
location in the case of an oversized tool.

Select the magazine location of your choice with the cursor keys.

Toggle in column "Disable location" with the softkey "Alternative" until

Alternative
a "G" (= disabled) appears in the field in question. The location is now
disabled. A tool can no longer be loaded into this magazine location.

Tool status In the column "Tool status", you can see which properties have been
assigned to the active tool:
• E: Tool is disabled
• U: Tool oversized
• P: Tool at a fixed location

Enabling a magazine
location
Position the cursor on the disabled field.

Deselect option G in the "Location disable" column.

Alternative
The magazine location is enabled again.

© Siemens AG 20086 All rights reserved.

5-154 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 5 5
01/2008 Parameters operating area
5.4 ShopMill tool management

5.4.11 Deleting a tool

Function

Tools can be deleted from the tool list.

Sequence of operations

Tool Press the “Tool list” softkeys.

list
Select the tool of your choice with the cursor keys.

Delete Press the "Delete tool" softkey and

tool
confirm with "Delete".

The tool data of the selected tool are deleted, the magazine location
in which the deleted tool was located is enabled.

Abort
The tool is not deleted with "Abort".

5.4.12 Changing a tool type

Function

In the tool list you can change a tool type into another tool type.

Sequence of operations

Tool Press the "Tool list” softkey.

list
Select the desired tool and position the cursor on input field "Type."

Press the "Alternat." softkey until the tool type you are looking for
Alternative
appears.
The input fields for the new tool type are displayed.

© Siemens AG 20086 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 5-155
 5 5
Parameters operating area 01/2008
5.4 ShopMill tool management

5.4.13 Loading or unloading a tool into or from the magazine

Loading and unloading of tools into and out of magazine locations

must be enabled in a machine data code.
Function

You can unload tools in the magazine that you are not using at
present. ShopMill then automatically saves the tool data in the tool list
outside the magazine. Should you want to use the tool again later,
simply load the tool with the tool data into the corresponding
magazine location again. Then the same tool data does not have to
be entered more than once.
Loading and unloading of tools into and out of magazine locations
must be enabled in a machine data code.

Machine manufacturer Please follow the machine manufacturer's instructions!

If your machine has only one magazine, you simply need to enter the
location number you require when loading the tool, not the magazine
number.

Sequence of operations

Loading a tool into the

magazine
Tool Press the "Tool list” softkey.
list
Place the cursor on the tool that you want to load into the magazine (if
the tools are sorted according to magazine location number you will
find it at the end of the tool list).

Press the "Load" softkey.

Load
The "Empty location" window appears. The "Location" field is
initialized with the number of the first empty magazine location.

Press the "OK" softkey to load the tool into the suggested location.

-or-

Enter the location number you require and press the "OK" softkey.
-or-

© Siemens AG 20086 All rights reserved.

5-156 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 5 5
01/2008 Parameters operating area
5.4 ShopMill tool management

Press the "Spindle" and "OK" softkeys to load a tool into the spindle.
Spindle

The tool is loaded into the specified magazine location.

Finding an empty location

in the magazine and
loading the tool

Select the "Magazine" softkey

Magazine

Place the cursor on the tool that you want to load into the magazine.

Press the "Load" softkey.

Load
The "Empty location" window appears. The "Location" field is
initialized with the number of the first empty magazine location.

Enter the magazine number and a "0" for the location number if you
wish to search for an empty location in a particular magazine.

-or-
Enter a "0" for the magazine number and location number if you wish
to search for an empty location in all magazines.

Press the "OK" softkey.

An empty location is suggested.

Press the "OK" softkey.

The tool is loaded into the suggested magazine location.

Unloading an individual
tool from the magazine
Select the "Magazine" softkey
Magazine

Position the cursor on the tool that you want to unload.

Press the "Unload" softkey.

Unload
The tool is unloaded from the magazine.

© Siemens AG 20086 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 5-157
 5 5
Parameters operating area 01/2008
5.4 ShopMill tool management

Unloading all tools from

the magazine
Select the "Magazine" softkey
Magazine

Unload all
Press the "Unload all" and "Unload" softkeys.
Load
All tools are unloaded from the magazine.

Abort
You can abort the unloading process at any time by pressing the
"Abort" softkey. The current tool is unloaded and then the process is
aborted.
The unloading process is also aborted if you exit the magazine list.

5.4.14 Relocating a tool

Tools can be relocated within magazines or between different

magazines, which means that you do not have to unload tools from
the magazine in order to load them into a different location.

ShopMill automatically suggests an empty location to which you can

relocate the tool. The magazine in which ShopMill searches for an
empty location first is stored in a machine data code.
You can also specify an empty magazine location directly or define
the magazine that ShopMill will search for an empty location.

If your machine has just one magazine, you only need to enter the
location number you require, not the magazine number.

If a spindle location is shown in the tool list, you can also attach or
detach a tool directly to or from the spindle.

Machine manufacturer Please follow the machine manufacturer's instructions!

© Siemens AG 20086 All rights reserved.

5-158 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 5 5
01/2008 Parameters operating area
5.4 ShopMill tool management

Specifying an empty
location
Tool Press the "Tool list” softkey.
list
Place the cursor on the tool that you wish to relocate to a different
magazine location.

Press the "Relocate" softkey.

Relocate
The "Empty location" window appears. The "Location" field is
initialized with the number of the first empty magazine location.

Press the "OK" softkey to relocate the tool to the suggested location.

-or-

Enter the location number you require and press the "OK" softkey.

-or-

Press the "Spindle" and "OK" softkeys to load a tool into the spindle.
Spindle

The tool is relocated to the specified magazine location.

Finding an empty
location
Press the "Relocate" softkey.
Relocate
The "Empty location" window appears. The "Location" field is
initialized with the number of the first empty magazine location.

Enter the magazine number and a "0" for the location number if you
wish to search for an empty location in a particular magazine.

-or-

Enter a "0" for the magazine number and location number if you wish
to search for an empty location in all magazines.

Press the "OK" softkey.

An empty location is suggested.

Press the "OK" softkey.

The tool is relocated to the suggested magazine location.

© Siemens AG 20086 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 5-159
 5 5
Parameters operating area 01/2008
5.4 ShopMill tool management

5.4.15 Positioning a magazine

You can position magazine locations directly on the loading point.

Positioning a magazine
location
Press the "Magazine” softkey.
Magazine

Place the cursor on the magazine location that you want to position on
the loading point.

Position
Press the "Position" softkey.

The magazine location is positioned on the loading point.

5.4.16 Sort tools in the tool list

Function

The tools can be sorted according to magazine location, tool name

(alphabetical), or tool type in the tool list. When you sort according to
magazine assignment, the empty locations in the magazine are also
displayed.

Sequence of operations

Tool Tool Select the "Tool list" or "Tool wear" softkey.

list or wear
Press the "Sort" softkey.
Sort

By By Activate one of the softkeys to choose the sort criterion.

magazine or name or
By The tools are listed in the new order.
type

By
or T number

© Siemens AG 20086 All rights reserved.

5-160 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 5 5
01/2008 Parameters operating area
5.5 ShopTurn tool management

5.5 ShopTurn tool management

Function

ShopTurn is an operating and programming software program for

turning machines that makes it easy for you to operate the machine
and to program workpieces.

Various tools are used for machining workpieces. The geometry and
technological data of these tools must be known to ShopTurn before
you execute your program.
ShopTurn provides the "Tool list", "Tool wear list" and "Magazine list"
screen forms for managing your tools,

Tool list You must enter all the tools that you want to use on the turning
machine in the tools list. The tools that are in the tool turret must be
assigned to specific magazine locations. You can also sort and delete
tools.
Loading/unloadingWhen a tool is loaded, it is taken to a magazine location.
Unloading removes the tool from the magazine.

Sorting
Tools can be sorted in the tool and tool wear lists according to
magazine location, name and type.

Machine manufacturer Machine data can be set to hide "Load," "Unload" and "Sort" softkeys.

Manual tools
Manual tools are included in the tool list, but not stored in the
magazine. They must be attached to the spindle by hand.

Tool wear list You must enter the wear data for your tools in the tool wear list.
ShopTurn takes this data into account on machining the workpiece.
You can also activate tool monitoring here as well as disable tools or
identify them as oversized.

Magazine list The magazine locations are listed with their tools; magazine locations
are indicated as disabled (G) / not disabled ( ), and the properties
assigned to the active tool (e.g. oversize (U) are displayed in the
magazine list.

References Operating Manual, Operating/Programming ShopTurn: Tool

management
Commissioning Manual, CNC Commissioning: ShopTurn: Tool
management

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 5-161
 5 5
Parameters operating area 01/2008
5.5 ShopTurn tool management

5.5.1 Range of functions

Function
ShopTurn tool management supports the following tool types, tool
parameters and magazine parameters:

You can create up to 250 tools under PCU 20.

You can create up to 98 replacement tools for each tool.
Tool types – Roughing tool
– Finishing tool
– Recessing tool
– Threading tool
– Milling tool
– Drill
– Button
– Stop
– Threading tool
– Rotary drill
– 3D_probe
– Facing tool

Tool parameters – Magazine location/magazine number

– Tool type
– Tool name
– Duplo number
– Tool length compensation in the X direction
– Tool length compensation in the Z direction
– Wear radius
– Tip length of a cutting tool or a grooving cutter
– Tip width of a grooving tool
– Number of teeth for a milling cutter
– Angle of tool tip on a drill
– Type of tool monitoring: optionally according to tool life or tool change
in relation cutting edge.
– Tool state: Tool disabled
– Tool state: Tool oversized (right and left half locations)

Magazine parameters – Magazine location locked

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

5-162 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 5 5
01/2008 Parameters operating area
5.5 ShopTurn tool management

Additional functionality – You can use circular magazines that are hidden via display machine
data.
– Loading station for loading and unloading tools via display machine
data
– Display tools (milling cutter/drill) in diameter or radius via display
machine data

5.5.2 Selecting a tool list

Sequence of operations

Tool When you call up the "Parameters" operating area for the first time,
list the "Tool list" menu is automatically displayed. Otherwise you can call
it via softkey.

5.5.3 Creating a new tool

When you want to create a new tool, ShopTurn offers a range of

generally available tool types. The tool type determines what
geometry data you have to enter and how it is calculated.

Possible tool types

The rotary drill can be used for centric drilling and turning.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 5-163
 5 5
Parameters operating area 01/2008
5.5 ShopTurn tool management

Sequence of operations
Install the new tool in the tool turret.

Tool Select the "Tool list" softkey.

list

In the tool list, position the cursor on the location that the tool is to
occupy in the turret.

The location must still be empty in the tool list.

New Press the "New tool" softkey.

tool

Roughing Use the softkeys to select the tool type of your choice.
3D_Probe
tool ... Additional tool types are available via the "More" softkey.
More

Select the required cutting edge position.

Edges
Additional cutting edge positions are available via the "More" softkey.
More

The new tool is created and automatically assumes the name of the
selected tool type.

Enter a unique tool name.

You can edit the tool name as required. A tool name may contain a
maximum of 17 characters. You can use letters, digits, the underscore
symbol (_), periods (".") and slashes ("/").

If you assign a tool name that already exists, the "Create a duplo tool"
window appears. You can decide whether you would like to create a
sister tool (see Sec. “Creating duplo/replacement tools”.

Also enter the offset data of the tool.

If you want to modify the cutting edge position of the tool later, place
the cursor in the “Type” column.

Use the "Alternative" softkey or the "Select" key to select one of the
Alternative specified options.
or

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

5-164 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 5 5
01/2008 Parameters operating area
5.5 ShopTurn tool management

Changing a tool name You have the option of later changing a tool’s name.

Position the cursor in the "Tool name" column and enter the desired
name.

If you enter a tool name that already exists, the "Create a duplo tool"
window appears. You are asked whether a duplo tool should be
created.
Do not Press the "Do not rename" softkey if you do not want to create a sister
rename tool.

Enter a new tool name.

Abort
Using the "Abort" softkey, you can cancel the process at any time.

5.5.4 Creating more than one cutting edge per tool

In the case of tools with more than one cutting edge, a separate set of
offset data is assigned to each cutting edge. You can set up a total of
9 edges for each tool.

Sequence of operations

Follow the instructions given above to set up tools with more than one
edge in the tool list and enter the offset data for the 1st edge.

New • Then select the "Cutting edges" and "New edge" softkeys.
Edges
... edge
Instead of the input fields for the first cutting edge, the offset data
input fields for the second cutting edge are displayed.

• Select another cutting edge position if appropriate.

• Enter the offset data for the second cutting edge.

• Repeat this process if you wish to create more tool edge offset
data.

Delete • Select the "Delete edge" softkey if you want to delete the tool
edge edge offset data for an edge.
You can only delete the data for the edge with the highest edge
number.

D No. + D No. -
• By selecting softkey "D No. +" or "D No. –", you can display the
... offset data for the edge with the next highest or next lowest edge
number respectively.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 5-165
 5 5
Parameters operating area 01/2008
5.5 ShopTurn tool management

5.5.5 Creating replacement tools

A “replacement tool” (also known as a duplo tool) is a tool that can be

used for the same machining operation as a tool that has already
been input. You can use it, for example, to replace a broken tool.

For each tool in the tool list, you can create several replacement tools.
The duplo number 1 is always assigned to the original tool and duplo
numbers 2, 3, etc. are assigned to the replacement tools.

For sister tools, the following data must agree with that of the original
tool:
• Tool type
• Length of cutting edge
• Tool radius
• Direction of rotation
• Coolant

Sequence of operations

New Create the replacement tool as a new tool. See Section “Create new
tool tool”

Assign the same name as the original tool to the replacement tool.

Confirm the name with the "input" key and the duplo number of the
replacement tool is automatically incremented by 1.

Now input the tool offset data of the tool.

The sequence for inserting a replacement tool is determined by the

duplo number DP.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

5-166 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 5 5
01/2008 Parameters operating area
5.5 ShopTurn tool management

5.5.6 Sorting tools

When you are working with large magazines or several magazines, it

is useful to display the tools sorted according to different criteria. Then
you will be able to find a specific tool more easily in the lists.

Sequence of operations

Tool Tool Select the "Tool list" or “Tool wear" softkey.

list or wear

Sort
Press the "Sort" softkey.

By By Activate one of the softkeys to choose the sort criteria.

magazine or name or
By The tools are listed in the new order.
type

5.5.7 Deleting tools

Tools that are no longer in use can be deleted from the tool list for a
clearer overview.

Sequence of operations

Tool Press the "Tool list” softkey.

list
Select the desired tool.

Delete Press the "Delete tool" softkey and

tool
confirm with "Delete".

The tool data of the selected tool are deleted, the magazine location
in which the deleted tool was located is enabled.

Abort
The tool is not deleted with "Abort".

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 5-167
 5 5
Parameters operating area 01/2008
5.5 ShopTurn tool management

5.5.8 Load or unload tool in the magazine

The tool list has more locations than magazine locations. This means
you can unload tools you currently do not need in the magazine and
save the tool data in the tool list outside the magazine. If you want to
use the tool again at a later point in time, simply load the tool data
back to the magazine location. Then the same tool data does not
have to be entered more than once.

Loading and unloading of tool data into and out of magazine locations
must be enabled in a machine data code.

Machine manufacturer Please follow the machine manufacturer's instructions!

Sequence of operations

Load a tool into the

magazine
Place the cursor on the tool that you want to load into the magazine (if
the tools are sorted according to magazine location number you will
find it at the end of the tool list).

Press the "Load" softkey.

Load
The "Empty location" window appears. The "Location" field is
initialized with the number of the first empty magazine location.

Press the "OK" softkey to load the tool into the suggested location.

-or-

Enter the location number you require and press the "OK" softkey.

The data relating to your tool are now displayed in the specified
magazine location.

Unloading an individual
tool from the magazine
Select the "Magazine" softkey
Magazine

Position the cursor on the tool that you want to unload.

Press the "Unload" softkey.

Unload
The tool data are removed from the magazine and stored in the tool
list in a position without a number.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

5-168 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 5 5
01/2008 Parameters operating area
5.5 ShopTurn tool management

Unloading all tools from

the magazine
Select the "Magazine" softkey
Magazine

Unload all
Press the "Unload all" and "Unload" softkeys.
Unload
All tools are unloaded from the magazine.

Abort
You can abort the unloading process at any time by pressing the
"Abort" softkey. The current tool is unloaded and then the process is
aborted.
The unloading process is also aborted if you exit the magazine list.

5.5.9 Relocating a tool

Tools can be relocated within magazines or between different

magazines, which means that you do not have to unload tools from
the magazine in order to load them into a different location.
ShopTurn automatically suggests an empty location to which you can
relocate the tool. The magazine in which ShopTurn searches for an
empty location first is stored in a machine data code.
You can also specify an empty magazine location directly or define
the magazine ShopTurn should search for an empty location.
If your machine has just one magazine, you only need to enter the
location number you require, not the magazine number.

If a spindle location is shown in the tool list, you can also load or
unload a tool directly into or out of the spindle.

Machine manufacturer Please follow the machine manufacturer's instructions!

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 5-169
 5 5
Parameters operating area 01/2008
5.5 ShopTurn tool management

Specifying an empty
location
Tool Select the "Tool list" softkey.
list
Place the cursor on the tool that you wish to relocate to a different
magazine location.

Press the "Relocate" softkey.

Relocate
The "Empty location" window appears. The "Location" field is
initialized with the number of the first empty magazine location.

Press the "OK" softkey to relocate the tool to the suggested location.

-or-

Enter the location number you require and press the "OK" softkey.

-or-

Press the "Spindle" and "OK" softkeys to load a tool into the spindle.
Spindle

The tool is relocated to the specified magazine location.

Finding an empty
location
Place the cursor on the tool that you wish to relocate to a different
magazine location.

Press the "Relocate" softkey.

Relocate
The "Empty location" window appears. The "Location" field is
initialized with the number of the first empty magazine location.

Enter the magazine number and a "0" for the location number if you
wish to search for an empty location in a particular magazine.

-or-

Enter a "0" for the magazine number and location number if you wish
to search for an empty location in all magazines.

Press the "OK" softkey.

An empty location is suggested.

Press the "OK" softkey.

The tool is relocated to the suggested magazine location.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

5-170 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 5 5
01/2008 Parameters operating area
5.5 ShopTurn tool management

5.5.10 Positioning a magazine

You can position magazine locations directly on the loading point.

Positioning a magazine
location
Select the "Magazine" softkey
Magazine

Position the cursor on the magazine location that you would like to
position on the loading point.

Position
Press the "Position" softkey.

The magazine location is positioned on the loading point.

5.5.11 Entering tool wear data

Tools that are in use for long periods are subject to wear. You can
measure this wear and enter it in the tool wear list. ShopTurn then
takes this information into account when calculating the tool length or
radius compensation. This ensures a consistent accuracy in
workpiece machining.

Sequence of operations

Tool Select “Tool wear” via softkey

wear

Place the cursor on the tool whose wear data you want to enter.

Enter the differences for length (ΔLength X, ΔLength Z) and

radius/diameter (ΔRadius/Δ∅) in the appropriate columns.

The wear data entered is added to the radius but subtracted from the
tool length. A positive differential value for the radius therefore
corresponds to an oversize (e.g. for subsequent grinding).

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 5-171
 5 5
Parameters operating area 01/2008
5.5 ShopTurn tool management

5.5.12 Activating tool monitoring

ShopTurn allows you to monitor the tool life of the tools automatically
to ensure constant machining quality.

You can also disable tools that you no longer want to use or identify
them as oversize.

The tool monitoring functions are activated via display machine data.
Machine manufacturer Please follow the machine manufacturer's instructions!

Sequence of operations

Tool Select “Tool wear” via softkey

wear

Tool life (T) With the tool life T (Time), the service life for a tool with machining
feedrate is monitored in minutes. When the remaining tool life is = 0,
the tool is set to "disabled". The tool is not put into operation on the
next tool change. If a replacement tool is available, it is inserted in its
place.
Tool life is monitored on the basis of the selected tool cutting edge.

Count (C) With the count C, the number of workpieces machined by the tool is
counted. The tool is also disabled in this case, when the remainder
reaches "0".

Wear (W) With wear W, the greatest value in the wear parameters Δ Length X,
Δ Length Z, or Δ Radius or Δ ∅ in the wear list is monitored. Here, too,
the tool is disabled if one of the wear parameters reaches the value
for wear W.

Machine manufacturer Please follow the machine manufacturer's instructions!

Pre-warning limit The pre-warning limit specifies a tool life or quantity at which an initial
warning is output.

Disabled (G) Individual tools can also be disabled manually if you no longer want to
use them for workpiece machining.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

5-172 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 5 5
01/2008 Parameters operating area
5.5 ShopTurn tool management

Oversize (U) In the case of oversize tools, neighboring magazine locations are only
reserved alternately, i.e. you can only insert the next tool in the next
magazine location but one (This can also contain an oversize tool.)

Fixed-location-coded (F) You can assign tools to a fixed location, i.e., the tool can only be used
in its present magazine location. After machining, the tool always
returns to its old magazine location.

Monitoring tool use

Tool Select “Tool wear” via softkey

wear
Position the cursor on the tool that you want to monitor.

In column "T/C", select option "T" if you want to monitor the tool life.
(T = Tool life, C = Count, W = Wear).

Enter a pre-warning limit for tool life, count or wear in minutes.

Enter the scheduled service life for the tool, the scheduled number of
workpieces to be machined or the maximum permissible wear.

The tool is disabled when the tool life, count or wear is reached.

If you wish to monitor the count, you must also insert the following G
code commands before the end of the program in every program that
calls the tools to be monitored:
SETPIECE(1) ; increase count by 1
SETPIECE(0) ; delete T no.

Entering tool statuses

Option G Place the cursor on a tool.

Select the option "G" in the first field of the last column if you want to
disable the tool for machining.

-or-

Select the option "U" in the second field of the last column if you want
Option U
to mark the tool as oversize.

The tool disable or location disable for neighboring magazine

locations is now active.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 5-173
 5 5
Parameters operating area 01/2008
5.5 ShopTurn tool management

5.5.13 Managing magazine locations

The magazine locations are listed with their tools, magazine locations
are indicated as disabled/not disabled, and the properties assigned to
the active tool (e.g. oversize) are displayed in the magazine list.

Disable magazine location If a magazine location is defective, or when an oversize tool requires
more than half a neighboring location, you can disable the magazine
location.

Sequence of operations

Press the "Magazine” softkey.

Magazine

Place the cursor on the relevant empty magazine location in the

"Location disable" column.

Use the "Alternative" softkey to toggle the setting until a "G"

Alternative
(=disabled) appears in the field.

The location disable is now active and you can no longer assign tool
data to this magazine location.

Enable magazine location

Place the cursor on an empty magazine location in the "Location

disable" column.

Press the "Alternative" softkey until the letter "G" no longer appears.
Alternative
The magazine location is enabled again.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

5-174 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 5 5
01/2008 Parameters operating area
5.6 R parameters

5.6 R parameters

5.6.1 Function

Function
Parameters are read and written by programs.
In this operating area, parameters can be edited manually.

5.6.2 Edit/delete/find R parameters

Function
The number of channel-specific R variables is defined
in machine data.

Range:
R0 - R999 (dependent on machine data).
There are no gaps in the numbering within the range.

Sequence of operations

R The "Channel-specific R parameters" window appears.

Parameters The channel-specific parameters are displayed.
The vertical softkey bar changes.

Editing parameters:
Position the cursor bar on the appropriate input field and enter the
new values.

Deleting parameters:
Delete Displays a marker in which the Rx to Ry parameter range to be
area deleted must be entered.

Delete The complete R variable range is deleted after a safety query and
OK
all “OK”, i.e. all values are set to 0.

Abort
You cannot delete using "Abort".

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 5-175
 5 5
Parameters operating area 01/2008
5.7 Setting data

Finding parameters:
Find
An input window for a parameter number appears when you press the
"Find" softkey.

Enter the R parameter number you wish to find via the numeric
keypad.
When you press the "Input" key, the cursor is automatically positioned
on this parameter if it exists.

Additional information

Input and deletion of parameters can be disabled via the keylock

switch.

5.7 Setting data

5.7.1 Working area limitation

Function

The "Working area limitation" function can be used to limit the range
within which a tool can traverse in all channel axes. These commands
allow you to set up protection zones in the working area which are out
of bounds for tool movements.

Sequence of operations

Setting Select softkey "Setting data".

data The vertical softkey bar changes.

Working Press the "Working area limitation" softkey.

area The "Working area limitation" window opens.

Edit the working area limitation:

Position the cursor on the desired field.
Enter the new values on the numeric keypad.
The upper or lower limit of the protection zone changes according to
your input.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

5-176 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 5 5
01/2008 Parameters operating area
5.7 Setting data

Activate the appropriate working area limitation with the "Select key".

In "MDA" and "Automatic" modes, the working area limitation is not

activated according to setting data within the current NC program until
a "WALIMON" command is set.

Additional information

The "Working area limitation" function can be disabled by means of

the keylock switch.

5.7.2 Jog data

Function

The feedrates must be specified in the unit determined by the G

function.

G function G94 Feedrate in mm (inch)/min

G95 Revolutional feedrate in mm (inch)/rev

Jog feedrate Feedrate value in JOG mode

Continuous jog • JOG mode: The axis moves as long as the key is pressed.
• Continuous mode: Axis moves after pressing key once,
until
- The key is pressed again,
- NC Stop,
- Reset,
- Software/hardware limit switch.

Variable increment Increment value for Jog variable increment

The following data are displayed only if a spindle is configured:

Jog spindle speed Spindle speed in Jog mode

Spindle Jog data for the master spindle:

• Spindle no.: Name of leading spindle
• Direction of rotation: Direction of rotation of leading spindle
• Spindle speed: Speed of the master spindle in Jog
Operation

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 5-177
 5 5
Parameters operating area 01/2008
5.7 Setting data

Sequence of operations

Setting Select softkey "Setting data".

data The vertical softkey bar changes.

Jog Press the "Jog data" softkey.

data The "Jog data" window is opened.

Edit JOG data:

Position the cursor bar on the appropriate input field and enter a new
value or
select a new value using the "Select" key.

Additional information

The limit values for the maximum and minimum permissible values
are defined in the machine data.

5.7.3 Spindle data

Function

Max./min. The value entered for the spindle speed in the fields max./min. must
be within the limit values defined in the machine data. In addition, a
further spindle speed limitation can be active in the program on
account of the SIMS command.

Sequence of operations

Setting Select softkey "Setting data".

data The vertical softkey bar changes.

Spindle Press the "Spindle data" softkey.

data The "Spindle data" window is opened.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

5-178 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 5 5
01/2008 Parameters operating area
5.7 Setting data

Edit spindle data:

Position the cursor bar on the appropriate input field and enter a new
value or
select a new value using the "Select" key.

Additional information

• The limit values for the maximum and minimum permissible values
are defined in the machine data.
• The "Spindle data" function is displayed only if a spindle is
configured.

5.7.4 Dry run feedrate for DRY mode

Function

The feedrate entered here is used in the active program instead of the
programmed feedrate when the function "Dry run feedrate" (program
control) is selected in "Automatic" mode.

Sequence of operations

Setting Select softkey "Setting data".

data The vertical softkey bar changes.

Feedrate Press the "Feedrate DRY" softkey.

DRY The "Dry run feedrate" window is opened.

Edit the dry run feedrate:

Enter a new value.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 5-179
 5 5
Parameters operating area 01/2008
5.7 Setting data

5.7.5 Starting angle for thread cutting

Function

For thread cutting, a starting position for the master spindle is

displayed as the starting angle. A multiple thread can be cut by
changing the angle when the thread cutting operation is repeated.

Starting point
offset in °
Starting angle
for thread
(setting data)

Sequence of operations

Setting Select softkey "Setting data".

data The vertical softkey bar changes.

Starting Edit starting angle:

angle Press the "Starting angle" softkey.
The "Starting angle for thread" window opens.

Enter a new value.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

5-180 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 5 5
01/2008 Parameters operating area
5.7 Setting data

5.7.6 Other types of setting data

Function

All the setting data in the control are displayed in tabular form sorted
according to general (i.e. NCK-specific), channel-specific and axis-
specific setting data. The table contains both the setting data on the
vertical softkeys such as working area limitation, Jog data etc., as well
as special setting data such as software cam, oscillation,
compensation etc.

Sequence of operations

Setting Select softkey "Setting data".

data The vertical softkey bar changes.

Display setting data:

Press the "Misc." softkey.
Misc.
The horizontal and vertical softkey bars change.
Select the type:
General • The "General setting data ($SN_)" window is opened.
SD

Channel- • The "Channel-specific setting data ($SC_)" window is opened.

specific SD

Axis- • The "Axis-specific setting data ($SA_)" window is opened.

specific SD
The current setting data of the corresponding type $SN_, $SC_or
$SA_ are displayed.

Find setting data:

Find
In the "Find setting data" window enter the name or number you are
looking for (initial identifier is enough).

Click "OK" to begin the find process.

Find If several setting data have the same initial identifier, you can display
next other setting data by selecting softkey "Find next".

Change setting data:

Position the cursor bar on the appropriate input field and enter a new
value.

Additional information
Data can be edited or not depending on the active access protection
level.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 5-181
 5 5
Parameters operating area 01/2008
5.7 Setting data

5.7.7 Protection zones

Function

The "Protection zones" function allows you to protect various

elements on the machine, your equipment or the machined workpiece
against incorrect axis motions. You can view up to 10 programmed
protection zones in levels G17, G18 and G19.

References Programming Manual Work Preparation

Sequence of operations

Setting Select softkey "Setting data".

data The vertical softkey bar changes.
Protection Press the "Protection zones" softkey.
zones The "Working area limitations and protection zones" window opens.
The vertical softkey bar changes again.
Protection Protection Press the "Protection zone +" or "Protection zone -" softkey.
zone + zone - Up to 10 protection zones are displayed in succession.

Select the plane in which the relevant protection zone is located:

G17
• Plane G17 (X, Y; infeed direction Z)

G18
• Plane G18 (Z, X; infeed direction Y)

G19
• Plane G19 (Y,Z; infeed direction X)

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

5-182 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 5 5
01/2008 Parameters operating area
5.8 Work offset

5.8 Work offset

5.8.1 Function

Machine/ The actual values are referred to the machine zero after reference
tool zero point approach. The machining program of the workpiece refers to the
workpiece zero.
The machine zero and workpiece zero are not necessarily identical.
Depending on the type of workpiece and the way it is clamped, the
distance between the machine zero and workpiece zero can vary. In
part program processing this is compensated for by the work offset.

Work offset on a milling

machine
Z

R=F
ZMR

P
ZMW

W WR
M
X
XMR

XMW

P Tool setting point

W Workpiece zero
F Slide reference point
XMR, ZMR Reference point coordinates
XMW, ZMW Work offset
M Machine zero
R Machine reference point
WR Workpiece reference point

Effective WO The work offset effective in an axis

$P_ACTFRAME=.. results from the sum of the following zero point
offsets:
Settable WO You can activate a settable zero point offset in the part program you
have called with G54 to G57 and other G functions or with
$P_IFRAME=..
Basic work offset (basic frame): displayed like a settable WO.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 5-183
 5 5
Parameters operating area 01/2008
5.8 Work offset

Programmable WO You can use the programmable zero point offset $P_PFRAME=.. to
program an additional zero point offset for geometry and special axes
in the part program you have called.
The values of the programmed work offsets are deleted with end of
program or reset.

External WO In addition to all the offsets which define the position of the workpiece
zero, an external work offset can be overlaid by means of the
handwheel (DRF offset) or from the PLC.

DRF offset Differential Resolver Function: NC function which generates an

incremental work offset in Automatic mode in conjunction with an
electronic handwheel.

Frame Frame is the conventional term for a geometrical expression that

describes an arithmetic rule, such as translation or rotation.
Frames are used to describe the position of a destination coordinate
system by specifying coordinates or angles starting from the current
workpiece coordinate system.

Possible frames
• Basic frame (basic offset)
• Settable frames (G54...G599)
• Programmable frames

References Programming Manual Work Preparation

Frame components Frame components

A frame can consist of the following arithmetic rules:
• Work offset, TRANS, ATRANS
• Rotation, ROT, AROT
• Scale, SCALE, ASCALE
• Mirroring, MIRROR, AMIRROR

In the part program, all work offsets can be deselected non-modally

with G53.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

5-184 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 5 5
01/2008 Parameters operating area
5.8 Work offset

5.8.2 Displaying work offsets

Function
In the overview, all existing settable work offsets are listed. The
number of possible work offsets is defined by a machine data.
The first settable work offsets G54 to G57 are permanently assigned
the identifiers $P_UIFR[1] to $P_UIFR[4].

Sequence of operations

Work Press the "Zero Offset" softkey.

offset The vertical softkey bar changes.

Select the "Overview" softkey and the following overview appears:

Overview

Select work offsets:

Axis +
• The display switches to the defined work offsets of the next axis.

Axis -
• The display switches to the defined work offsets of the previous
axis.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 5-185
 5 5
Parameters operating area 01/2008
5.8 Work offset

Rotation You can use these softkeys to change the display mode of the
Offsets
scal., mirr. currently displayed work offsets.
The following takes place:
• Either the absolute offsets (coarse and fine) with reference to the
coordinate axes
• or the individual values split into the components rotation, scaling
and mirroring.
You can select and, if necessary, edit the individual values of the work
offsets in both display modes.

Display other work offsets:

Basic All defined basic work offsets (global and channel-specific) are
WO displayed in a table.

Settable All defined settable work offsets are displayed in a table where they
WO can be edited if necessary (select and edit).

5.8.3 Changing settable work offset (G54 ...)

Function

$P_UIFR[] This identifier can be used to edit a settable work offset in the
program.

Coarse offset The value of the coarse offset is defined for the relevant axis.

Fine offset The data limits (absolute) are set for the fine work offset via the
machine data. The fine offset is displayed in the "Settable work offset"
screen.
The work offset is activated via MD.

Machine manufacturer The basic work offset is activated by MD.

Please follow the machine tool manufacturer's instructions!

Rotation The value of the rotation around the respective geometry axis (e.g. X,
Y, Z) can be entered.
Rotation can only be programmed around geometry axes.

Scale The scale factor can be defined for the respective axis.

Mirroring Mirroring of the relevant axis around the coordinate zero can be
activated and deactivated.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

5-186 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 5 5
01/2008 Parameters operating area
5.8 Work offset

Sequence of operations

Work Select softkey "Work Offset".

offset The vertical softkey bar changes.
Settable The "Settable work offsets" window opens.
WO

You can choose a work offset selectively from the overview of work
offsets. Use the cursor to select the corresponding fields and
overwrite the fields to be changed with new values.
Select a new value via the "Select" key (with mirroring).

The zero point offsets are saved, i.e. transferred to the NCK.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 5-187
 5 5
Parameters operating area 01/2008
5.8 Work offset

5.8.4 Activate work offset and basic frame immediately

Function
The machine data can be set to specify that the work offset and basic
frame can be activated immediately if the part program switches to the
"Reset" state. This also occurs if the part program was first switched
to JOG status.
If the channel is in the "Reset" state, active work offset and basic
frame are not activated until the part program is continued.

Additional information
When the function is used in the Reset state, the machine data must
be set such that the settable work offset or basic frame is not reset
when the program switches to Reset.
Machine manufacturer Please follow the machine tool manufacturer's instructions!

References Function Manual, Basic Functions; Axes, Coordinate Systems,

Frames (K2)
Danger
The offset is applied the next time the part program is started.

5.8.5 Global work offset/frame (basic WO)

Function

In addition to the settable, the programmable and the external work

offsets, it is possible to define up to 16 global work offsets/frames
(basic WO). This allows offsets, scales and mirrors to be defined
simultaneously for all channel and machine axes.
The global work offsets (NCU global frames) apply uniformly to all
channels. They can be read and written from all channels. The
activation is performed in the relevant channel.

Basic TO In addition, 16 channel-specific basic work offsets can be defined in

(total basic frame) each channel. The global and channel-specific frames are combined
to produce a total basic frame (basic WO).

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

5-188 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 5 5
01/2008 Parameters operating area
5.8 Work offset

Machine manufacturer Recommendation:

Use the 3rd basic offset onwards for your own applications. The 1st
and 2nd basic offsets are reserved for setting the actual value and the
external work offset.

With global frames there is no geometrical relationship between the

axes. It is therefore not possible to perform rotations or program
geometry axis identifiers.
The settable work offset and the basic work offset are represented in
one table. You can edit the values in this table. You can switch
between the values of the individual axes.

For all work offsets, you can display either the defined offsets (coarse
and fine) or the specified rotations, scales and mirrors for each value.

References Function Manual, Basic Functions; Axes, Coordinate Systems,

Frames (K2)

Sequence of operations

Work Select softkey "Work Offset".

offset The vertical softkey bar changes.

Basic All defined basic work offsets (global and channel-specific) are
WO displayed in a table.
The display mode can be changed by softkey (see above).
You can edit the values directly in the table.
Rotations are not possible with global frames, since no geometrical
relationship exists between the axes in this case.

Additional information
The work offset must be changed only when the NC program is
stopped. Changes are updated immediately. The work offset values in
the display are updated cyclically.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 5-189
 5 5
Parameters operating area 01/2008
5.9 Displaying system frames

5.9 Displaying system frames

If system frames are activated via MD, they can be displayed via the
“Parameter” operating area, Work offsets.

The following assignment is applicable:

$P_SETFR System frame for actual value setting, scratching

$P_EXTFR System frame for work offset external
$P_PARTFR System frame for TCARR and PAROT
$P_TOOLFR System frame for TOROT and TOFRAME
$P_WPFR System frame for workpiece reference points
$P_CYCFR System frame for cycles

Both the offset set via frames (coarse and fine) and the rotation and
mirroring defined there are displayed. Display is according to the
position in the frame chain.

The following figure shows an example screen layout:

Machine manufacturer Please follow the machine manufacturer's instructions!

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

5-190 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 5 5
01/2008 Parameters operating area
5.10 User data/user variables (GUD, PUD, LUD)

5.10 User data/user variables (GUD, PUD, LUD)

5.10.1 General information

Function
User data (UD) can be defined by means of a variety of variables:
• GUD - global variables which are valid in all programs.
• LUD - local variables which are valid only in the program or
subprogram in which they have been defined.
• PUD-Program-global user data.

The display of global user data (GUD) can be locked by means of the
keyswitch or a password.

5.10.2 Change/find user data/user variables

Sequence of operations

User Press the "User data" softkey.

data The "Global user data" window is displayed.
The vertical softkey bar changes.
You can toggle between windows
Global • “Global user data” (GUD)
user data

Channel- • "Channel-specific user data" and

specific UD

Program Local • “Program user data” or “Local user data”

user data user data

Program-global variables (PUD) and local variables (LUD) are

displayed.

You can scroll up and down in the list using the "Page" keys.
or
Changing user data
Position the cursor on the user data that you wish to edit and enter a
new value or
Select a new value using the "Select" key.
New values are automatically accepted.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 5-191
 5 5
Parameters operating area 01/2008
5.10 User data/user variables (GUD, PUD, LUD)

Searching for user data

Press the "GUD +" and "GUD - " softkeys to scroll through user data
GUD + GUD -
from GUD 1 to GUD 9.

The "Select global user data" window is opened. The following values
GUD:
are permissible:
• 1 = SGUD (Siemens)
• 2 = MGUD (machine manufacturer)
• 3 = UGUD (machine user)
• 4 ... 9 = GD4… GD9 (additional, e.g., grinding cycles, etc.)
The selected data are displayed in the "Global user data" window.

Find
Press the "Find" softkey.
The "Find user data" dialog window appears on the screen.

The data name or a character string within the name can be entered
as the search target. The cursor must be positioned on the user data
to be found.
Find The next user data with the initial identifier searched for is displayed.
next

User data of types AXIS and FRAME are not displayed.

Only those local user data that still exist in the execution chain of the
control are displayed.

The list of local user data for the display is updated on every "Cycle
Stop," but the values are updated continuously.
Before global user data definitions can be made operative in the
control, it may be necessary to set machine data.

Additional information
How to define and activate user data is described in
Section 6: Program operating Area.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

5-192 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 6 6
01/2008 Program operating area

Program operating area

6.1 Program types......................................................................................................... 6-194

6.1.1 Part program ........................................................................................................... 6-194
6.1.2 Subprogram ............................................................................................................ 6-194
6.1.3 Workpiece ............................................................................................................... 6-194
6.1.4 Cycles ..................................................................................................................... 6-194
6.1.5 Storing programs..................................................................................................... 6-194

6.2 Program main screen.............................................................................................. 6-195

6.3 Editing programs ..................................................................................................... 6-197

6.3.1 Text editor ............................................................................................................... 6-197
6.3.2 Selective Program Protection: RO .......................................................................... 6-198
6.3.3 Hidden program lines: Display HD.......................................................................... 6-199
6.3.4 Reserved character string....................................................................................... 6-199
6.3.5 Define and activate user data (GUD, LUD) ............................................................ 6-200

6.4 Free contour programming ..................................................................................... 6-202

6.4.1 General information ................................................................................................ 6-202
6.4.2 Graphical illustration of the contour ........................................................................ 6-203
6.4.3 Creating a contour .................................................................................................. 6-204
6.4.4 Changing a contour................................................................................................. 6-207
6.4.5 Contour elements: General..................................................................................... 6-208
6.4.6 Create, change, delete contour elements............................................................... 6-209
6.4.7 Help......................................................................................................................... 6-213
6.4.8 Parameter description of straight line, circle and pole contour elements ............... 6-214
6.4.9 Programming examples for free contour programming .......................................... 6-216

6.5 Program simulation ................................................................................................. 6-219

6.5.1 Turning simulation................................................................................................... 6-219
6.5.2 Simulating milling before machining ....................................................................... 6-221
6.5.3 Simulating milling during machining........................................................................ 6-222

6.6 Managing programs ................................................................................................ 6-224

6.6.1 Overview ................................................................................................................. 6-224
6.6.2 File types, blocks and directories............................................................................ 6-225
6.6.3 Templates ............................................................................................................... 6-227
6.6.4 Calling a workpiece/part program ........................................................................... 6-228
6.6.5 Create workpiece directory ..................................................................................... 6-229
6.6.6 Creating a program/data in a workpiece directory .................................................. 6-230
6.6.7 Selecting a program for execution .......................................................................... 6-231
6.6.8 Enable workpiece/program ..................................................................................... 6-233
6.6.9 Copy file and paste ................................................................................................. 6-234
6.6.10 Renaming a file ....................................................................................................... 6-235
6.6.11 Deleting a file .......................................................................................................... 6-236

6.7 Memory info ............................................................................................................ 6-237

6.8 EXTCALL ................................................................................................................ 6-237

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 6-193
 6 6
Program operating area 01/2008
6.1 Program types

6.1 Program types

6.1.1 Part program

A part program consists of a sequence of instructions to the NCK

control. In its entirety, this sequence affects the production of a
specific workpiece or a particular machining process on a given blank.

6.1.2 Subprogram

A subprogram is a sequence of instructions in a part program which

can be called repeatedly with different defining parameters. Cycles
are a type of subprogram.

6.1.3 Workpiece

• A workpiece is a part to be produced/machined by the machine

tool.
• In the HMI, a workpiece is a directory in which programs and other
data for machining a particular workpiece are stored.

6.1.4 Cycles

Cycles are subprograms for the execution of a recurring machining

process on the workpiece.

6.1.5 Storing programs

Programs are saved in the NCK memory. The size of this memory is
dependent on settings made during start-up. (See Section 6 "Memory
info")

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

6-194 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 6 6
01/2008 Program operating area
6.2 Program main screen

6.2 Program main screen

The program’s main screen contains a complete overview of all
workpiece and program directories.

Press the “Etc.” key to open the following screen:

Press the “Etc.” key to open the following screen:

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 6-195
 6 6
Program operating area 01/2008
6.2 Program main screen

Horizontal softkeys
Work- This key displays an overview of all the workpieces you have
pieces created with their part programs.

Part An overview of all part programs (main programs) stored in the

program selected directory is displayed.

Sub- An overview of all subprograms stored in the selected directory is

routines displayed.
Subprograms are processed in the same way as described for
"Process main programs".

TEVISON- Local You can configure as many as eight connections (logical drives). Four
CF-CARD drive softkeys e.g. "TEVISON CF-CARD, "local drive", "WIN-XP computer",
WIN-XP appear on the first window level.
computer

You can access additional (up to four) configured drives via the ETC
key.

Standard You can use the "standard cycles" softkey to list the standard cycles.
cycles

User Select the "User cycles" softkey to display a list of the cycles that you
cycles have added.

Manufact. Select the "Manufacturer cycles" softkey to display a list of the cycles
cycles that the manufacturer has added.

Memory The total available/used memory is displayed.

info

You can access the following additional softkeys by pressing the ETC
key.

Definition You will receive a list of the definition files (e.g. GUD4_DEF)
files

Operating You will receive the operation data files (e.g. BD_TEA).
data

Machine manufacturer These softkeys can be disabled in display machine data.

Please note information supplied by machine tool manufacturer!

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

6-196 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 6 6
01/2008 Program operating area
6.3 Editing programs

Vertical softkeys
Creates a new file for a workpiece/part program.
New

The current file name including the directory is marked and copied to
Copy
the clipboard. If you delete the copied file from the clipboard, you will
not be able to paste it again.

Pastes a file copied to the clipboard into the current directory; the file
Paste
name must be altered and confirmed beforehand.

Delete
Deletes a file (workpiece/part program).

Rename
Overwrites the file name/type of a workpiece/part program.

Change Sets/resets the enable for a workpiece/part program.

enable The enable must be set (X) for a workpiece/part program to be
selected.

Workpiece Program Selects a workpiece/part program for execution in the currently active
selection selection channel.

Memory The current memory of the NCK main memory is displayed.

info
You can activate the definitions of a file with the “Activate” softkey.
Activate
Confirm or reject the activation with the “yes” or “no” softkeys.

6.3 Editing programs

6.3.1 Text editor

The ASCII editor provides you with the following functions:

– Switch between insert and overwrite mode.
– Mark, copy, delete block.
– Paste block.
– Position cursor/find/replace text.
– Create contour (programming support).
– Configure cycle parameters (drilling, milling, turning).
– Start simulation.
– Recompile (cycles, free contour programming).
– Renumber blocks.
– Change settings.

For a detailed description, please refer to:

Chapter 2, "General operating sequences".

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 6-197
 6 6
Program operating area 01/2008
6.3 Editing programs

6.3.2 Selective Program Protection: RO

Function

In programs written with program templates or when using the

programming support functions, certain machine-specific code lines
may be protected against changes.

A read-only identifier (";*RO*") is tagged onto the code blocks as a

comment. The ASCII editor recognizes these blocks, hides them or
displays them in the read-only text color (gray), and prevents changes
to these blocks.

The read-only identifier (";*RO*") shows you which part of the program
is protected.
Any attempt to change a program part protected by the read-only
identifier is denied with the message "Block cannot be written."

Additional information
When creating a program template, please make sure that the read-
only identifier appears immediately at the end of the block.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

6-198 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 6 6
01/2008 Program operating area
6.3 Editing programs

6.3.3 Hidden program lines: Display HD

Function

To display hidden, write-protected text (with the identifier;*HD) in the

editor, press the Etc key and the "Settings" softkey.
Settings

Machine manufacturer This function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Please note the information supplied by the machine tool
manufacturer!

6.3.4 Reserved character string

Function

Reserved character strings occur in part program code lines that arise
by calling cycles and contour programming. They can be viewed by
setting "Display hidden lines" in the editor.

The following character strings must not be used in part program lines
that are input directly:
;#
;#END
;NCG
;*RO*
;*HD*

Additional information

See Section: Selective Program Protection RO

Hidden program lines: display HD

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 6-199
 6 6
Program operating area 01/2008
6.3 Editing programs

6.3.5 Define and activate user data (GUD, LUD)

Function

Defining user data (GUD)

By editing a DEF/MAC file, you can alter or delete existing
definition/macro files or add new ones.

Definition In the "Program" operating area, select the "ETC key" and then
files "Definition files"; an overview of the files appears.

You can alter the definitions by selecting the "New," "Copy" and
New
"Delete" softkeys. These alterations are stored in the current file.
Copy

Delete

Rename
You can create a new definition file, e.g. from a backup file
(SGUD.BAK), by selecting the "Rename" softkey and changing the
extension.

Activating user data (GUD)

Change To activate an edited definition file, select the "Change enable"
enable softkey.

Activate definition file:

Position the cursor on the definition file and press the "Activate"
Activate
softkey.
The following message appears in the dialog line:
"Do you want to activate the definitions in this file?"
No "None" The modified data remains in the file.
The changes are not saved.
"Yes" The modified data is activated.
Yes Another question is displayed: “Should the previous
definition data be retained?”
"Yes" The screen form is closed, the definitions are
activated and the previous definition data
Yes
is retained.
"None" The screen form is closed, the definitions are
No not activated

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

6-200 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 6 6
01/2008 Program operating area
6.3 Editing programs

Error messages:
The following error messages appear in the dialog line:
"Error occurred during activation of file"

Output of NCK alarms:

Once the maximum number of files on the NCK has been reached, no
more backup files can be created. The following acknowledgeable
NCK alarms appear: “Too many part programs in the NC memory”
"NC memory full"

The same applies when activating macro files (.MAC).

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 6-201
 6 6
Program operating area 01/2008
6.4 Free contour programming

6.4 Free contour programming

6.4.1 General information

Function

The free contour programming is a support tool for the editor.

The contour programming function enables you to create simple and
complex contours.
An integrated contour calculator calculates any missing parameters
for you, provided that they can be computed from other parameters.
A contour comprises separate contour elements, whereby at least two
and up to 250 elements result in a defined contour. You can also
program undercut, radii, chamfer or tangential transitions between the
contour elements.
The programmed contours are transferred to the edited part program.
The following contour elements are available for the definition of a
contour:
• Straight vertical line

• Straight line (planar, longitudinal, inclined) horizontal

• Diagonal line

• Arc/circle

Additional information
1. The valid geometry axes in the first channel are determined and
used in the part program.
2. The contour elements of the contour chain are displayed by
Setting
contour symbols or text. The mode of representation can be set via the
"Setting contour" function in the editor.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

6-202 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 6 6
01/2008 Program operating area
6.4 Free contour programming

6.4.2 Graphical illustration of the contour

Function

The graphics window displays the progress of the contour chain as

you parameterize the contour elements.
The currently selected element is displayed in orange in the graphics
window.
The created contour element can be displayed in various line types
and colors depending on its status:
HMI-Embedded Description
Black Programmed contour
Orange Current contour element
Yellow Alternative element
Black continuous line Defined element
Dotted line Partially defined element
Dashed line Alternative element

The contour is displayed to the extent it can be interpreted by the

control on the basis of parameter inputs. If the contour is still not
displayed in the programming graphic, further values must be entered.
Check the contour elements you have already programmed, if
required. You may have forgotten to enter all of the known data.

The coordinate system scaling is automatically adapted to changes in

the complete contour.

The position of the coordinate system is displayed in the graphics

window.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 6-203
 6 6
Program operating area 01/2008
6.4 Free contour programming

6.4.3 Creating a contour

Function

For each contour that you want to cut, you must create a new contour.
The first step in creating a contour is to specify a starting point.
You have the option of beginning the contour with a transition element
to the blank. You can also enter any additional commands (up to 40
characters) in G code format for the start point.

If you want to create a contour that is similar to an existing contour,

you can copy the existing one, rename it and just alter selected
contour elements. However, if you want to use an identical contour at
another place in the program, you must not rename the copy.
Changes to the one contour will then automatically be applied to the
other contour with the same name.

Process

Work- Part To select an existing program via the "Workpiece" and "Part program"
pieces program softkeys or create a new part program with the "New" softkey.
Enter a name and confirm with "OK."
You are now back in the ASCII editor.
You can access the following softkeys by pressing the ETC key:

New Open the contour editor by pressing the “Support" and "New contour"
Support
Contour softkeys.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

6-204 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 6 6
01/2008 Program operating area
6.4 Free contour programming

Defining the start point The input screen for the start point of the contour appears.

When entering a contour, begin at a position which you already know

and enter it as the starting point. You can enter Cartesian or polar
coordinates.

To define the geometry axes, choose from the planes G17, G18 and
G19 with the Select Key in the field behind "Plane selection." The
coordinate system changes accordingly.
The default tool axis (defined in the machine data) can be changed for
machines with more than two axes. The associated starting point axes
are automatically adjusted.

Alter- Position the cursor on the "Transverse axis dimension" field and click
native on the field using the "Alternative" softkey (or with the "Selection" key)
repeatedly until the dimension you require is displayed.

The approach motion to the starting point can now be changed from
G0 (rapid traverse) to G1 (linear interpolation) via the new field
"Approach starting point".

You can define a specific feed rate for G1 via the "Free text input"
field,
e.g. G95 F0,3.

Accept Select the "Accept element" softkey to store the starting point.
element

Abort
With the “Abort” softkey, your settings are discarded and you arrive at
the previous screen form.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 6-205
 6 6
Program operating area 01/2008
6.4 Free contour programming

Cartesian start point Select the machining plane.

Enter the starting point for the contour.

Enter any additional commands in G code format, as required.

Accept Press the "Accept element" softkey.

element
Enter the individual contour elements (see Sec. "Creating contour
elements").

Polar start point Select the machining plane.

Press the "Pole" softkey.

Pole

Enter the starting point for the contour in polar coordinates.

Enter any additional commands in G code format, as required.

Accept Press the "Accept element" softkey.

element
Enter the individual contour elements (see Sec. "Creating contour
elements").

Close contour A contour always has to be closed.

If you do not wish to create all contour elements from starting point to
starting point, you can close the contour from the current position to
the starting point.

Close Press the "Close contour" softkey.

contour
A line from the current point to the start point is created.

Recompile contour

Recompile You can edit an existing contour by selecting the "Recompile" softkey.
The editor cursor must be positioned inside the contour to do this.

Notice
Upon recompilation only the contour elements that were created with
free contour programming are regenerated. In addition, only the texts
that were added using the "Free text input" input field are recompiled.
Any changes you made directly in the program text are lost. However,
you can subsequently insert and edit user-defined texts, which will not
be lost.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

6-206 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 6 6
01/2008 Program operating area
6.4 Free contour programming

Additional information
The NC code generated by the contour programming in the part
program must never be altered manually. Otherwise recompilation is
no longer possible.
Exception: Insertion of block numbers and masking blocks.

Saving a contour element If all contour elements and transition elements have been generated,
save the contour by pressing the “Accept” softkey
Accept

6.4.4 Changing a contour

You can change a previously created contour later.

Individual contour elements can be
• appended,

• modified,

• added

• deleted.

If your program contains two contours of the same name, changes to

the one contour are automatically applied to the second contour with
the same name.

Process

Modifying contour element Select the contour.

Press the "Cursor Right" key.

Position the cursor on the contour element that you want to modify.

Press the “INPUT” key

The associated input form is opened and an enlarged view of the

selected element appears in the programming graphics.

Accept After inputting the changes, press the "Accept element" softkey.
element

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 6-207
 6 6
Program operating area 01/2008
6.4 Free contour programming

6.4.5 Contour elements: General

Function

Contour chain The elements of the contour are displayed symbolically in the
sequence in which they were programmed in a contour chain next to
the graphic window.
Symbolic representation Contour Icon Description
element Abbreviation

Starting point SP Start point of contour

Straight line to Straight lines in

the left SL 90° grid

Right SR Straight lines in

90° grid

Left/right SLR Straight lines in

90° grid

Top SU Straight lines in

90° grid

bottom SD Straight lines in

90° grid

top/bottom SUD Straight lines in

90° grid

Straight line in SA Straight line with any

any direction pitch

Arc to Circle
the left CL

Right CR Circle

Contour END END End of contour

termination

Color of symbols The different color of the symbols indicates their status:
. Foreground Background Description
- Black Cursor on new element
White Black Cursor on current element
Black White Normal (undefined) element
White Black Element currently detached
(residual model)

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

6-208 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 6 6
01/2008 Program operating area
6.4 Free contour programming

6.4.6 Create, change, delete contour elements

When you have created a new contour and specified the start point,
you can define the individual elements that the contour comprises.
If you leave any parameter input fields blank, the control assumes that
you do not know the right values and attempts to calculate these from
the settings of the other parameters.

The contour is always machined in the programmed direction.

As soon as you have entered an element, the input focus is moved to
the contour chain on the left of the graphic display. The input focus
has a yellow border. You can navigate within the contour chain using
the cursor keys.

You can select an existing contour element with "INPUT". A new

contour element is inserted after the cursor when you select one of
the contour elements on the horizontal softkey menu; the input focus
is then switched to the parameter input on the right of the graphic
display. You can navigate around the contour chain again after
selecting "Accept element" or "Abort". The following contour elements
(example for turning: G18) are available for the definition of contours.

Entering a contour
element
Select a contour element via softkey.
... Enter all the data available from the workpiece drawing in the input
form (e.g. length of straight line, target position, transition to next
element, angle of lead, etc.).

Accept Press the "Accept element" softkey to accept all values.

element
The contour element is added to the contour. Repeat the procedure
until the contour is complete.

Select contour element Position the cursor on the desired contour element in the contour
chain, and select using the "Input" key.
The parameters for the selected element will then be displayed. The
name of the element appears at the top of the parameterization
window.
Once the contour element can be displayed geometrically, it is
highlighted accordingly in the graphic display area, i.e. its color
changes from black to orange.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 6-209
 6 6
Program operating area 01/2008
6.4 Free contour programming

Append contour element Select the contour.

Press the "Cursor Right" key.

Place the cursor on the last element before the end of the contour.

Select the required contour element via softkey.

Enter the parameters in the input screen.

Accept Press the "Accept element" softkey.

element
The required contour element is appended to the contour.
Displaying additional If your drawing contains further data (dimensions) for a contour
parameters element, select the "All parameters" softkey to extend the range of
All input options for the element.
parameters
The "Alternative" softkey is displayed only in cases where the cursor
Alter- is positioned on an input field with several switchover settings.
native

Defining a pole If you wish to enter the contour elements Diagonal line and Circle/arc
in polar coordinates, you must first define a pole.

Press the "Continue" and "Pole" softkeys.

Continue Pole
Enter the coordinates of the pole.

Accept Press the "Accept element" softkey.

element
The pole is defined. You can now choose between "Cartesian" and
"Polar" in the input screen form for the Diagonal line and Circle/Arc
contour elements.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

6-210 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 6 6
01/2008 Program operating area
6.4 Free contour programming

Tangent to preceding When entering data for a contour element you can program the
element transition to the preceding element as a tangent.

Tangent to Press the "Tangent to prec. elem." softkey.

prec. Ele
The angle to the preceding element α2 is set to 0°. The "tangential"
selection appears in the parameter input field.

Select dialog Some parameter configurations can produce several different contour
characteristics. In such cases, you will be asked to select a dialog.

Select Press the "Select dialog" softkey to switch between the two different
dialog contour options.
The selected contour appears in the graphics window as a solid black
line and the alternative contour appears as a dashed green line.
Accept Press the "Accept dialog" softkey to accept the chosen alternative.
dialog

Changing dialog selection If you want to change an existing dialog selection, you must select the
contour element in which the dialog was originally chosen.
Open the input screen form for the contour element.

Change Press the "Change selection" softkey.

selection
The two selection options appear again.
Select Press the "Select dialog" softkey to switch between the two different
dialog contour options.
Accept Press the "Accept dialog" softkey.
dialog
The chosen alternative is accepted.

Transition element at A transition element can be used whenever there is a point of

contour end intersection between two neighboring elements; this can be calculated
from the input values.
You can choose among Radius R, a chamfer FS, and an undercut
(thread, thre. DIN, Form E, or Form F) as a transition element
between any two contour elements. The transition is always
appended to the end of a contour element. You select transition
elements in the parameter input screen for the relevant contour
element.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 6-211
 6 6
Program operating area 01/2008
6.4 Free contour programming

Place the cursor on the last contour element.

Press the "Right cursor" key.
The associated input screen form opens.
Enter a transition element.

Accept Press the "Accept element" softkey.

element

Abort
When you select "Abort", the contour element values are discarded
and you return to the basic display. The input focus switches back to
the contour chain.

Delete The values of the parameter are deleted.

value
Delete contour element Select the contour.

Press the "Right cursor" key.

The individual contour elements are listed.

Delete OK
Place the cursor on the contour element to be deleted.
element ... Press the "Delete element" softkey and confirm with "OK".

The contour element is deleted.

To save the contour, press the “Accept” softkey.

Accept

Save a contour element If you have entered the available data for a contour element or
selected the desired contour by means of softkey "Select dialog",
Accept select softkey "Accept element" to store the contour element and
element return to the main screen.
You can then program the next contour element.

Additional information
The NC code generated by the contour programming in the part
program must never be altered manually. Otherwise recompilation is
no longer possible.
Exception: Insertion of block numbers and masking blocks.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

6-212 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 6 6
01/2008 Program operating area
6.4 Free contour programming

Parameters These parameters have been calculated by the control and cannot be
on gray background altered.
When the programmable parameter input fields (white background)
are altered, the control calculates new data, which are then
immediately displayed in the input screen.

Input value With some contours, the control may already have calculated an input
is already calculated value from other settings.
Problems may then arise if the control-calculated value does not tally
with the workshop drawing. In this case, you must delete the settings
from which the control has automatically calculated the input value.
You can then enter the precise value from the workshop drawing.

Settings
The technology (turning/milling) and the position of the coordinate
system are read from the appropriate machine data. You can see the
selected configuration with "Settings".

6.4.7 Help

When you input parameters, you can call up a help screen using the
Info key which graphically represents the parameters you are
entering. The help screen that appears depends on the cursor
position in the parameter display.
The help screen is displayed on top of the parameter screen.

If you press the Info key again the help screen is closed and the
graphic display is activated once again. The help screens displayed
correspond to the selected coordinate system. The axis names are
derived from the current geometry axis names.
Help screens are displayed for the following entries:
• Starting point
• Straight vertical line
• Straight vertical line, angle entry field
• Straight horizontal line
• Straight horizontal line, angle entry field
• Straight line in any direction
• Straight line in any direction, angle entry field
• Circle
• Circle, angle entry field
• Radius/chamfer

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 6-213
 6 6
Program operating area 01/2008
6.4 Free contour programming

6.4.8 Parameter description of straight line, circle and pole contour elements

Parameter Contour element "Straight line" Unit

X absolute Absolute end position in X direction mm
X incremental Incremental end position in X direction mm
Y absolute Absolute end position in Y direction
Y incremental Incremental end position in Y direction
L Length of straight line mm
α1 Pitch angle with reference to X axis Degrees
α2 Angle to preceding element; tangential transition: α2=0 Degrees
FB Feedrate for contour element "Straight line" mm/rev
Transition to FS: Chamfer as transition element at contour start mm
contour start R: Radius as transition element at contour start mm
FS=0 or R=0: No transition element
Location of transition element relative to contour start point

Undercut size Undercut size acc. to DIN table (for forms E and F only):
Radius/depth, e.g.: E1.0x0.4 (undercut form E) or
F0.6x0.3 (undercut form F)
FRC Feedrate for transition element chamfer or radius mm/rev
CA Allowance for subsequent grinding mm
Grinding allowance to right of contour (viewed from starting point)
Grinding allowance to left of contour (viewed from starting point)

Additional Any additional command in G code format

command

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

6-214 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 6 6
01/2008 Program operating area
6.4 Free contour programming

Parameter Contour element "Circle" Unit

Direction of
rotation
Clockwise rotation

Counterclockwise rotation
X absolute Absolute end position in X direction mm
X incremental Incremental end position in X direction mm
Y absolute Absolute end position in Y direction
Y incremental Incremental end position in Y direction
Z Target position in the Z direction (abs. or inc.) mm
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
α1 Starting angle with reference to X axis Degrees
α2 Angle to preceding element; tangential transition: α2=0 Degrees
β1 End angle with reference to X axis Degrees
β2 Angle of aperture of circle Degrees
FB Feedrate for circle contour element mm/rev
R Radius of circle mm
I Position of circle center point in X direction (abs. or incr.) mm
K Position of circle center point in Z direction (abs. or inc.) mm
Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.
J Position of circle center point in Y direction (abs. or incr.) mm
Transition to Transition element to next contour is a chamfer (FS) mm
next element Transition element to next contour is a radius (R) mm
FS=0 or R=0 means no transition element
FRC Feedrate for transition element chamfer or radius mm/rev
CA Allowance for subsequent grinding mm
Grinding allowance to right of contour (viewed from starting point)
Grinding allowance to left of contour (viewed from starting point)

Additional Any additional command in G code format

command

Machine manufacturer The names of the identifiers (X or Y ...) are defined in the machine
data where they can also be changed.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 6-215
 6 6
Program operating area 01/2008
6.4 Free contour programming

6.4.9 Programming examples for free contour programming

Example 1 Starting point: X=5.67 abs., Y=0 abs., machining plane G17
The contour is programmed in a counter-clockwise direction.

Workpiece drawing of contour

X= - 137.257 abs.
43.972
Startpunkt
X=5.67 Y=0

125 °

Y R72

Element Softkey Parameter Comment

1 All parameters, α1=180 degrees Observe angles in help screen!

2 X=−43.972 inc, all parameters Definition of coordinates in X in "abs"

X=−137.257 abs. and in "inc"
α1=−125 degree Observe angles in help screen!
3 X=43.972 inc Definition of coordinates in X in "inc"
α1=−55 degree Observe angles in help screen!

4 X=5.67 abs

5 Clockwise direction of rotation,

R=72, X=5.67 abs.., Y=0 abs..,
Select dialog

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

6-216 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 6 6
01/2008 Program operating area
6.4 Free contour programming

Example 2 Starting point: X=0 abs., Y=0 abs., machining plane G17
The contour is programmed in the clockwise direction with dialog selection.
For this contour it is advisable to display all parameters via the "All
parameters" softkey.
Workpiece drawing of contour Startpunkt
X=0, Y=0

R25

Y R7.5 R5

30 °

Element Softkey Parameter Comment

1 Y=−104 abs.

2 Clockwise direction of rotation, R=79, I=0 abs.,

Select dialog, all parameters, β2=30 degrees

3 Clockwise direction of rotation, tangent to preced.

R=7.5, all parameters, β2=180 degrees

4 Counterclockwise direction of rotation, R=64, X=−6 abs.,

I=0 abs.,
Make dialog selection, make dialog selection
Transition to following element: R=5
5 All parameters, α1=90 degrees, Observe angles in help
Transition to following element: R=5 screen!

6 Clockwise direction of rotation, R=25, X=0 abs., Y=0

abs. I=0 abs., make dialog selection, make dialog
selection

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 6-217
 6 6
Program operating area 01/2008
6.4 Free contour programming

Example 3 Starting point: X=0 abs., Y=5.7 abs., machining plane G17
The contour is programmed in a clockwise direction.

Workpiece drawing of contour

60 °
S tartp u nkt

15.2
X =0 , Y =5 .7

4.65
4.65

14.8
Y

22 °

5 11.5

Element Softkey Parameter Comment

1 Counterclockwise direction of rotation, R=9.5, I=0 abs.,
make dialog selection,
Transition to following element: R=2
2 α1=−30 degree Observe angles in help
screen!

3 Clockwise direction of rotation, tangent to preced.

R=2, J=4.65 abs.

4 Counterclockwise direction of rotation, tangent to preced.

R=3.2, I=11.5 abs., J=0 abs., make dialog selection, make
dialog selection
5 Clockwise direction of rotation, tangent to preced.
R=2, J=−4.65 abs., make dialog selection

6 Tangent to preced. Observe angles in help

α1=−158 degrees, Y=−14.8 abs., α2=0 degrees screen!

7 All parameters, L=5, make dialog selection

8 Y=5.7 abs.

9 X=0 abs.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

6-218 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 6 6
01/2008 Program operating area
6.5 Program simulation

6.5 Program simulation

6.5.1 Turning simulation

Function

The "Simulation" function operates in conjunction with turning

technology.
With the "Simulation" function you can
• represent axis motions in graphic displays and
• trace the machining result on the screen as the workpiece is
actually machined.
By activating Simulation, you can execute a contour on the screen in
graphic form with or without machine axis motions (can be disabled by
the PLC).

Display elements The colors in the graphic display area signify the following:
• Red = Traversing path in the feed rate
• Green = Traversing path in rapid traverse
• Yellow = Cross-hair
Polymarker (cutting edge),
Workpiece symmetry axis

Cross-hair Using the cross-hair, you can

• select the zoom center point and
• set the measuring points (for viewport).

Tool cutting edge The position of the cutting edge corresponds to the definitions in the
"Tool compensation" menu under softkey "Tool".
The tool path in the program block you are currently editing is
simulated. The cutting edge is represented by a polymarker. The
starting point of the polymarker corresponds to the starting point of the
machine tool axes.

Coordinate system The alignment of axes (coordinate system) is defined in machine data.

Machine manufacturer Please see information supplied by machine tool manufacturer.

The display machine data are described in:

References Function Manual, Basic Functions; Axes, Coordinate System, Frames

(K1): Mode group, program operation mode

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 6-219
 6 6
Program operating area 01/2008
6.5 Program simulation

Sequence of operations

Simulation
Select a program, open it, and press the "Simulation" softkey.

The graphic simulation function is started when you press the "Cycle
Cycle Start Start" key on the machine control panel.

The following softkey functions are provided:

Auto This softkey automatically adjusts the display area to the displayed
zoom traversing motions.

To You return to the initial display (size of the viewport when you select
origin simulation). The viewport can be defined by the machine
manufacturer in the machine data.

Display Optimizes the window for simulation purposes.

all

Zoom The current contents of the screen are displayed in a larger or smaller
+ resolution when you press softkeys "ZOOM+" or "ZOOM-". Using the
Zoom cursor keys, you can move the cross-hair to the selected center point
-
of the window display.

Delete The current screen contents are deleted.

window

Cursor Cursor You can alter the increments of the cursor key movements with the
coarse or fine softkey "Cursor fine".
• Softkey is selected:
Cursor moves in "fine" increments.
• Softkey is not selected:
The cursor moves in "coarse" increments.

Softkey "Close" ends the simulation.

Close

Simulation is also aborted when you select a horizontal softkey.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

6-220 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 6 6
01/2008 Program operating area
6.5 Program simulation

6.5.2 Simulating milling before machining

Function

In automatic mode you can display your program graphically in the

"Program test" function before machining, without traversing the
machine axes.

Simulation graphic The simulation graphic shows a representation of a workpiece being

machined by a cylindrical tool. You can select different views via
softkey, e.g.

• Top view
• Representation in three planes
• 3D representation (volume model)

Status displays The status displays in the simulation graphic contain information
• about the actual axis coordinates and
• the block currently being processed.

Option This function is an option and is only available with a color display.
Milling simulation is only possible in the 1st channel.

Sequence of operations

Requirements • You select the program in automatic mode "Auto".

• In the Machine operating area under "Program control," the

functions "Dry run feedrate" and "Program testing" (the machine
is not moved while the program is run) are selected. If the "Dry
run feedrate" function is active, the programmed feedrate is
replaced by a defined dry run feedrate.

• Tool T0: Tool displayed in the graphics.

font.
• Tool not identical with T0: An associated tool cutting edge
must be selected.

Select a program of your choice and open it.

3D sim. Press the "3D sim" softkey.

The program is started.

Cycle Start You can follow program execution on the screen.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 6-221
 6 6
Program operating area 01/2008
6.5 Program simulation

6.5.3 Simulating milling during machining

Function

The current machining operation on the machine tool is simulated on

the monitor of the control at the same time.

Option This function is an option and is only available with a color display.
Milling simulation is only possible in the 1st channel.

Sequence of operations

Requirements See previous section

Press the area switchover key and

3D sim. the "3D sim" softkey.

The program is started.

Cycle Start You can follow program execution on the screen.

You can start simulation at any time during the machining operation.
Simulation is closed when you exit the graphic.

If you switch to another operating area, the current content of the

graphic simulation is deleted.

Blank definition via input

form
Details
Select softkeys "Details" and "Settings" to open the blank definition
Settings
window.
You can enter values for corner point 1 (front top left) and corner point
2 (back bottom left) of the blank (cube).
With the softkey "Alternative" you can display/hide the view of the
Alternative
blank. If the view of the blank is disabled, the traversing paths are
represented by broken-line graphics.

Define a blank via the NC As an alternative, you can define a blank in the NC program to be
program simulated.
Syntax:
WRTPR("<String>")

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

6-222 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 6 6
01/2008 Program operating area
6.5 Program simulation

The following statements can be used in the "String":

• Rectangle: BLOCK(p1x, p1y,p1z,p2x,p2y,p2z)
The positions correspond to the axis values of corner P1 (front
top left) and P2 (back bottom right) of the rectangular blank.
P1x = X value of corner P1
p1y = Y value of corner P1
p1z = Z value of corner P1
p2x = X value of corner P2
p2y = Y value of corner P2
p2z = Z value of corner P2
• Moving/rotating the graphic
FRAME(pv1,pv2,pv3,pd1,pd2,pd3)
pv1 = Moving the first axis
pv2 = Moving the second axis
pv3 = Moving the third axis
pd1 = Rotating around the first axis
pd2 = Rotating around the second axis
pd3 = Rotating around the third axis
• Switching off the graphic: END()
• Restoring the unmachined blank: CLEAN()
Example ...
; DEFINITION of the blank
N100 WRTPR("BLOCK(0,0,0,80,100,-30)")
N110 ...
...
;DELETING the blank
N1000 WRTPR("CLEAN()")
...
References For additional procedures, please refer to the following
documentation:
Operating Manual, Operating/Programming ShopMill

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 6-223
 6 6
Program operating area 01/2008
6.6 Managing programs

6.6 Managing programs

6.6.1 Overview

To allow you to handle files and programs flexibly, you can organize,
store and display them according to different criteria.
The data/programs are stored in the NCK memory by default.
Program management The programs and files can be managed in both the “Program” and
“Services” operating areas.
Name of directories Operating area
• Subprograms Programs and Services
• Part programs Programs and Services
• Workpieces Programs and Services
• Comments Services
• Definitions Services
• Standard cycles Programs and Services
• Manufacturer cycles Programs and Services
• User cycles Programs and Services
The following diagram shows an example of directory contents:
Program memory

Internal directory
_N_DEF_DIR _N_CST_DIR _N_CMA_DIR _N_CUS_DIR _N_SPF_DIR _N_MPF_DIR _N_WKS_DIR _N_NEXT_DIR
Name
Directory name on Definitions Standard cycles Manufact. cycles User cycles Subprograms Part programs Workpieces New directory
Interface
Internal file name _N_COM_DIR
_N_SMAC_DEF _N_L199_SPF _N_GLDB_SPF _N_MPF1_MPF
_N_MMAC_DEF _N_..._SPF _N_..._SPF _N_.MOV_MPF Comments
_N_UMAC_DEF _N_..._MPF
_N_SGUD_DEF _N_...
_N_MGUD_DEF
_N_UGUD_DEF
_N_GUD4_DEF
...
_N_GUD9_DEF
_N_SHAFT_WPD _N_MPF123_WPD ...
_N_POCKET1_SPF
_N_..._SPF
_N_SHAFT_MPF _N_MPF123_MPF
_N_PART2_MPF _N_L1_SPF
_N_PART1_SPF _N_..._...
_N_PART2_SPF
_N_SHAFT_INI
_N_SHAFT_SEA
_N_PART2_INI
_N_PART2_UFR
_N_PART2_COM
_N_SHAFT

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

6-224 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 6 6
01/2008 Program operating area
6.6 Managing programs

6.6.2 File types, blocks and directories

File types File types can be identified by the file name extension (e.g. .MPF).

name.MPF Main program

name.SPF Subprogram

name.TEA Machine data

name.SEA Setting data
name.TOA Tool offsets
name.UFR Zero offsets/frames
name.INI Initialization file
name.COM Comment
name.DEF Definition of global user data and
Macros
It is only possible to access the \COM.DIR directories and \DEF.DIR
definitions in the “Services” operating area

Block "Block" is the term given to any files required for creating and
processing programs.

Program block Program blocks contain the main and subprograms of the part
programs.

Data block Data unit of the NCK: Data modules contain data definitions for global
user data. These data can be initialized directly when they are
defined.

Initialization block Initialization blocks contain the default settings for data.
The initial block is an ".ini" file. It contains values for initializing, for
example, machine,
Setting, user, system data, etc.
Macro block Macro blocks are used to program one or more instructions with a
single new name. Macro definitions are stored in the following files in
directory Definitions:

_N_SMAC_DEF Siemens macro definitions

_N_MMAC_DEF Machine manufacturer macro definitions
_N_UMAC_DEF User macro definitions

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 6-225
 6 6
Program operating area 01/2008
6.6 Managing programs

Reserved definition The following macro definitions can be stored as standard:

names for macros _N_SMAC_DEF Macro definitions (Siemens)
_N_MMAC_DEF Macro definitions (machine manufacturer)
_N_UMAC_DEF Macro definitions (user)
_N_GUD1_DEF Definitions for global data (Siemens)
_N_GUD2_DEF Definitions for global data
(machine manufacturer)
_N_GUD3_DEF Definitions for global data (user)

Directory types In addition to files, some directories may also have extensions:
name.DIR General directory containing program and data
and blocks, workpiece
directories and other directories with
identifier DIR.
name.WPD Workpiece directories which contain
Program and data blocks that belong
to a workpiece. (It must not contain
another directory with the extension DIR or
WPD.)
name.CLP Clipboard directory: Files and directories of
any type may be stored in here.

Workpiece directory Workpiece directories (with extension .WPD) are set up in directory
WCS.DIR.
A workpiece directory contains all files required for machining a
workpiece.
These can be main programs, subprograms, any initialization
programs and comment files.
Example:
Creation of a workpiece directory SHAFT.WPD that contains the
following files:
SHAFT.MPF Main program
PART2.MPF Main program
PART1.SPF Subprogram
PART2.SPF Subprogram
SHAFT.INI General initialization program of data
for the workpiece
SHAFT.SEA Setting data initialization program
PART2.INI General initialization program of data
for program part 2
PART2.UFR Initialization program for frame data
for program part 2
SHAFT.COM Comment file

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

6-226 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 6 6
01/2008 Program operating area
6.6 Managing programs

6.6.3 Templates

Templates are objects that can be used for creating new workpieces,
part programs, subprograms, work offsets, etc., and can be edited
and customized to suit the task at hand.
Templates can be designed in different languages and named to allow
easy language-specific access to them. If you create a template with a
wildcard in the name, the current workpiece name will be inserted into
the name when the template is activated.
There is no difference between creating templates and creating
workpieces, part programs, subprograms, job lists, work offsets, etc.
You can use the administration functions and naming conventions to
enter objects you want to use as templates in the template directory.

Templates can be created from the Services operating area directly in

the required directories.
Existing templates are offered for selection when you create new
objects.

_TEMPL_
If this string is assigned as part of the template name, it is replaced by
the workpiece name when the template is activated. The template is
not copied if the name exceeds 24 characters after replacement.

_XX
If the template name terminates in _XX (XX stands for the language
code, e.g., _GR for German), only the objects are offered from the
template directory where the current language matches the language
code in the template name. Templates for different languages can
therefore be stored together in the template directory.
Language-specific templates are given priority over non-language-
specific templates with the same core name component. Therefore,
you can create a template which can be used for all languages for
which no language-specific variants are available.

Additional information
Language-specific templates are given priority over non-language-
specific templates with the same core name component. Therefore,
you can create a template which can be used for all languages for
which no language-specific variants are available.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 6-227
 6 6
Program operating area 01/2008
6.6 Managing programs

Sequence of operations

If the template already exists, it will be copied and renamed when you
select "New". All files in this directory are also copied into the new
directory.

Press the "New" softkey.

New
Specify a name, e.g. "AXIS".
The new "Axis" workpiece is thus created with the following files:
ACHSE.MPF
DATEN.INI
TEST.MPF

6.6.4 Calling a workpiece/part program

Selecting a workpiece/part program

The following subsection describes how you can select workpieces

and part programs in a directory. A selected file can then be called
and edited in the text editor.

Sequence of operations

Select workpiece/part program:

Work- • Workpieces
pieces

Part • Part programs

program

Sub- • Subprograms
routines
To access the cycle softkeys, press the ETC key.

Standard • Standard cycles

cycles

Manufact. • Manufacturer cycles

cycles

User • User cycles

cycles

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

6-228 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 6 6
01/2008 Program operating area
6.6 Managing programs

Position the cursor in the directory on the desired file.

For each file, the file name, file type, length, date of creation/last
change are displayed.

Call a part program:

Use the cursor to select a program in the program overview and press
the "INPUT" key.
The text editor is displayed with the file you have selected.

You can now edit the part program.

Open workpiece:
The workpiece directory is opened and the programs it contains
displayed on the screen.
You can create various types of files such as main programs, tool
offsets, etc., in the workpiece directory.

6.6.5 Create workpiece directory

Sequence of operations

Work- The current overview of all workpiece directories appears on the

pieces screen.

Position the cursor on the required directory and open it.

An overview listing the data and programs that have already been
created in the directory will be displayed. If no data is available, the
program overview will be blank.
For each file, the file name, file type, length, date of creation/last
change are displayed.

Press the "New" softkey. A dialog window will appear.

New
Enter the name of the new directory using the alphanumeric keyboard.
The file type is .WPD (workpiece directory).

OK
Confirm with the "OK" softkey. A new directory is set up in the
workpiece overview.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 6-229
 6 6
Program operating area 01/2008
6.6 Managing programs

6.6.6 Creating a program/data in a workpiece directory

This section explains how you can create a new file, e.g. for a part
program.

Sequence of operations

Work- The current overview of all workpiece directories appears on the

pieces screen.

Position the cursor on the required directory and open it.

An overview listing the data and programs that have already been
created in the directory will be displayed. If no data is available, the
program overview will be blank.
For each file, the file name, file type, length, date of creation/last
change are displayed.

Press the "New" softkey to display a dialog window in which you can
New
enter the new file name.
The workpiece/program names may be a maximum of 24 characters
in length. You can use any letters (except umlauts), digits or the
underscore symbol (_).
Any templates for the specified data type in the Templates directory
will be offered for selection.
The matching file type is automatically assigned in this case.

The following file types can be entered:

File type Description
.MPF Main Program File
.SPF Subprogram (subprogram file)
.TOA Tool offset (Tool Offset Active)
.INI Initializing data
.COM Comment file
.GUD User data (global)
.TEA NC machine data (testing data active)
.SEA Setting data active
(Setting Data Active)
.LUD User data (local)
.UFR Zero point offset (User Frame)
.EEC Spindle pitch/ sender error compensation.
.QEC Quadrant error compensation
.CEC Sag/angularity compensation

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

6-230 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 6 6
01/2008 Program operating area
6.6 Managing programs

Then press the "OK" softkey or the "Input" key.

OK
or

Create part programs in the part program/subprogram directory:

Part Sub- You can set up main programs and subprograms by opening
program or routines directories "Part programs" and "Subprograms".

Press the "New" softkey to display a dialog window in which you can
New
enter the new program name.
The matching file type is automatically assigned in this case.

6.6.7 Selecting a program for execution

Function
Workpieces and part programs must be selected for execution before
you press the Cycle Start key.

Sequence of operations

Select a program:
Part Use the cursor keys to select a program in the
program

program overview, e.g., part programs, and

then press the "Program Selection" softkey.

Program The program name is displayed in the "Program name" window at the
selection top right.
Select a workpiece:
A workpiece can be selected for machining in a channel.

Work- Use the cursor keys to select the workpiece

pieces

in the workpiece overview and then

Workpiece
selection

press the "Selection" softkey.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 6-231
 6 6
Program operating area 01/2008
6.6 Managing programs

If a main program of the same name exists in the workpiece directory,

it is automatically selected for execution. If you choose workpiece
SHAFT.WPD, then the main program SHAFT.MPF is automatically
selected.
If an .INI file of the same name exists, it is executed immediately
(i.e. it is loaded into the working memory of the NCK). Main programs
with other names must be selected explicitly.

If a control has several channels, programs can be selected for

processing and started from one part program for another channel.

Example:
The workpiece directory
/WCS.DIR/SHAFT.WPD
contains the files
SHAFT.SPF and SHAFT.MPF.

Selection
When you select workpiece directory SHAFT.WPD you implicitly select
program SHAFT.

Find path for program call If the call path is not explicitly specified in the part program when a
subprogram (or an initialization file) is called, the called program is
located according to the predefined search strategy.
Case 1:
When a subprogram is called by
name with specification of the file type ("identifier" or "extension"),
e.g. SHAFT.MPF,
the system searches through directories in the following order:
1. Current directory / name.type Workpiece/standard
directory MPF.DIR
2. /SPF.DIR / name.type Global subprograms
3. /CUS.DIR / name.type User cycles
4. /CMA.DIR / name.type Manufacturer cycles
5. /CST.DIR / name.type Standard cycles

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

6-232 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 6 6
01/2008 Program operating area
6.6 Managing programs

Case 2:
When a subprogram is called by
name without specifying the file type ("identifier" or "extension"),
e.g. SHAFT1,
the system searches through directories in the following order:
1. Current directory / name Workpiece/standard
directory MPF.DIR
2. Current directory / name.SPF
3. Current directory / name.MPF
4. /SPF.DIR / name.SPF Subprograms
5. /CUS.DIR / name.SPF User cycles
6. /CMA.DIR / name.SPF Manufacturer cycles
7. /CST.DIR / name.SPF Standard cycles

Once you have selected the workpiece, change back to the Machine,
Automatic operating area and press the "Cycle start" key to start
machining.
Cycle Start If you start machining in the Program operating area, you cannot track
the cycle on the screen.

Machine manufacturer Please note information supplied by machine tool manufacturer!

6.6.8 Enable workpiece/program

Function
The program overview indicates whether a workpiece or part program
is enabled.
This means that: It may be executed by the control (because it has
already been debugged) when you select softkeys "Select program"
and "Cycle Start".
When a new program is created, it can be enabled automatically. You
can select this in the editor settings.
Sequence of operations
To set the enable for a program or abort it, position the cursor on the
desired workpiece or part program in the program overview.

Change Press the "Change enable" softkey.

enable A cross indicating "Enable issued" appears behind the workpiece or
part program.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 6-233
 6 6
Program operating area 01/2008
6.6 Managing programs

(x) Enable issued (program can be executed)

( ) No enable issued (program must not be executed)

Additional information
• The system checks whether a program may be executed when the
program is called (after selection via operator input or from part
program). If you want it to be enabled, you must enable it
beforehand.

6.6.9 Copy file and paste

Function
This subsection explains how files can be copied.

Sequence of operations

Position the cursor on the file that you want to copy and press the
Copy softkey "Copy".
The file is marked as the source for copying.

OK
Press the "Insert" softkey, enter a new name and confirm with "OK".
Paste

The file types are automatically adjusted in the global part program
and the global subroutine directory.

Additional information
• Only files can be stored in a workpiece directory but not other
workpiece directories.
• If the target specified is incorrect an error message is output.
• If a workpiece directory is copied, all the files that it contains are
copied at the same time.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

6-234 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 6 6
01/2008 Program operating area
6.6 Managing programs

6.6.10 Renaming a file

Function
As regards files, you can alter their name as well as the associated
file type.

Sequence of operations

Position the cursor on the file you want to rename.

Rename
The "Rename" dialog window opens.

Enter the new name.

When you rename a workpiece, you can also change the file type with
the Toggle key.
File types are matched automatically in the part program and
subprogram directories.

There are two ways of renaming files:

• Renaming the workpiece directory
• Renaming a directory in the workpiece directory

Rename a workpiece directory:

When you rename a workpiece directory, all the workpiece files under
that directory that have the same name as the directory are renamed.
If a job list with the name of the directory exists, the instructions in that
job list are also renamed.
Comment lines remain unchanged.

Example:
Workpiece directory A.WPD is renamed B.WPD:
All files with the name A.XXX are renamed as B.XXX, i.e. the
extension is retained.

Rename a directory in the workpiece directory:

If you rename the files in the workpiece directory, all files with the
same name but a different extension are renamed.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 6-235
 6 6
Program operating area 01/2008
6.6 Managing programs

6.6.11 Deleting a file

Function
This section explains how you can delete workpieces or files.

Sequence of operations

Position the cursor on the workpiece or the file you want to delete.

Delete several files:

If you want to select several files, position the cursor on the first file,
press the "Select" key and then place the cursor on the last file.
The files you have selected are highlighted.

Delete
The prompt "Do you really want to delete the file?" appears.

OK
Confirm your input.

Additional information
• You can only delete programs that are not currently running.
• If you want to delete a workpiece directory, make sure that none
of the programs it contains is currently selected.
• If a workpiece directory is deleted, all the files that it contains are
deleted at the same time.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

6-236 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 6 6
01/2008 Program operating area
6.7 Memory info

6.7 Memory info

Function

You can call a display showing the total available NCK memory
space.

Sequence of operations

Memory Press the “Memory info" softkey to display a window section

info containing the current utilization:

NC memory KB
Directories Number of directories/files, Size of the
Files of which NC files and
• total possible directories
• already assigned
• still vacant

6.8 EXTCALL
EXTCALL can be used to reload a program from the HMI in
"Execution from external source" mode. This enables all programs
that can be accessed via the directory structure to be reloaded and
executed.

Limitations The following supplementary conditions must be taken into account

with EXTCALL calls:
• With EXTCALL, you can only call files with the MPF or SPF
extension.
• The files and paths must adhere to the following NCK
conventions: Max. 25 characters for the name, 3 characters for
the file extension.
• Set option for network drive and set option for memory
expansion on the CompactFlash Card (since otherwise the card
cannot be accessed).
• Only permissible for single-channel machines

Note
In a part program, there must be at least one other NC block between
two sequential EXTCALL calls, with a processing duration of at least
one second.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 6-237
 6 6
Program operating area 01/2008
6.8 EXTCALL

Important
Direct execution of a USB FlashDrive is not recommended, as no
protection is provided against failure or accidental removal of the USB
FlashDrive. Disconnecting it during tool machining will lead to
machining stopping immediately and, thus, to the workpiece being
damaged.

Search sequence If the EXTCALL command is used to call a geometry subroutine in a

technology program, the control searches for this subroutine in the
possible storage locations in a certain order. If the called program is
not found in a storage location, the next storage location is searched
in accordance with the search order.

The following sequence is followed and completed during a search

1. Search in the storage location specified via setting data item SD
SD42700 $SN_SC_EXT_PROG_PATH, if a path is specified.
2. Search in the HMI user memory of the CompactFlash Card.
Prior to searching, a test is performed to check whether a
targeted EXCALL call with an absolute path specification is
involved.

EXTCALL with use of The channel-specific setting date enables you to specify a storage
setting date location for the call via EXTCALL. If this is the case, the program
called with the EXTCALL command is searched for directly in the
storage location specified in the command. A file of the same name
must exist in the specified storage location for a program to be found.
If such a file does not exist, the search continues at the next storage
location.
Example:
SD42700 $SN_SC_EXT_PROG_PATH =
„/user/sinumerik/data/prog/kanal1“
...
EXTCALL "geoprog.spf“
A search is performed for the file “/user/sinumerik/data/prog/kanal1
geoprog.spf.

The setting data can be used to perform a targeted search for the
program.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

6-238 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 6 6
01/2008 Program operating area
6.8 EXTCALL

EXTCALL using the HMI The following requirements must be fulfilled:

user memory 1. The technology program is selected in the NCK main memory for
execution.
2. The channel-specific setting date has not been set with a
directory path or the search in the storage location specified with
the setting date was not successful.
3. The HMI user memory option is set. As a result, a “Local drive”
softkey is available in the "Program" and "Services" areas and
can be used to display and manage the content of the HMI user
memory.

The HMI user memory is subdivided into

• Part programs (mpf.dir),
• Subprograms (spf.dir) and
Workpieces (wks.dir) with the respective workpiece directories (.wpd)

Specification of program +
HMI user memory + Working directory + in EXTCALL command
"spf."
spf.dir
"mpf"
HMI user memory: Working directory: EXTCALL commands:
The path on the The directory in which EXTCALL “geoprog“ If you do not indicate a
CF card to the HMI the technology program is stored EXTCALL “geoprog.spf“ program extension, the
user memory (MPF:DIR, WKS.DIR / xxx.WPD). EXTCALL “wks.dir first attempt is with
(/user/sinumerik/data/prog) If the program is not found in the /xxx.wpd/geoprog.spf“ the extension .spf
working directory, the search is EXTCALL and then with .mpf
continued in the spf.dir. “spf.dir/geoprog.spf”
Last, the root directory of the EXTCALL
HMI user memory is searched. “mydir.dir/geoprog.spf”

Place the geometry program in the HMI user memory as a

subprogram in the /spf.dir directory. Use unique program names, i.e.,
assign different names for different geometry programs in the control.
Call the program from the technology program with the following
commands:

EXTCALL (“geoprog“), or
EXTCALL (“geoprog.spf“), or
EXTCALL (“_N_GEOPROG_SPF“).

The “geoprog.spf” program from the "/spf.dir" directory is executed in

the HMI user memory.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 6-239
 6 6
Program operating area 01/2008
6.8 EXTCALL

EXTCALL with targeted In addition to use of the search mechanism described above, you can
call also call a specific subroutine with the EXTCALL command by
indicating the storage location of the subroutine in the EXTCALL
command.

Examples:
• HMI user memory:

EXTCALL
(“/user/sinumerik/data/prog/spf.dir/myextsub.spf“)

The “myextsub.spf” program stored in the "/spf.dir" directory in the HMI

user memory is called.

EXTCALL
(“/user/sinumerik/data/prog/wpd.dir/mywpd.dir/myextsu
b.spf“)
The “myextsub.spf” program stored in the “mywpd.dir” workpiece in the
"/wks.dir" workpiece directory in the HMI user memory is called.

EXTCALL
(“/user/sinumerik/data/prog/mydir.dir/myextsub.spf“)
The “myextsub.spf” program stored in the "/mydir.dir" directory you
created in the HMI user memory (option!) is called.

• Network drive:

EXTCALL (“//MyServer/MyDir/myextsub.spf“)
The "myextsub.spf" program stored in the "MyDir" directory release by
the "MyServer" server.

Syntax: //Computer name/Release name/Program path

• USB drive to TCU:

EXTCALL (“//TCU://TCU_1:/X203/MyDir/myextsub.spf“)
The “myextsub.spf” program stored in the "/MyDir" directory on the
USB memory device that is connected to the TCU named TCU_1 at
interface X203 is called.
Syntax: //TCU name/Name of USB interface/program path
USB interface: X203 or 204

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

6-240 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 7 7
01/2008 Services operating area

Services operating area

7.1 Function .................................................................................................................. 7-242

7.2 Directory structure................................................................................................... 7-242

7.2.1 Directories ............................................................................................................... 7-242
7.2.2 Data selection ......................................................................................................... 7-243

7.3 Formats for saving and importing data ................................................................... 7-246

7.3.1 Punched tape format............................................................................................... 7-247
7.3.2 PC format binary format.......................................................................................... 7-250

7.4 Services main screen.............................................................................................. 7-251

7.4.1 Series machine startup ........................................................................................... 7-252
7.4.2 Output error/transmission log.................................................................................. 7-254
7.4.3 Read ISO programs in/out ...................................................................................... 7-255

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 7-241
 7 7
Services operating area 01/2008
7.1 Function

7.1 Function
Function
The "Services" Operating Area provides the following functions:
• Read programs and data in/out
• Manage data
• Series machine startup
• Error log

7.2 Directory structure

All programs and files are saved on the CompactFlash card in a fixed
directory structure.

7.2.1 Directories

The following directory contains special files:

Workpiece:
All files (tool programs, tool data) needed to machine a workpiece
can be stored in the "Workpieces" (.WPD) directory.
Like a part program, a workpiece can be selected in the NCK for
machining.

When a workpiece is selected for machining, an INI file (if

available) of the same name as the workpiece is loaded to the
NCK and the main part program with the same name as the
workpiece is automatically selected.
If there is no part program/MPF with the same name, an error
message is issued and the previously selected part program
remains active.
If an INI block of the same name (e.g. for the activation of tool
data), other initialization blocks can be executed.
Example:
SHAFT.WPD is selected
SHAFT.MPF is displayed as the selected program
SHAFT.INI is loaded and executed in the working
memory of the NCK

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

7-242 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 7 7
01/2008 Services operating area

7.2.2 Data selection

The following selection of file types can be read in or out from the
CompactFlash card, or a configured network connection:

File type Description

.MPF Part program (main program file)
.SPF Subprogram (subprogram file)
.TOA Tool offset (Tool Offset Active)
.UFR Zero point offset (User Frame)
.TEA NC machine data (testing data active)
.RPA R parameter with value assignment
(R Parameter Active)
.SEA Setting data active
(Setting Data Active)
.COM Comment file
.INI Initializing data
.GUD User data (global)
.LUD User data (local)
.WPD Workpiece directory
.SYF System files
.OPT Options
.BOT Booting files 611D
.DIR Folder
.DEF Definitions data
.CEC Sag/angularity
.QEC Quadrant error compensation
.EEC Measuring system error compensation

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 7-243
 7 7
Services operating area 01/2008

Keywords/directories The different files are made available for transmission under the
in the hierarchical following headings:
file structure • NCK active data
- all
- machine data
all
NC-specific
channel-specific
axis-specific
- setting data
all
NC-specific
channel-specific
axis-specific
- option data
all
NC-specific
channel-specific
axis-specific
- global user data
all
NC-specific
channel-specific
- tool and magazine data
all
tool data
magazine data
- protection zones
all
NC-specific
channel-specific
- R variables
all
channel 1/2
- zero point offset
all
channel 1/2
- sag/ angular compensation
- quadrant error compensation
all
axis 1 to axis 28
- SSFK/ measuring system error compensation
all
axis 1 to axis 28

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

7-244 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 7 7
01/2008 Services operating area

• Display machine data

• Workpieces
• Part programs
• Subroutines
• User cycles
• Manufacturer cycles
• Standard cycles
• Cycle storage
- Standard cycles
- Cutting cycles
- Iso cycles
- Measuring cycles
- Manufacturer cycles
- User cycles
• Comments
• Definitions
OEM
• System data
- ASUP1
- ASUP2
- IBN
- OSTORE1
- OSTORE2
- Version
• Protocol
- Log book
- Communication error log
- Machine configuration (in preparation)

If your control includes additional directories, these can be found in

the file tree.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 7-245
 7 7
Services operating area 01/2008
7.3 Formats for saving and importing data

7.3 Formats for saving and importing data

Path name The path name is automatically entered when files are saved
(archived). Files are stored on the CompactFlash Card and can also
be backed up there in various paths (user, oem).
The entire path in which the file was stored is specified in the first line
of a file:
;$PATH=/_N_WKS_DIR/_N_SHAFT_WPD
When the file is re-imported into the control, it is stored in this path.
If no path is specified, the files are read in to the currently active,
selected directory.

Example of file with path name:

%_N_SHAFT_MPF
;$PATH=/_N_WKS_DIR/_N_SHAFT_WPD
N10 G0 X... Z...
...
M2

Formats Files can be copied or backed up as archives in the following formats:

• IBN archive PC/binary format
• All others: punched tape/ASCII format

For a complete backup of all data in a directory, the identifier

COMPLETE is used for saving.
The complete backup of all data from all directories (INITIAL over all
areas) is saved in the INI file _N_INITIAL_INI.

Reading in data When you read in a file, the path entered when you saved the file is
used. The system tries to read the file into the directory from which it
was saved. If the path is missing, then files with file type SPF are
stored in /SPF.DIR, files with extension .INI in the active working
memory and all other files in /MPF.DIR. Files are immediately
effective after import.

Activating data Data can be activated/edited by loading files into the working memory.
The exact time of activation depends on the type of data activated in
the file.

For example, machine data can take effect (depending on type) either
1. Immediately or
2. on "RESET" or
3. on "Cycle-Start" or
4. on "Power ON" – when the control is switched on again.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

7-246 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 7 7
01/2008 Services operating area
7.3 Formats for saving and importing data

7.3.1 Punched tape format

1. Only files with characters that can be displayed, i.e. files created in
the text editor, can be saved. No binary data, however, can be
saved.
1. Files in punched tape format can be edited with the text editor.
2. Files can be set up externally in punched tape format provided that
they are formatted in compliance with the format specified below.
3. If a file is set up manually, it must begin with %<name>. "%" must
be typed in the first column of the first line. An archive in punched
tape format may contain several files, each of which must begin
with %<name>.

The structure of archive files in punched tape format is as follows:

<leader> ;can be included
%1st file name
;$PATH=1st path name ;can be included
1st Set NL ;contents of file 1
2nd block NL
... NL
last block NL

%2nd file name

;$PATH=2nd path name ;can be included
1st Set NL ;contents of file 2
... NL
last block NL
... ;contents of file n
last block NL
<trailer> ;can be included

<leader> Information of any type (characters with ANSI values < ANSI value 32
(blank)) which is not part of the useful data on the punched tape.
They might be positioned at the beginning of the tape so that it can be
inserted into the punched tape reader.

When the archive file is read, a check is made to determine whether it

was saved with a leader. If it was, then it is read in again with a
leader.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 7-247
 7 7
Services operating area 01/2008
7.3 Formats for saving and importing data

NL Character for block end/new line; ANSI value 10 (0x0A)

% Identifier positioned in front of a file name.

The identifier must be positioned in the first column of the relevant line
(at beginning of block).

File names 1. File names can contain the characters

0...9, A...Z, a...z or _ and must not exceed 24
characters in total.
2. File names must have a 3-character extension
(_xxx).
3. Data in punch tape format can be generated externally or
processed with an editor. The file name of a file stored internally
in the NCK memory starts with "_N_".
A file in punched tape format begins with %<name>, "%" must
appear in the first column of the first line.

Examples: %_N_SHAFT123_MPF = part program SHAFT123 or

%flange3_MPF = part program flange3

;$PATH= Path statement; Identifier in front of a path name.

The path statement must always be programmed as the next block
after the file name.
The ";" character in the path statement must be positioned in the first
column of the relevant line (at beginning of block).

Path names 1. Path names end with

_DIR (directory) or _WPD (workpiece).
2. Path names can contain the characters
0...9, A...Z, a...z or _.
3. Paths must be specified in full (beginning with "/"). The separator
for the directory hierarchy is "/".
4. A path name in punched tape format begins with ;$PATH=<path
name> in the first column of the program.
Path names in punched tape format start with
_N_ and end in _DIR (any directory) or _WPD (workpieces
directory).

Example: ;$PATH=/_N_WCS_DIR/_N_PIVOT_WPD
Workpiece directory PIVOT in directory Workpieces

The data listed after the file name/path name belong to the file with
the name specified after "%" in the directory specified after ";$PATH=".

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

7-248 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 7 7
01/2008 Services operating area
7.3 Formats for saving and importing data

<trailer> Any information (characters with ANSI values < ANSI value 32 (blank)
and not equal to ANSI value 10 (0x0A)) which is not part of the useful
tape data.

Search strategy when no If no path is entered in the punched tape format, the specified file
path is indicated name must be interpreted when the file is read into the control so that
the file can be stored in a suitable position in the file tree.

Files are stored in the file tree according to the following strategy:

File name Converted Interpreted Stored

in tape format internal file name internal path in directory
%*_INI _N_*_INI NC active data
/_N_NC_ACT_DIR
%_N_*_XXX _N_*_XXX /_N_XXX_DIR XXX /_N_NC_DIR
/_N_NC_ACT_DIR
%MPFn _N_MPFn_MPF /_N_MPF_DIR Part programs
%SPFn _N_SPFn_SPF /_N_SPF_DIR Subprograms
%Ln _N_SPFn_MPF /_N_SPF_DIR Subprograms
%* _N_*_MPF /_N_CLIP_DIR Clipboard
* = any file name
n = any program number (e.g. MPF123)

The search strategy is applied only if no path has been named. Paths
detected using the search strategy are otherwise overwritten by the
";$PATH=" statement.
Spaces in the name are ignored.

Examples 1. *.MPF files

• PC format:
Part program Directory: Part program
%MPF123 (/_N_MPF_DIR)
• Punched tape format:
Part program Directory: Part program
%_N_MPF_MPF ;$PATH=/_N_MPF_DIR

2. *.INI files
• PC format:
Part program Directory: NC active data
%COMPLETE_TEA_INI (/_N_NC_ACT_DIR)
• Punched tape format:
Part program Directory: NC-active data
%_N_COMPLETE_TEA_INI ;$PATH=/_N_NC_ACT_DIR

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 7-249
 7 7
Services operating area 01/2008
7.3 Formats for saving and importing data

3. Part programs with names that cannot be assigned

• PC format:
Part program Directory: Clipboard
%HUGO (/_N_CLIP_DIR)
• Punched tape format:
Part program Directory: Clipboard
%_N_HUGO_MPF ;$PATH=/_N_CLIP_DIR

7.3.2 PC format binary format

Files which contain characters that cannot be displayed/binary format

can only be saved in PC format.

• If you save files that have been backed up in PC format and

then edit them with a text editor, you will not be able to import
them again. The file cannot be edited because the checksum
will then no longer be correct.
• Start-up and update data must always be saved in PC format.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

7-250 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 7 7
01/2008 Services operating area
7.4 Services main screen

7.4 Services main screen

All transferable data/programs are displayed in the "Services" main
screen.

Horizontal softkeys

Programs All programs and files are displayed.

Data

TEVISON Local Configured "logical drives",

CF-CARD drive e.g. TEVISON CF CARD
WIN-XP
USB1 Local drive (CompactFlash card)
computer
WIN-XP computer (network connection)
USB1(USB connections to the TCU)
Another four drives (if configured) can be accessed with the ETC key
You obtain information about the data transmission which has taken
Log
place.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 7-251
 7 7
Services operating area 01/2008
7.4 Services main screen

For set option:

Compile Loadable compiler cycles (with the .elf extension) can be loaded
cycles with the "Compile cycles" softkey.
The loaded files can be displayed in the “Diagnostics” operating area.

Vertical softkeys
Create The selected programs or files are prepared for upload or download
archive by pressing the “Create archive” softkey.

7.4.1 Series machine startup

Function

With series start-up, you can archive the current software on your
machine and for example import it to other machines later.
You can select all NCK data, or just the drive or PLC data.
If you want to import data to other machines, you should not archive
the compensation data along with other data, because compensation
data is machine specific.
The drive data (contained in the NCK data) are saved in binary
format; i.e. you cannot change the drive data.

Notes
Loadable compile cycles cannot be backed up or read in using the
series machine startup archive.

Sequence of operations

Press the ETC key in the basic display.

Series Press the “Series IBN” softkey and select the data that you want to
IBN archive.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

7-252 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 7 7
01/2008 Services operating area
7.4 Services main screen

Create Press the "Create archive" softkey.

archive

OK
All configured drives will be offered to you in a window section for you
to make your selection. Choose the drive, e.g. local drive, and press
"OK".

OK
The system automatically sets up storage directory
"card/user/sinumerik/data/archive" and displays a list of the folders it
contains for you to choose. Use the arrow keys to choose a folder,
e.g. "NCK_Aktuell", the press "OK" again.

OK
You will then see the storage directory and the system will suggest a
default name for the archive, e.g. NC.ARC.
You can still change this name.
Press the "OK" softkey to start the archiving operation.

You can display information about the data transfer operation by

Log
pressing softkey "Log".

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 7-253
 7 7
Services operating area 01/2008
7.4 Services main screen

7.4.2 Output error/transmission log

Function
A log listing data that have been imported and exported can be output
in the Services operating area.
1. for files to be output
- the file name complete with pathname, and
- an error acknowledgment.

2. for files to be input

- the file names and the 1st line, which generally contains the
path name ;$PATH=..., and
- an error acknowledgment.

Transmission messages The following messages may appear during transmission:

"OK" Transmission has been terminated correctly.

"ERR EOF" File not complete in archive format

"User Abort" Transmission terminated with "Stop" key.

Archive: Not completely transmitted, last file not stored.
Punched tape: Completeness cannot be checked, last file stored.

"NC/PLC Err or xxyyzzzz" Error message from NC:

xxyy Error code and error class signaled by the NC
zzzz HMI Embedded internal error number
The NC cause of error is logged together with a short single-line text.

"Error DATA" Files are not in archive format. Please copy with Copy/Insert.
"Error File Name" The file name or path does not follow the naming conventions of the
NC, e.g. special characters in the name or no 3-character extension.

Sequence of operations

You can display information about the data transfer operation by

Log
pressing softkey "Log".

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

7-254 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 7 7
01/2008 Services operating area
7.4 Services main screen

7.4.3 Read ISO programs in/out

Function
ISO programs can be read in and out in punched tape format.
The output is only possible in punched card/ASCII format.

Additional information
FANUC 0 control system programs can be read in and out as ISO
programs.

The punched tape format for ISO programs (ISO punched tape
format) is not the same as Siemens HMI Embedded punched tape
format.

The first line of a punched tape in ISO format must have the following
format: %<Title>LF or %<Title>CRLF.
The title can be omitted and blanks can be skipped. The title may not
start with one of the following characters: 0...9, a...z, A...Z or
_.
No title is generated when a punched tape is generated in ISO format.

Siemens program headers are introduced by %<Name> and pathname

;PATH=<Pfad> in the next block.
ISO program headers are characterized by O<xxxx (Title)> O or :
:<xxxx (Title)> without pathname in the next block.
x stands for a number between 0 and 9. Between one and four digits
can be specified, leading zeros can be omitted.
During export, ISO program headers are only tagged with O<...>
and not with :<...>.

Retrieving The procedure for importing a punched tape in ISO format is the same
Create as the procedure used to import a regular punched tape archive in the
archive "Services" operating area with "Create archive". During the import, the
system detects automatically whether the archive to be imported is
stored in binary/PC, punched tape or ISO punched tape format.

Imported ISO programs are stored on the NCK as main programs.

You must set the read-in directory every time you import programs to
the “Services" area by selecting → "Import archive" → Select path →
"OK". If "Path from workpiece/archive" is selected, ISO programs are
stored in the selected directory (e.g. workpiece xxx) or in the default
NCK directory (MPF.DIR); DIN programs are stored in accordance
with their specified path.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 7-255
 7 7
Services operating area 01/2008
7.4 Services main screen

ISO punched tape with two ISO programs:

%
O1026(HYDRAULIC BLOCK)
N20 G00 G80 G90 G40 G17
N40(NC-SPOT DRILL)T01 M06
N50 G55 G43 Z20. H01 S1000 F100 M03
N55 X10. Y-8. M08 T02
(...)
N690 Y-43.
N700 G80 Z35.
N710 T00 M66
N715 G53 Y0. Z0.
N720 M30
:1127(ANGLE)
N10(2. SPEED RANGE)
N20 G00 G80 G90 G40 G17
N120(SPI-BO 11)T01 M06
N130 G55 G43 Z20. H01 S2300 F460 M03
(...)
N180 Y-72.
N190 G80 Z35.
N195 T00 M66
N200 G53 Y0. Z0.
N210 M30
%

This punched tape generates two programs when imported:

_N_1026_MPF and _N_1127_MPF; the title is retained after the
program number:
Program _N_1026_MPF:
(HYDRAULIC BLOCK)
N20 G00 G80 G90 G40 G17
N40(NC-SPOT DRILL)T01 M06
(...)
N710 T00 M66
N715 G53 Y0. Z0.
N720 M30
Program _N_1127_MPF:
(ANGLE)
N10(2. SPEED RANGE)
N20 G00 G80 G90 G40 G17
(...)
N200 G53 Y0. Z0.
N210 M30

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

7-256 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 7 7
01/2008 Services operating area
7.4 Services main screen

Readout The procedure for generating a punched tape in ISO format is the
same as the procedure used to generate a regular punched tape
Create archive in the "Services" operating area with "Create archive". The
archive current output format determines whether the archive is created in
binary/PC, punched tape or ISO punched tape format.
The output format can be modified in the "Services" operating area
with "Set".
A Select field offers the setting options
Punched Tape Format, Punched Tape Format/ISO or Binary Format
(PC format).

If both ISO programs and Siemens programs are selected for the
creation of an ISO punched tape archive, an ISO punched tape is
generated without an alarm or message output; the punched tape
contains Siemens program headers in addition to the ISO program
headers.
If a Siemens program is followed by an ISO program, an %<LF> or
%<CR><LF> is inserted in front of the ISO program header, depending
on the output format, because the character string O<four digits>
or:<four digits> cannot uniquely be assigned to a new program
in DIN-Code.
These "mixed" ISO punched tape archives can be read back in by
HMI Embedded; however, reading the archives in to other types of
control will result in premature termination due to the % character (%
character in ISO format indicates tape end).

%
%_N_TEST1_MPF
;$PATH=/_N_WKS_DIR/_N_TEST_WPD
N40 G01 X150 Y150 Z150 F6000
N50 G90 G0 X0 Y0 Z0 G53
; ...
N500 G02 z100 x50 k-50 i0
N510 z50 x100 k0 i50
M30 ;transition from Siemens prog. to Siemens prog.
%_N_TEST2_MPF
;$PATH=/_N_WKS_DIR/_N_TEST_WPD
N40 G01 X150 Y150 Z150 F6000

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 7-257
 7 7
Services operating area 01/2008
7.4 Services main screen

; ...
M30 ;transition from Siemens prog. to ISO prog.
%
O1127(ANGLE)
N10(2. SPEED RANGE)
N20 G00 G80 G90 G40 G17
(...)
N200 G53 Y0. Z0.
N210 M30
%
If both ISO programs and Siemens programs are selected for the
creation of a Siemens punched tape archive, a conventional punched
tape is generated which contains only Siemens program headers, i.e.
the ISO programs contain Siemens program headers.

%_N_TEST1_MPF
;$PATH=/_N_WKS_DIR/_N_TEST_WPD
N40 G01 X150 Y150 Z150 F6000
N50 G90 G0 X0 Y0 Z0 G53
; ...
N500 G02 z100 x50 k-50 i0
N510 z50 x100 k0 i50
M30 ;transition from Siemens prog. to Siemens prog.
%_N_TEST2_MPF
;$PATH=/_N_WKS_DIR/_N_TEST_WPD
N40 G01 X150 Y150 Z150 F6000
; ...
M30 ;transition from Siemens prog. to ISO prog.
%_N_1127_MPF
;$PATH=/_N_WKS_DIR/_N_TEST_WPD
(ANGLE)
N10(2. SPEED RANGE)
N20 G00 G80 G90 G40 G17
(...)
N200 G53 Y0. Z0.
N210 M30
The difference is irrelevant for archives in binary format.

Additional information
Binary files cannot be output in ISO punched tape format.
The display indicators differ in the use of ISO, particularly with regard
to the representation of H numbers.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

7-258 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 8 8
01/2008 Diagnostics operating area

Diagnostics operating area

8.1 Diagnostics main screen......................................................................................... 8-260

8.2 Displaying alarms and messages ........................................................................... 8-260

8.3 Service display ........................................................................................................ 8-262

8.3.1 Service axis............................................................................................................. 8-262
8.3.2 Service drive ........................................................................................................... 8-263
8.3.3 Safety Integrated service ........................................................................................ 8-264
8.3.4 Displaying system resources .................................................................................. 8-267
8.3.5 Alarm log ................................................................................................................. 8-268
8.3.6 Communication error log......................................................................................... 8-269
8.3.7 Traverse log ............................................................................................................ 8-269

8.4 Calling the version display ...................................................................................... 8-270

8.4.1 Displaying the version display for the cycles .......................................................... 8-271
8.4.2 Display version screen of loadable Compile cycles................................................ 8-273
8.4.3 Displaying the version display for the definitions .................................................... 8-274
8.4.4 Displaying the hardware version............................................................................. 8-274

8.5 PLC ......................................................................................................................... 8-275

8.5.1 General information ................................................................................................ 8-275
8.5.2 Change/delete operand value................................................................................. 8-276
8.5.3 Select/create operand form for PLC status............................................................. 8-278
8.5.4 Set time / date ......................................................................................................... 8-279

8.6 Activating remote diagnostics ................................................................................. 8-281

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 8-259
 8 8
Diagnostics operating area 01/2008
8.1 Diagnostics main screen

8.1 Diagnostics main screen

A display headed "Alarms" appears when you select the operating
area "Diagnosis".

Number The alarm number is output under "Number". The alarms are output in
chronological order.
Date The time at which the alarm occurred is displayed with date, hour,
minute, second, 100's second.
Clearing criterion The symbol denoting the alarm abort key is displayed for every alarm.
Text The alarm text is displayed under "Text".

Horizontal softkeys
All active alarms are displayed in the "Alarms" display.
Alarms

An overview of active messages is displayed.

Messages

Service You can view updated information about axes and drives installed in
displays your system under the "Service displays" softkey.

PLC
Information on the current status of the PLC memory locations.

Remote If this option is set, it is possible to control and influence the operation
diagnosis of a control from a remote PC, as well as to transmit process data.

8.2 Displaying alarms and messages

Function

You can display a list of alarms and messages.

Sequence of operations

Alarms:
The alarm overview displays all active alarms with alarm numbers,
Alarms
date, clearance criteria and text.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

8-260 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 8 8
01/2008 Diagnostics operating area
8.2 Displaying alarms and messages

Clear the alarm by pressing the key that is displayed as a symbol:

Switch device off and on again (main switch)
or NCK POWER ON

Press "Reset" key.

Reset

Press "Alarm Cancel" key.

Alarm is cleared with the "Cycle Start" key.

Cycle Start

Alarm is cleared with the "Recall" key (message box).

Display several alarms in succession:

By setting a machine datum, you can display several alarms (NCK,
PLC, HMI) in succession in the alarm line. Each alarm remains visible
in the set tool life until it is displaced by the next alarm.

Messages:

The PLC operating messages that are not (correctly)

Messages
acknowledged must be displayed.

Acknowledgement symbols:
You can use a machine datum to set which acknowledgement symbol
is to be displayed for PLC alarms.
The following symbols are available:

PLC
or

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 8-261
 8 8
Diagnostics operating area 01/2008
8.3 Service display

Display several alarms in succession:

By setting a machine datum, you can display several alarms (NCK,
PLC, HMI) in succession in the alarm line. Each alarm remains visible
in the set tool life until it is displaced by the next alarm.

8.3 Service display

8.3.1 Service axis

Function
The information in the "Service Axis" display is used to
• check the setpoint branch (e.g., position setpoint, speed setpoint,
spindle speed setpoint prog.)
• check the actual-value branch (e.g. position actual value,
measuring system ½, actual speed value), optimize the position
control of the axis (e.g. following error, control difference, servo
gain factor)
• check the entire control loop of the axis (e.g. through position
setpoint/actual-value comparison and speed setpoint/actual-
value comparison)
• check hardware faults (e.g. encoder check: If the axis is moved
mechanically, the actual position value must change)
• set and check axis monitoring functions.
References Function Manual, Basic Functions; Diagnostics Tools (D1)

Sequence of operations

Service Select the menu "Service displays".

displays The horizontal softkey bars change.

Service The "Service axis" window displays information about the machine
axis
axis together with axis name and axis number.

You can page up and down with the "Page" keys or

or

with the direction keys.

The service values of the next (+) and the previous (-) axis are
Axis + Axis -
displayed.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

8-262 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 8 8
01/2008 Diagnostics operating area
8.3 Service display

8.3.2 Service drive

Function
The information contained in the "Drive service" display is used to
• check the status on enabling and control signals (e.g. pulse
enable, drive enable, motor selection, setpoint parameter set),
and on FDD/MSD operating modes (e.g. setup mode, parking
axis)
• display temperature warnings, check the current setpoint/actual-
value display (e.g. position actual-value measuring system 1/2,
speed setpoint, speed actual value)
• check the drive status
• displaying the current ramp-up phase
• display total error messages (Message ZK1), display the status
messages of the drive (e.g. threshold torque not reached, actual
speed = set speed)

References Function Manual, Basic Functions; Diagnostics Tools (D1)

Sequence of operations

Service Select the menu "Service displays".

displays The horizontal softkey bars change.

Service The "Drive service" window displays information about the axis drive
drive together with axis name and number.

You can page up and down with the "Page"

or

keys or the direction keys.

The service values of the next (+) and the previous (-) drive are
Drive + Drive -
displayed.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 8-263
 8 8
Diagnostics operating area 01/2008
8.3 Service display

8.3.3 Safety Integrated service

Function
Upon activation of the "Service SI" softkey, three information blocks
about SI-related data are displayed on the HMI Embedded for the
selected axis:
• Status SI (selected by default)
• SGE/SGA
• SPL
References Function Manual Safety Integrated

Status SI
Diagnosis Chan1 Jog MPF.DIR
SP25.MPF
Channel reset Aixs +
Program aborted

Axis -
Safty Integrated Status
Signal NCK Drive Unit
Safe acutal position 0.0000 0.0000 inch
Positional deviation NCK/drive 0.0000 - inch
Monitoring "Safe operational stop" active Yes No
Monitoring "Safe speed" active No No
Active safe speed level None None
Active safe speed correction factor None - %
Safe acutal speed limit Inactive - inch/min Status SI
Setpoint speed limit Inactive - inch/min
Current speed difference 0.0000 - inch/min
Maximum speed difference 0.0000 - inch/min
Active safe software limit switch None None SGF/SGA
Active gear ratio 1 1
Active stop A/B None
Currently requested external stop A A
SPL
Stop F code value (alarm 300911) Pulses A
Pulses enabled - -
Traversing disable because other axis is stopped No -

Service Service Service SI System Comm. Action Version

axis drive resources log log

Set the required axis via the vertical softkeys "Axis +" and "Axis –".
The active axis is displayed in the top right half of the table.
Available signals/values Safe actual position
Positional deviation NCK/drive
"Safe operational stop" monitoring active
"Safe speed" monitoring active
Active safe speed level
Active safe speed correction factor
Safe actual speed limit
Safe setpoint speed limit
Current speed difference
Maximum speed difference
Active safe software limit switch
Active gear ratio
Active stop
Currently requested external stop
Stop F code value (alarm 300911)
Pulses enabled
Traversing disable due to stop on other axis

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

8-264 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 8 8
01/2008 Diagnostics operating area
8.3 Service display

Sequence of operations

Service Select the menu "Service displays".

displays The horizontal softkey bars change.

Service The "Service SI" window displays information about Safety Integrated
SI data together with the associated axis name and axis number.

The service values of the next (+) and the previous (-) axis are
Axis +
displayed.
Axis -

Use this softkey to display the safety-relevant input and output signals
SGE/SGA
SGE and SGA.

Use this softkey to display the safe programmable logic signals SPL.
SPL

MPF.DIR
SGE/SGA Diagnosis Chan1 Jog SP25.MPF
Channel reset Axis +
Program aborted

Axis -
Safty Integrated SGE/SGA X1
SGE
Safe input signals NCK bit 0...15 0000 0000 0000 0000
Safe input signals drive bit 0...15 0000 0000 0000 0000
Safe input signals NCK bit 16...31 0000 0000 0000 0000
Safe input signals drive bit 16...31 0000 0000 0000 0000

SGA
Safe ouput signals NCK bit 0...15 0000 0000 0000 0000 Status SI
Safe ouput signals drive bit 0...15 0000 0000 0000 0000
Safe ouput signals NCK bit 16...31 0000 0000 0000 0000
Safe ouput signals drive bit 16...31 0000 0000 0000 0000 SGF/SGA

SPL

Service Service Service SI System Comm. Action Version

axis drive resources log log

The available signals can be seen in the above screen.

The Status SI vertical softkey takes you to the Status SI screen,
SPL opens the Safe Programmable Logic screen.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 8-265
 8 8
Diagnostics operating area 01/2008
8.3 Service display

MPF.DIR
SPL Diagnosis Chan1 Jog SP25.MPF
Channel reset
Program aborted

Safty Integrated SPL X1

Variable Bits Area Value
$A_INSE(P) 01...08 NCK 0000 0000 0000 0000
PLC 0000 0000 0000 0000
$A_OUTSE(P) 09...16 NCK 0000 0000 0000 0000
PLC 0000 0000 0000 0000
$A_INSI(P) 17...24 NCK 0000 0000 0000 0000
PLC 0000 0000 0000 0000 Status SI
$A_OUTSI(P) 25...32 NCK 0000 0000 0000 0000
PLC 0000 0000 0000 0000 SGF/SGA
Signal Value
Cross-checking fill level 0
Cross-checking status No errores occured
IS SPL
Cross-checking control word
SPL power up status 0000 0000 0000 0000
SPL powered up No

Service Service Service SI System Comm. Action Version

axis drive resources log log

In the "Variable" selection box, you can select:

$A_INSE(P) corresponds to simultaneous selection of
$A_INSE top row; NCK origin and
$A_INSEP bottom row; PLC origin
and effectively the same for the other variables:
$A_OUTSE(P)
$A_INSI(P)
$A_OUTSI (P)
$A_MARKERSI(P)

Under Bit you can request an 8-bit range from the selected signal.

Saving The variables that have been selected and the associated bit areas
are saved and are taken into account when subsequently selecting
the screen.
In addition to the current values, the origin of the displayed NCK/PLC
signals is displayed.

The settings are reset the next time the control is powered up.

Displayed signals KDV level (CDC Crosswise data comparison)

Cross-checking status
Cross-checking control word
SPL power up status
SPL powered up

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

8-266 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 8 8
01/2008 Diagnostics operating area
8.3 Service display

SPL power up status: Bit0: SPL interface parameters set

Bit1: SPL program file SAFE.SPL loaded
Bit2: NCK waiting for PLC power-up
Bit3: PLC power-up complete
Bit4: Interrupt needs to be assigned for SPL start
Bit5: Interrupt has been assigned for SPL start
Bit6: Interrupt processing for SPL start called
Bit7: Interrupt processing for SPL start terminated
Bit 9: NCK cross-checking has been started
Bit10: PLC cross-checking has been started
Bit11: Cyclic SPL checksum checking active
Bit12: All SPL protective mechanisms active

8.3.4 Displaying system resources

Function

You can display the system resources (utilization display) that are
currently being used for the individual NCU areas:

Net and gross runtimes of

• position controller,
• interpolator and
• preprocessing.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 8-267
 8 8
Diagnostics operating area 01/2008
8.3 Service display

Sequence of operations

Service Press the "Service displays" and the "System resources" softkeys.
displays The "NC utilization" screen is displayed.
System The following minimum/maximum total data for the servo, IPO cycle
resources
and preprocessing are displayed:
• Net runtime in ms
• Gross runtime in ms
• Level of the IPO buffer in percent
• Total capacity utilization in percent
Start The current values are constantly updated.
Permanent
The display update can be halted with the "Stop" softkey, the
Stop
displayed values are updated again with the "Start" softkey.
Start

8.3.5 Alarm log

Function
A log containing the alarms that have occurred so far is displayed.

Alarm The alarm overview displays all active alarms together with their date,
log time, alarm number, and description.

The error log file is principally used by the control manufacturer

(Siemens) as a diagnostic tool.

Save The log file can be read out with the “Save as..." softkey.
as...

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

8-268 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 8 8
01/2008 Diagnostics operating area
8.3 Service display

8.3.6 Communication error log

Function
Errors occurring in the communication between HMI Embedded and
NCK/PLC are recorded in a communication error log.

Comm. You can display this log by pressing the "Comm. Log." softkey.
log

The error log file is principally used by the control manufacturer

(Siemens) as a diagnostic tool for communication errors.

Save The communication error log file can be read out with the “Save as..."
as...
softkey.

8.3.7 Traverse log

Function
The log for individual operating sequences is shown.

Machine manufacturer Please note information supplied by machine tool manufacturer!

Sequence of operations

Traverse The log contains all the data that you set in the "IBN" operating area,
log together with the date, time, number and description.

Save The log file can be saved on the CompactFlash card via the “Save
as...
as..." softkey.

References A detailed description of the traverse log and the setting of the data to
be logged are contained in the following documentation:
Commissioning Manual, Commissioning HMI-Embedded;
Commissioning HMI-Embedded (IM2): Traverse Log".

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 8-269
 8 8
Diagnostics operating area 01/2008
8.4 Calling the version display

8.4 Calling the version display

Function
The version data of the installed system software are output in the
Version display.
In the event of a fault, the version data can be read out via the
configured (logical) drives and sent to the Hotline support staff.

Sequence of operations

When you open the "Version" window, you can access several
Version
different areas. You can use the horizontal softkeys to view the
version data.
NCU Version data for the NCU (system, version stamp, date, module code)
Version
is shown.
Details With the softkey, you receive additional information about the installed
software.

HMI Version data for the HMI Embedded (name, version, date, time,
Version
length).
Cycle Press the “Cycle versions” softkey to change the vertical softkey bar.
versions
You can select name, type, length and version of the following cycle
areas with additional softkeys:
- Package overview
- All cycles
- User cycles
- Manufacturer cycles
- Standard cycles
Definitions Version display or definitions (name, type, length, version)

Compile Only if option selected, version display for compile cycles.

cycles See Section: “Display compile cycles”

Hardware Version display for the installed hardware.

version
Use the "Page" keys to scroll up and down.

Save Data are saved and can be read out.

versions

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

8-270 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 8 8
01/2008 Diagnostics operating area
8.4 Calling the version display

8.4.1 Displaying the version display for the cycles

Function
The following version screens can be displayed and used to diagnose
the cycle states:
• Overview of the cycle packages available on the control.
• Details of the individual packages.
• An overview of all available cycles.
• Separate overview for user, manufacturer and standard cycles.

Sequence of operations

Cycle The cycle packages available on the NCK can be displayed in a

versions
separate "Cycle version data" overview by pressing the "Version data
Package cycles" horizontal softkey. The "Package overview" vertical softkey is
overview
included automatically.

Related cycles can be grouped together in packages and listed in a

package list. The complete package is assigned a package name and
a version identifier. The file type of the cycle package list is .cyp (cycle
package). Package lists are named cyc_xxx.cyp and the following
standard names are defined:

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 8-271
 8 8
Diagnostics operating area 01/2008
8.4 Calling the version display

Predefined package lists Package list Cycle package

cyc_sc.cyp Standard cycles
cyc_scs.cyp Cycle support (for standard cycles)
cyc_mc.cyp Measuring cycles
cyc_mcs.cyp Measuring cycle support
cyc_mj.cyp Measuring in JOG
cyc_sm.cyp ShopMill
cyc_st.cyp ShopTurn
cyc_mt.cyp ManualTurn
cyc_c950.cyp Extended stock removal
cyc_c73.cyp Pocket surfaces with islands
cyc_iso.cyp ISO compatibility for cycles
cyc_cma.cyp Manufacturer cycles (predefined name)
cyc_cus.cyp User cycles (predefined name)

Details
Select a package in the package overview and press the "Details"
vertical softkey. The following details for the selected package appear
in the "Version data" overview:
• Package name Name
• Package type Type
• Load status Loaded
• Package length Length
• Storage directory Directory (in data management)
• Date
• Version entry Version

All All available cycles of the types .com and .spf from the user cycle,
cycles manufacturer cycle, and standard cycle directories are displayed in
the "Version data" overview irrespective of the packages.
User List of user cycles (CUS.DIR),
cycles

Manufact. manufacturer cycles (CMA.DIR),

cycles

Standard standard cycles (CST.DIR).

cycles

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

8-272 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 8 8
01/2008 Diagnostics operating area
8.4 Calling the version display

8.4.2 Display version screen of loadable Compile cycles

Function
If compile cycles are available in the NCK, you can display them in a
separate version screen. Besides the current version (name,
extension, type, date, time, length) and the start address (path/CF
card), the access authorization for "reading, writing, enabling, listing
and deleting” are displayed.

Sequence of operations

Compile cycles are loaded when you initiate an NCU reset and can be
displayed.

Compile Press the "Compile cycles" softkey.

cycles

All loaded files of the type .elf are displayed in the "Version data
compile cycles" overview.

Details
If you press the "Details" softkey, you will receive more information.

Path :\card\....\Loadable compile cycles

Name :CCMCSC Date: Time
extension :ELF Length: Loaded:
Type :Loadable compile cycle
Information about access rights:
Read: Write: Enable: List: Delete:
Additional version information:
Version: MCSC Coupling axes Machine Time Date
Advance version of compile cycle (Preliminary)
Interface: 001.001@Interfaces=002.000 @TChain=001.000

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 8-273
 8 8
Diagnostics operating area 01/2008
8.4 Calling the version display

8.4.3 Displaying the version display for the definitions

Function
You can display the definition files available on the NCK in a separate
overview.

Sequence of operations

Definitions If you press the "Definitions" softkey, you will receive all the definition
files from the data management DEF.DIR directory.

8.4.4 Displaying the hardware version

Function
All the version data for all the hardware components on the machine
is shown in one overview.

Sequence of operations

Hardware If you press the "Hardware Version" softkey, you receive the version
version information for the individual components of the machine, e.g.
Mainboard, FPGA, BIOS, SINUMERIK PLC, CF Card

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

8-274 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 8 8
01/2008 Diagnostics operating area
8.5 PLC

8.5 PLC

8.5.1 General information

Function
The function is also available in the “Services” operating area.

You can obtain information about the current states of the following
memory locations of the PLC and change them if necessary:

Inputs: Input bit (Ex), input byte (EBx)

Input word (Ewx), input double word (Edx)
Outlets: Output bit (Ax), output byte (Abx)
Output word (Awx), output double word (Adx)
Bit memories: Memory bit (Mx), memory byte (MBx)
Memory word (MWx), memory double word (MDx)
Timers: Time (Tx)
Counters: Counter (Cx)
data: Data block (DBx), data bit (DBxx), data byte (DBBx),
data word (DBWx), data double word (DBDx)
Format: B = binary
H = hexadecimal
D = decimal
G = floating comma (for doublewords)
C = character (ASCII character)
Operand Example descriptive Writing Format Value Area
elements
Inputs Yes Yes 0-127
I 2.0 B 0
IB 2 B 0101 1010
H 5A
D 90
Outputs Yes Yes 0-127
Q20.1 B 1
QB 20 B 1101 0110
H D6
D 214
Bit Yes Yes 0-255
memory M 60.7 B 1
MB60 B 1101 0110
MW 60 H B8
D 180
C
Timers T20 Yes No 0-31
B
H
D

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 8-275
 8 8
Diagnostics operating area 01/2008
8.5 PLC

Operand Example descriptive Writing Format Value Area

elements
Counter C20 Yes Yes 0-31
instructions B
H
D
Data Yes Yes 0-255
block 0-255
Data byte
H A
DB3.DBB9 D 10
B 000 0000 0000 1010
C

A maximum of 10 operands can be displayed simultaneously.

Changes can only be made to the PLC operands with the appropriate
password.

Danger
Changes in the states of PLC memory locations have a major impact
on the machine. Incorrect configuration of the parameters can
endanger human life and cause damage to the machine.

8.5.2 Change/delete operand value

Function
The values of operands can be changed.

Sequence of operations

PLC PLC Press the "PLC" and "PLC status" softkeys.

status
The first operand screen form appears.
The vertical softkey bar changes.

Operand + Operand -
You can increase or decrease the address of the operand by 1 place
at a time.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

8-276 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 8 8
01/2008 Diagnostics operating area
8.5 PLC

Input help:
Input Instead of entering the operands and formats directly in the fields, you
aid
can also generate them by pressing the "Input aid" softkey and then
the softkeys which appear subsequently.
The following softkeys are available:
"DB" -> .DBX, DBB, DBW and DBD
"M Marker" -> B Byte, W Word, D Double-word
"I Input" -> B Byte, W Word, D Double-word
"Q Output" -> B Byte, W Word, D Double-word
"T Time" -> T
"C Counter" -> C
When the cursor is in the "Format" input field, the following vertical
softkeys are available:
B Binary, D Decimal, H Hexadec., F Float, C Character.

Delete
The entries for the selected operand (formats and values) are deleted
when you confirm the prompt "Do you really want to delete all entries"
with the "OK" softkey.
Press the "Recall" key if you do not want to delete them.

Change
Cyclic updating of the values is interrupted.

Abort
Cyclic updating is continued; the entered values are not transferred to
the PLC.

The entered values are transferred to the PLC. Cyclic updating is

Accept
continued.

Additional information

Press the "information key".

A description of the permissible input syntax for the PLC status
display is overlaid.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 8-277
 8 8
Diagnostics operating area 01/2008
8.5 PLC

8.5.3 Select/create operand form for PLC status

Function
You can save the operands entered in the "PLC status" window to a
file or read in a back-up list of operands.
The values in the PLC status are automatically discarded when the
system is restarted cold (after POWER ON).
As a way of optimizing the entry of operands and formats in the PLC
status, you can read in operand screen forms from DOS files (one file
for each screen form).
These screen forms are generated in a special syntax in ASCII
format.

Naming conventions for DOS files:

name.plc name is a screen form name of max. 8
characters
Content of the DOS file:
[\\Comment] e.g.//form for the PLC test
Operand/Format DB0.DBB0/B
[Operand/Format] DB1.DBW0/H
. .
. .
[Operand/Format] T100-D

You can enter as many comments and operand/format lines as you

wish. In accordance with the PLC status display only the first 10
operands/format lines are read in.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

8-278 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 8 8
01/2008 Diagnostics operating area
8.5 PLC

Sequence of operations

The function can also be selected in the “Services” operating area.

PLC
Press the "PLC" softkey.
The first operand screen form appears.
The vertical softkey bar changes.
without Press softkey "Read in operands" (via application diskette).
calculation

OK
Position the cursor on the operand form you wish to find and confirm
by pressing softkey "OK".
The screen form you selected is imported into the PLC status display.

8.5.4 Set time / date

Function

You can set the date and time on the PLC and synchronize the date
and time between the PLC and HMI Embedded.

Sequence of operations

PLC
Press the "PLC status” softkey.
The horizontal and vertical softkey bars change.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 8-279
 8 8
Diagnostics operating area 01/2008
8.5 PLC

Date/ When you press the "Date/Time" softkey, you open the window to
Time
enter the date and time.
Use the cursor key to move to the input fields of date
(day/month/year) and time (hour/min./second).

Enter the correct values in the fields and save these with the “Input”
key.

By pressing "Accept" the date and time of HMI Embedded are

Accept
transferred to the PLC.
The synchronization can be verified in the "Current time:" output field.

References Commissioning Manual, Commissioning Base software and HMI-

Embedded; Commissioning HMI-Embedded (IM2): Set date/time
The set values are retained when the control is rebooted.

Additional information
You can also manually enter the time period for synchronization of the
Sync.
manual HMI and PLC clock via softkey "Sync. manual".

You can activate cyclic (automatic) clock synchronization via the

Sync. "Sync. AUTO/ON" softkey and set the time duration for
AUTO/ON
synchronization there. Enter the correct values in the input fields.

Sync. Automatic synchronization is deactivated by pressing the "Sync.

AUTO/OFF
AUTO/OFF" softkey. The HMI and PLC then run separately again.
Machine manufacturer Please follow the instructions of the machine manufacturer.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

8-280 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 8 8
01/2008 Diagnostics operating area
8.6 Activating remote diagnostics

8.6 Activating remote diagnostics

The remote diagnostics function is an option.
If this option is set, it is possible to control and influence the operation
of an NCU from a remote PC, as well as to transmit data.

Remote When you select the "Remote diagnostics” softkey, the vertical “Start”
diagnosis and “End” softkeys appear. In this way you start or end the remote
diagnostics.

Instructions on configuring and operating remote diagnostics are

contained in the following documentation:
References Commissioning Manual, Commissioning Base software and HMI-
Embedded; Commissioning HMI-Embedded (IM2): Remote
diagnostics, RCS Host-Embedded/RCS View-Embedded
Machine manufacturer Please follow the instructions of the machine manufacturer.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 8-281
 8 8
Diagnostics operating area 01/2008
8.6 Activating remote diagnostics

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

8-282 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 9 9
01/2008 Commissioning operating area

Commissioning operating area

9.1 Commissioning main screen................................................................................... 9-284

9.2 Displaying machine data......................................................................................... 9-286

9.2.1 Display options: Display filters ................................................................................ 9-288

9.3 NC settings.............................................................................................................. 9-290

9.4 PLC ......................................................................................................................... 9-291

9.5 Changing the HMI user interface ............................................................................ 9-292

9.5.1 Color setting ............................................................................................................ 9-292
9.5.2 Language selection................................................................................................. 9-293
9.5.3 Traverse log ............................................................................................................ 9-294
9.5.4 Editor (HMI only) ..................................................................................................... 9-295

9.6 Setting up logical drives .......................................................................................... 9-296

9.7 Initiate NCK reset.................................................................................................... 9-296

9.8 Set, delete, change password................................................................................ 9-296

9.9 Display or modify system resources ....................................................................... 9-298

9.10 Licensing ................................................................................................................. 9-299

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 9-283
 9 9
Commissioning operating area 01/2008
9.1 Commissioning main screen

9.1 Commissioning main screen

Danger

Changes in the Commissioning operating area have a significant

influence on the machine. Incorrect configuration of the parameters
can endanger human life and cause damage to the machine.

Access to certain menus in the "Commissioning" operating area can

be protected by keylock switch or password.

This Chapter describes functions which the machine operator can

perform on the basis of his or her access rights.

For more detailed information on the subject of startup for

• System personnel
• Machine manufacturer
• Service personnel
• Machine users (machine setters)
Please refer to the following documentation:

References Commissioning Manual, HMI-Embedded; Commissioning HMI-

Embedded (IM2):
TCU Base software (IM7)
Equipment Manual NCU
Operator Component Manual
CNC Commissioning Manual: NCK, PLC, Drive

The "Machine configuration" window is displayed in the "Start-up"

basic display.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

9-284 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 9 9
01/2008 Commissioning operating area
9.1 Commissioning main screen

Horizontal softkeys
Machine Enables you to edit the machine data for all areas.
data

NC
Here you can look at the NC settings for NC power up and the NC
address, and change them if necessary.

HMI
Here you can enter the basic settings for the operator panel front (e.g.
color settings).

Logical You can select the configuration screens for the new network by
drives
activating the "Logical drives" softkey.
The "logical drives" can refer to either a network connection or an
internal drive, such as a CompactFlash Card, USB FlashDrive, etc.

Vertical softkeys

Change You can use two languages in parallel.

Language
When you select softkey "Change language", the screen text is
displayed in the other language.

If the language is not loaded, "?" is output. When you select softkey
"Change language" again, the text display reverts back to the other
language.

NCK Reset
You can press this softkey to initiate an NCK power ON/Reset for the
NCK and drive.

Set You can set a password.

password
Delete You can delete a password.
password
Change You can change your password.
password

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 9-285
 9 9
Commissioning operating area 01/2008
9.2 Displaying machine data

9.2 Displaying machine data

Access to the machine data operating area can be controlled by
keylock switch or password.

Function

Areas The machine data is divided into the following areas:

1. General machine data ($MN )
2. Channel-specific machine data ($MC )
3. Axis-specific machine data ($MA )
4. Drive-specific machine data ($MD)
5. Display machine data ($MM )

A separate list display is provided for each of these areas in which

you can view and edit machine data.

The following information about the machine data is displayed from

left to right:
• Machine data number
• Machine data name (without area identification $MN , $MC ,
$MA , $MD , $MM ), possibly with field index.
• Value of the machine data
• Unit of the machine data
• Activation

If the machine data does not use units, no units are displayed.
If data is not available, the "#" symbol is displayed instead of the
value.
If the value ends in an "H", it is a hexadecimal value.

The physical units of machine data are displayed on the right-hand

side of the input field.
Examples:
m/s**2 m/s2 (meter/second squared): Acceleration
rev/s**3 rev/s3 (revolution/second to the power of 3): Change
in rate of acceleration for rotating axis
kg/m**2 kgm2 (kilogram/meters squared): Moment of inertia:
mH mH (millihenry): Inductance
Nm Nm (Newton meters): Torque
us µs (microseconds): Time

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

9-286 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 9 9
01/2008 Commissioning operating area
9.2 Displaying machine data

µA µA (microamperes): Electric current

µVs µVs (microvolt-seconds): Magnetic flux
userdef User-defined: The units are defined by the user.

The right-hand column indicates when a machine data becomes

effective:
• so = immediately effective
• cf = when confirmed via the "Activate MD" softkey
• re = reset
• po = POWER ON (NCK Power On reset)

Sequence of operations

Machine Pressing the "machine data" soft-key changes the horizontal and
data vertical softkey bars.
You can select the machine data area you want by pressing the
following softkeys:

General • General machine data ($MN_),

MD

Channel- • Channel-specific machine data ($MC_),

spec. MD

Axis-
spec. MD • Axis-specific machine data ($MA_).

Drive In the "Drive configuration" menu you can find information about the
configuration
drive modules that were configured via the startup tool or change the
drive configuration.

Danger
Changes in the configuration data have a considerable influence on
the machine. Incorrect configuration of the parameters can endanger
human life and cause damage to the machine.

Drive Drive-specific machine data ($MD_)

MD

Display Operator panel front machine data ($MM_)

MD

VSA
Machine data for the feed drive,

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 9-287
 9 9
Commissioning operating area 01/2008
9.2 Displaying machine data

HSA
Machine data for the main spindle drive,

Vertical softkeys
Find
To find a specific machine datum, press the “Find…” softkey. Enter
the name or number of the machine data you are looking for and
press the “OK” softkey.

Find After pressing the “Find next” softkey, you move from one datum to
next the next in the machine data list.

9.2.1 Display options: Display filters

Function

The purpose of display filters is to selectively reduce the number of

displayed machine data. For this function, all machine data in areas
• General machine data
• Channel-specific machine data
• Axis-specific machine data
• Drive configurations
are assigned to specific groups (e.g. configuration data, etc.).
The following applies:
1. Each area has its own group organization.
2. Each group corresponds to one bit in the word filter (previously a
reserve)
3. Each area has a maximum of 13 groups (group 14 is reserved for
Expert mode (see below), bit 15 is reserved for add-ons).
Display machine data do not have any group organization.

Filter criteria
The following table shows the criteria for displaying machine data in
the order in which they are evaluated:

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

9-288 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 9 9
01/2008 Commissioning operating area
9.2 Displaying machine data

Criteria Check
1. Access authorizations If the level of access authorization is not sufficient, the MD is not displayed.
Otherwise criterion 2 is checked.
2. Display filter active The MD is always displayed when the filter is not active.
Otherwise criterion 3 is checked.
3. Expert mode The MD is not displayed if the expert mode bit is set
and expert mode is not selected.
Otherwise criterion 4 is checked.
4. Groups If at least one group bit is both set and selected in the display filter, criterion 6
is checked.
Otherwise criterion 5 is checked.
5. All others If none of the group bits is set and "All others" is selected in the display filter,
then criterion 6 is checked.
If none of the group bits is set and "All others" is not selected in the display
filter, then the MD is not displayed.
6. Index from to If the index check is selected and the index of an array is within
the chosen range, then the MD is displayed.
If the index check is selected and the index of an array is not within
the chosen range, then the MD is not displayed.

Initialization
When you open a machine data window, the filter setting that matches
the area is automatically updated.

Storing filter settings

Machine manufacturer Please see information supplied by machine tool manufacturer.

Sequence of operations

Machine Press the "Machine data" softkey.

data The horizontal and vertical softkey bars change.

Display Press the "Display options" softkey. A list of all the ranges that can be
options displayed/hidden appears.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 9-289
 9 9
Commissioning operating area 01/2008
9.3 NC settings

Vertical softkeys
Select Press the “Select all” softkey and all areas are selected.
all

Deselect Press the “Deselect all” softkey and no areas are selected.
all

To select individual areas, jump to the individual fields with the

direction key and choose these fields with the Select key.

OK
Press "OK" to save your selection.

Abort
"Abort" takes you back to the previous screen without saving.

9.3 NC settings
Function

NC
Here you can look at the NC settings for NC power up, view and
change the NC address if necessary, and power up again.
Setting a key position for the startup switch with appropriate access
rights.
IBN After pressing the "IBN switch" softkey, you can choose from the
switch following via the vertical softkeys:
Normal • Normal booting.
booting The following safety query will appear:
"Do you want to perform an NCK reset?"
Confirm with “Yes” or abort with “No”.

IBN • Start-up with default values (IBN mode):

mode The following safety query will appear:

"An NCK overall reset will delete all the data in the buffer memory
(SRAM) and load the default machine data.
Do you really want to perform an NCK overall reset?"

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

9-290 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 9 9
01/2008 Commissioning operating area
9.4 PLC

If you answer "Yes", the overall reset will start. If you answer no, the
operation will be aborted.

NCK- When you press this softkey, the NCK will begin a controlled
Shut-Down shutdown without a safety query.

9.4 PLC
Function
You can get information about the current statuses of the following
PLC memory locations, and change them if necessary:
• Set date/time
• Import operands

This function is also available in the “Diagnosis” operating area.

Changes can only be made to the PLC operands with the appropriate
password.

The procedure for setting the date/time and reading in PLC operands
is described in
Chapter 8, “Diagnostics operating area”, in the section titled “PLC”.
References Commissioning Manual, Base software and HMI-Embedded;
Commissioning HMI-Embedded (IM2): Setting the date/time

Danger
Changes in the states of PLC memory locations have a major impact
on the machine. Incorrect configuration of the parameters can
endanger human life and cause damage to the machine.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 9-291
 9 9
Commissioning operating area 01/2008
9.5 Changing the HMI user interface

9.5 Changing the HMI user interface

Function

You have the option of making the following settings for the HMI
Embedded user interface.

• Color settings on screen

• Specify language selection
• Activate traverse logging
• Open Editor

Sequence of operations

HMI
Pressing the "HMI" softkey changes the horizontal and vertical softkey
bars.
The following submenus are available via the horizontal softkeys:

9.5.1 Color setting

Function

You can customize your color settings for the HMI-Embedded user
interface.

Sequence of operations

Colors
If you press the "Colors" softkey, the "Color settings" menu appears:
"Standard" is preset in the "Color schema" window section.

Use the Select key to select the "Users" field.

You will now be presented with the individual HMI user interfaces (e.g.
background, window border, title text, CursorEditor etc.). When you
have selected an area, you will receive a color palette from which you
can select the colors you want using the direction keys and the
"INPUT” key.
You can change the various areas one after the other. When you
have made your settings for all the user interfaces,

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

9-292 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 9 9
01/2008 Commissioning operating area
9.5 Changing the HMI user interface

press "Save".
Save
To accept the settings, HMI-Embedded shuts down and restarts.

OK Return to the menu by pressing "OK".

Load Press the "Load default" softkey to return to the preset color scheme.
default
Last Press the "Last Version" softkey to restore the last color settings that
version
were saved.
References Commissioning Manual, HMI-Embedded; Commissioning HMI-
Embedded (IM2):

9.5.2 Language selection

Function

Language In general, you can use two languages at the same time during
selection
operation.
German, English, French, Italian, Spanish and Chinese are available
as standard.
Change To toggle between the two selected languages, press the "Change
Language
Language" softkey in the basic display.

To select the languages you want, proceed as follows:

Sequence of operations

Language default

If you press the "Languages" softkey you will receive a list in which
Languages
German, English, Spanish, French and Italian can each be selected
as the 1st or 2nd language.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 9-293
 9 9
Commissioning operating area 01/2008
9.5 Changing the HMI user interface

User the cursor key to select the two languages you want in the first
and second columns of the list.

Confirm your choice with the “Select” selection key.

Confirm with "OK".

OK

References Commissioning Manual, HMI-Embedded; Commissioning HMI-

Embedded (IM2): Installing/selecting language

9.5.3 Traverse log

Traverse When you press the softkey, a screen is opened for setting
log parameters and activating the action log. You can make and save the
following settings:
Switch the logging process ON/OFF:
If logging is switched on, you can display the following data:
Interrupts
Keys
Channel status/override
Windows IDs

OK
You can save the settings via the "OK" softkeys.

The log is output in the "Diagnosis" operating area.

References Commissioning Manual, Base software and HMI-Embedded;

Commissioning HMI-Embedded (IM2): Traverse log

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

9-294 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 9 9
01/2008 Commissioning operating area
9.5 Changing the HMI user interface

9.5.4 Editor (HMI only)

Editor The editor is used to create, update and modify programs and texts
(HMI only) (e.g. alarm texts).

The description of this function and the settings for the editor are
included in chapter 2: “General operating sequences”, in the section
titled “Editor”, and in the following document:

References Commissioning Manual, Base software and HMI-Embedded;

Commissioning HMI-Embedded (IM2): Functions, setting editor

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 9-295
 9 9
Commissioning operating area 01/2008
9.6 Setting up logical drives

9.6 Setting up logical drives

Function

On HMI-Embedded, the links and connections for CompactFlash

Card, network and USB connections can be used with logical drive
definitions.
Logical You can set up up to eight connections. With these defined softkeys,
drive
you can display directories and programs from various storage
locations.

These softkeys are available in the "Program", "Services" and

“Commissioning” operating areas, depending on the configuration of
your system.

The procedure used to set up the additional softkeys is described in:

References Commissioning Manual, Base software and HMI-Embedded;

Commissioning HMI-Embedded (IM2): Setting up network
connections

9.7 Initiate NCK reset

Function

NCK Reset
After pressing the “NCK Reset” softkey, the safety query "Do you
want to initiate an NCK reset?“ appears.
Press the “Yes“ softkey to restart the NCK and drives.
If you press the "No" softkey, you will return to the previous screen.

9.8 Set, delete, change password

Function
The control has a protection level system for enabling data areas.
There are access levels 0 to 7; where
• 0 is the highest and
• 7 is the lowest.
Protection levels
• 0 to 3 is controlled by means of passwords and
• 4 to 7 by means of keylock switch settings.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

9-296 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 9 9
01/2008 Commissioning operating area
9.8 Set, delete, change password

The operator only has access to information protected by one

particular level and the levels below it. The machine data is assigned
different protection levels by default.

Protection Locked by Area

level
0 Password Siemens
1 Password Machine manufacturer
2 Password Commissioning engineer,
service
3 Password end user
4 Key-operated switch setting 3 Programmer, machine setter
5 Key-operated switch setting 2 Qualified operator
6 Key-operated switch setting 1 Trained operator
7 Key-operated switch setting 0 Semi-skilled operator

Depending on the authorization level, it will be possible to edit data

such as cycles and machine data.
You can alter the set password using the “Password” function.
If one of the above passwords is set, the keylock switch position is
ignored.

Sequence of operations

Set You can set a password via the vertical softkeys,

password
Delete delete a password and
password
Change to change the selection.
password

Please refer to the following documentation for a more detailed

description:
References Commissioning Manual, Base software and HMI-Embedded;
Commissioning HMI-Embedded (IM2): Protection levels

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 9-297
 9 9
Commissioning operating area 01/2008
9.9 Display or modify system resources

9.9 Display or modify system resources

Function

You can display the system resources currently in use for the NC and
HMI Embedded areas (utilization display).

Sequence of operations

By selecting the Etc key, you can access the "NC memory" softkey
with the appropriate access level.

NC An overview of the current memory allocation appears when you

memory
press the softkey.

The "Memory overview" window shows the user memory,

• static user memory (SRAM) and
• dynamic user memory (DRAM)
with:
• Entire memory
• Used memory
• Free memory
displayed in bytes.

Additional information

SRAM DRAM Further softkeys are available for displaying more detailed information
or about the memory capacities.

In these individual windows, you can optimize the memory utilization

Details by changing the machine data directly.
References Commissioning Manual, Base software and HMI-Embedded;
Commissioning HMI-Embedded (IM2): Displaying and modifying
system resources

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

9-298 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 9 9
01/2008 Commissioning operating area
9.10 Licensing

9.10 Licensing
A suitable license is needed in order to use the options.
With the right level of access authorization, you can use the user
interface to set up any licenses you have acquired, as well as display
an overview of the options and their licenses.
Please refer to the following documentation for a more detailed
description of this subject.

References Commissioning Manual, Base software and HMI-Embedded;

Commissioning HMI-Embedded (IM2): Licensing
CNC Commissioning Manual: NCK, PLC, Drive

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 9-299
 9 9
Commissioning operating area 01/2008
9.10 Licensing

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

9-300 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
10 10
01/2008 Maintenance

Maintenance

10.1 Operating data ...................................................................................................... 10-302

10.2 Cleaning ................................................................................................................ 10-302

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 Edition 10-301
10 10
Maintenance 01/2008
10.1 Operating data

10.1 Operating data

Operating data Value
Air humidity, humidity class to DIN 40040 F
Atmospheric pressure 860 to 1080 hPa
Protection against physical contact I
protection class to DIN VDE 0160
Degree of protection according to DIN 40050
• Front of operator panel IP 54
• Back of operator panel IP 00
• Front of machine control panel IP 54
• Back of machine control panel IP 00

You can find a complete summary of operating data on the

appropriate supplementary sheets or in the documentation:

References /BH/, Operator Components Manual

10.2 Cleaning

Cleaning agents The front of the monitor and the surface of the operator panel front
can be cleaned. For dirt that is relatively easy to remove, standard
household washing-up liquid, or an industrial cleaner (such as
"Special Swipe") can be used. These cleaners will also remove dirt
containing graphite.

Cleansing agents which contain one or more of the following

ingredients can be used for a short period of time:
• Diluted mineral acids
• Bases
• Organic hydrocarbons
• Detergent solutions
Plastic material used The plastic material used on the front of the SINUMERIK 840D
is suitable for applications on machine tools.

It is resistant to:
1. Greases, oils, mineral oils
2. Bases and lyes
3. Detergent solutions and
4. Alcohol
Solvents such as chlorinate hydrocarbons, benzene, esters and
ethers should be avoided!

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

10-302 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 Edition
 A A
01/2008 Appendix

Appendix

A Abbreviations ..........................................................................................................A-304

B Terms ......................................................................................................................A-313

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 Edition A-303
 A A
Appendix 01/2008
A Abbreviations

A Abbreviations

µC Micro Controller

A Output

AS Automation system

ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange Amerikanische

Code-Norm für den Informationsaustausch

ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit: User switching circuit

ASUB Asynchronous subroutine

AuxF Auxiliary Function

AV Job planning

BA Mode

BB Ready

BCD Binary Coded Decimals: Decimal numbers encoded In binary code

BCS Basic Coordinate System

BIN BINary files

BIOS Basic Input Output System

BOT Boot files: Boot files for SIMODRIVE 611D

BP Basic program

C Bus Communication bus

CAD Computer-Aided Design

CAM Computer-Aided Manufacturing

CNC Computerized Numerical Control Computerized Numerical Control

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

A-304 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 Edition
 A A
01/2008 Appendix
A Abbreviations

COM Communication

COR Coordinate rotation

CP Communications Processor

CPU Central Processing Unit: Central processing unit

CR Carriage Return

CRC Cutter radius compensation

CRT Cathode Ray Tube picture tube

CSB Central Service Board: PLC module

CSF Function plan (PLC programming method)

CTS Clear To Send: Signal from serial data interfaces

CUTOM CUTter radius cOMpensation: Tool radius compensation

DAU Digital-to-Analog Converter

DB Data Block in the PLC

DBB Data Block Byte in the PLC

DBW Data Block Word in the PLC

DBX Data block bit in the PLC

DC Direct Control: Movement of the rotary axis via the shortest path to the
absolute position within one revolution

DCD Data Carrier Detect

DDE Dynamic Data Exchange

DIN Deutsche Industrie Norm (German Industry Standard)

DIO Data Input/Output: Data transfer display

DIR DIRectory: Folder

DLL Dynamic Link Library

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 Edition A-305
 A A
Appendix 01/2008
A Abbreviations

DOE Data transmission equipment

DOS Disk Operating System

DPM Dual-Port Memory

DPR Dual-Port RAM

DRAM Dynamic Random Access Memory

DRF Differential Resolver Function: Differential revolver function

(handwheel)

DRY DRY run: Dry run feedrate

DSB Decoding Single Block: Decoding single block

DTE Data Terminal Equipment

DW Data word

E Input

EIA code Special punched tape code, number of holes per character always
odd

ENC Encoder: Actual value encoder

EPROM Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory

Error Error from printer

FB Function block

FBS Slimline screen

FC Function Call: Function block in the PLC

FDB Product database

FDD Floppy Disk Drive

FDD Feed Drive

FEPROM Flash-EPROM: Read and write memory

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

A-306 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 Edition
 A A
01/2008 Appendix
A Abbreviations

FIFO First In First Out: Memory that works without address specification
and whose data are read in the same order in which they were stored.

FIPO Fine InterPOlator

FM Function Module

FPU Floating Point Unit Floating Point Unit

FRA Frame block

FRAME Data block (FRAME)

FST Feed Stop: Feed stop

GUD Global User Data : Global user data

Hardware Hardware

HD Hard Disk Hard disk

HEX HEXadecimal number

HHU Handheld unit

HMI Human Machine Interface

HMS High-resolution Measuring System

I/O Input/Output

I/R Infeed/Regenerative Feedback unit (power supply) on the

SIMODRIVE 611(D)

IBN Commissioning

ICA Interpolatory Compensation Interpolatory compensation

IF Drive module pulse enable

IK (GD) Implicit communication (global data)

IM Interface Module Interconnection module

IMR Interface Module Receive: Interconnection module for receiving data

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 Edition A-307
 A A
Appendix 01/2008
A Abbreviations

IMS Interface Module Send: Interconnection module for sending data

INC Increment : Increment

INI Initializing Data : Initializing data

IPO Interpolator

IS Interface signal

ISA Industry Standard Architecture

ISO International Standard Organization

ISO code Special punched tape code, number of holes per character always
even

JOG JOGging: Setup mode

K1 .. K4 Channel 1 to channel 4

Kv Servo gain factor

LAD Ladder diagram (PLC programming method)

LCD Liquid Crystal Display: Liquid crystal display

LEC Leadscrew error compensation

LEDs Light Emitting Diode : Diode

LF Line Feed – end of a block, produced by pressing the ENTER key.

LR Lageregler

LUD Local User Data

MB Megabyte

MC Measuring Circuit

MCP Machine control panel

MCS Machine Coordinate System

MD Machine data

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

A-308 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 Edition
 A A
01/2008 Appendix
A Abbreviations

MDA Manual Data Automatic: Manual input

MLFB Machine-readable product designation

MMC Man-Machine Communication: User interface on numerical control

systems for operator control, programming and simulation

Mode group Mode group

MPF Main Program File: NC part program (main program)

MPI Multi-Point Interface Multiport Interface

MS Microsoft (software manufacturer)

MSD Main Spindle Drive

NC Numerical Control: Numerische Steuerung

NCK Numerical Control Kernel: NC kernel with block preparation,

traversing range, etc.

NCU Numerical Control Unit: NCK hardware unit

NRK Name for the operating system of the NCK

NURBS Non-Uniform Rational B-Spline

OB Organization block in the PLC

OEM Original Equipment Manufacturer

OP Operator Panel

OP Operator Panel: Operating equipment

OPI Operator Panel Interface

OPI Operator Panel Interface: Interface for connection to the operator

panel

OPT Options: Options

OSI Open Systems Interconnection: Standard for computer

communications

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 Edition A-309
 A A
Appendix 01/2008
A Abbreviations

P bus Peripheral Bus

PC Personal Computer

PCIN Name of the SW for data exchange with the control

PCMCIA Personal Computer Memory Card International Association plug-in

memory normalization board

PG Programming device

PLC Programmable Logic Control: Programmable logic control

PLC Speicherprogrammierbare Steuerung

PMS Position measuring system

POS Positioning

RAM Random Access Memory: Program memory which can be read and
written into

REF REFerence point approach function

REPOS REPOSition function

RISC Reduced Instruction Set Computer: Type of processor with small

instruction set and ability to process instructions at high speed

ROV Rapid Override : Input correction

RPA R-Parameter Active: Memory area in

NCK for R-NCK for R parameter numbers

RPY Roll Pitch Yaw: Rotation type of a coordinate system

RS-232-C Serial interface (definition of the exchange lines between DTE and
DCE) of a computer

RTS Request To Send: RTS, control signal of serial data interfaces

SBL Single Block : Single Block

SCK Software Configuration Kit (tool supplied with screen-kit)

SD Setting Data

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

A-310 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 Edition
 A A
01/2008 Appendix
A Abbreviations

SDB System Data Block

SFB System Function Block

SFC System Function Call

SK Softkey

SKP SKiP: Skip block

SLS Setting Data Active: Identifier (file type) for setting data

SM Stepper Motor

SPF Sub Program File : Subprogram

SR Subprogram

SRAM Static RAM (non-volatile)

SRT Transformation ratio

SSI Serial Synchronous Interface: Synchronous serial interface

STL Statement list

SW Software

SYF SYstem Files System files

T Tool

TC Tool change

TEA Testing Data Active: Identifier for machine data

TLC Tool length compensation

TNRC Tool nose radius compensation

TO Tool Offset Tool offset

TO Tool offset

TOA Tool Offset Active: Identifier (file type) for tool offsets

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 Edition A-311
 A A
Appendix 01/2008
A Abbreviations

TRANSMIT TRANSform Milling Into Turning: Coordinate conversion on turning

machine for milling operations

TRC Tool Radius Compensation

UFR User Frame: Zero point shift

UI User interface

WCS Workpiece coordinate system

Window ID System-wide unique number of a window or a screen

WOP Workshop-oriented Programming

WPD Workpiece Directory: Workpiece directory

ZO Zero point shift

ZOA Zero Offset Active: Identifier (file type) for work offset data

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

A-312 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 Edition
 A A
01/2008 Appendix
B Terms

B Terms

Important terms are listed in alphabetical order. The "->" symbol

precedes terms, which are explained in a separate entry in this list.

A
A spline The Akima spline runs under a continuous tangent through the
programmed interpolation points (3rd order polynomial).

Absolute dimension A destination for an axis movement is defined by a dimension that

refers to the origin of the currently active coordinate system. See also
-> incremental dimension.

Acceleration with jerk In order to optimize the acceleration response of the machine whilst
limitation simultaneously protecting the mechanical components, it is possible
to switch over in the machining program between abrupt acceleration
and continuous (jerk-free) acceleration.

Access authorization The CNC program blocks and data are protected by a 7-level system
of access restrictions:
• Three password levels for system manufacturers, machine
manufacturers and users and
• Four keylock switch settings, which can be evaluated via the PLC.

Address An address is the identifier for a certain operand or operand range,

e.g., input, output, etc.

Alarms All alarms and -> messages are output on the operator panel in plain
text with the date and time and a symbol indicating the cancel
criterion. Alarms and messages are displayed separately.
1. Alarms and messages in the part program
Alarms and messages can be displayed directly from the part
program in plain text.
2. Alarms and messages from PLC
Alarms and messages relating to the machine can be displayed
directly from the PLC program in plain text. No additional function
block packages are required for this purpose.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 Edition A-313
 A A
Appendix 01/2008
B Terms

Analog input/output Analog input/output modules are signal transducers for analog
module process signals.
Analog input modules convert analog measured values into digital
values which can be processed in the CPU.
Analog output modules convert digital values into analog output
signals.

Approach machine fixed Approach motion towards one of the predefined -> fixed machine
point points.

Archive Reading out data and/or directories to an external memory device.

Asynchronous A parts program which can be started asynchronously to

subroutine (independently of) the current program status by an interrupt signal
(e.g. "rapid NC input" signal).

Automatic Operating mode of the control (block sequence operation according to

DIN): Operating Mode in NC systems in which a -> parts program is
selected and continuously executed.

Auxiliary functions Auxiliary functions can be used to transfer -> parameters to the ->
PLC in -> parts programs, where they trigger reactions which are
defined by the machine manufacturer.

Axes In accordance with their functional scope, the CNC axes are
subdivided into:
• Axes: interpolating path axes
• Auxiliary axes: non-interpolating feed and positioning axes with an
axis-specific feed rate. Auxiliary axes are not involved in the actual
machining, and include for example tool feeders and tool
magazines.

Axis address See -> axis identifier

Axis identifier Axes are labeled in accordance with DIN 66217 (for a clockwise
orthogonal -> coordinate system) with the letters X,Y, Z.
-> Rotary axes rotating around X, Y, Z are assigned the identifiers A,
B, C. Additional axes, which are parallel to those specified, can be
identified with other letters.

Axis name See -> axis identifier

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

A-314 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 Edition
 A A
01/2008 Appendix
B Terms

B
B spline With the B spline, the programmed positions are not interpolation
points, as they are just "control points" instead. The generated curve
only runs near to the control points, not directly through them (optional
1st, 2nd or 3rd order polynomials).

Backlash compensation Compensation of a mechanical machine backlash, e.g., backlash on

leadscrews. Backlash compensation can be entered separately for
each axis.

Backup Saving the memory contents to an external memory device.

Back-up battery The backup battery ensures that the -> user program is reliably
backed up in the -> CPU against mains failure and that fixed data
areas and markers, times and counters are kept in non-volatile
memory.

Backup memory The backup memory enables buffering of memory areas of the ->
CPU without a buffer battery. Buffering can be performed for a
configurable number of times, counters, markers and data bytes.
Basic axis Axis whose setpoint or actual value position forms the basis of the
calculation of a compensation value.

Basic coordinate system Cartesian coordinate system which is mapped by transformation onto
the machine coordinate system.
In the -> parts program, the programmer uses the axis names of the
basic coordinate system. The basic coordinate system exists in
parallel to the -> machine coordinate system when no ->
transformation is active. The difference between the systems relates
to the axis identifiers.

Baud rate Rate of data transfer (Bit/s).

Blank Workpiece as it is before the part is machined.

Block "Block" is the term given to any files required for creating and
processing programs.

Block A section of a -> parts program terminated with a line feed. A

distinction is made between -> main blocks and -> subblocks.

Block search The block search function allows any point in the part program to be
selected, at which machining must start or be continued. The function
is provided for the purpose of testing part programs or continuing
machining after a program abort.

Booting Loading the system program after power on.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 Edition A-315
 A A
Appendix 01/2008
B Terms

Bus connector A bus connector is an S7-300 accessory that is supplied with the ->
I/O modules. The bus connector expands the -> S7-300 bus from the -
> CPU or an I/O module to the neighboring I/O module.

C
C axis Axis around which the tool spindle describes a controlled rotational
and positioning movement.

C spline The C spline is the most well-known and widely used spline. The
transitions at the interpolation points are continuous, both tangentially
and in terms of curvature. 3rd order polynomials are used.

Channel A channel is characterized by being able to run independently of other

channels or a part program. A channel exclusively controls the axes
and spindles assigned to it. Parts programs run on various channels
can be coordinated by -> synchronization.

Channel structure The channel structure enables the -> programs of the individual
channels to be executed simultaneously and asynchronously.

Chassis ground Ground is taken as the total of all linked inactive parts of a device
which will not become live with a dangerous contact voltage even in
the event of a malfunction.

Circle interpolation The -> tool is required to travel in a circle between defined points on
the contour at a specified feedrate while machining the workpiece.

CNC -> NC

CNC programming The CNC programming language is based on DIN 66025 with high-
language level language expansions. The -> high-level CNC language and
programming allow, among other things, macros to be defined
(groupings of individual instructions).

COM Component of the NC control for the implementation and coordination

of communication.

Compensation axis Axis with a setpoint or actual value modified by the compensation
value

Compensation table Table containing interpolation points. It provides the compensation

values of the compensation axis for selected positions on the basic
axis.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

A-316 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 Edition
 A A
01/2008 Appendix
B Terms

Compensation value Difference between the axis position measured by the position sensor
and the desired, programmed axis position.

Connecting cables Connecting cables are pre-assembled or user-assembled 2-wire

cables with a connector at each end. These interconnecting cables
connect the -> CPU via the -> multipoint interface (MPI) with a ->
programming device or other CPUs.

Continuous-path mode The purpose of continuous-path mode is to prevent excessive

deceleration of the -> path axes at the part program block boundaries
(in terms of the control, machine and other properties of the operation
and the user) and to effect the transition to the next block at as
uniform a path speed as possible.

Contour Outline of a -> workpiece.

Contour monitoring The following error is monitored within a definable tolerance band as a
measure of contour accuracy. Overloading of the drive, for example,
may result in an unacceptably large following error. In such cases, an
alarm is output and the axes are stopped.

Coordinate system See -> machine coordinate system, -> workpiece coordinate system.

Cutter radius Contour programming assumes that the tool is pointed. Since this is
compensation not actually the case in practice, the curvature radius of the tool used
must be communicated to the control, which then takes it into
account. The curvature center is maintained equidistantly around the
contour offset by the radius of curvature.

Cycle Protected subroutine for executing a repeated machining operation on

the -> workpiece
An NC code generated via "Expand operator interface" or a geometry
process consists of several lines.

Cycle support The available cycles are listed in the "Cycle support" menu in the
"Program" operating area. Once the desired machining cycle has
been selected, the parameters required for assigning values are
displayed in plain text.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 Edition A-317
 A A
Appendix 01/2008
B Terms

D
Data block 1. Data unit of the -> PLC, which the -> HIGHSTEP programs can
access.
2. Data unit of the -> NC: Data modules contain data definitions for
global user data. These data can be initialized directly when they
are defined.

Data transfer program PCIN is an auxiliary program for transmitting and receiving CNC user
PCIN data, e.g., parts programs, tool offsets, etc., via the serial interface.
The PCIN program can run under MS-DOS on standard industrial
PCs.

Data word A data unit, two bytes in size, within a -> data block.

Diagnostics 1. Operating area of the control.

2. The control has both a self-diagnostics program as well as test
functions for servicing purposes: status, alarm and service
displays.

Digital input/output Digital modules are signal transducers for binary process signals.
module

Dimensions Position and pitch values can be programmed in inches in the

specification, metric and machining program. The control is set to a basic system regardless of
inches the programmable dimensional specification (G70/G71).

DRF Differential Resolver Function: NC function which generates an

incremental work offset in Automatic mode in conjunction with an
electronic handwheel.

Drift compensation When the CNC axes are in the constant motion phase, automatic drift
compensation is implemented in the analog speed control

Dynamic feedforward Inaccuracies in the contour caused by following errors can be almost
control entirely eliminated with the aid of dynamic, acceleration-dependent
feedforward control. The result is excellent machining precision even
at high tool path feedrates. The feedforward control can be
individually selected and deselected for each axis in the parts
program.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

A-318 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 Edition
 A A
01/2008 Appendix
B Terms

E
Editor The editor makes it possible to create, edit, extend, join, and import
programs/texts/program blocks.

Electronic handwheel Electronic handwheels can be used to traverse the selected axes
simultaneously in manual mode. The handwheel clicks are analyzed
by the increment analyzer.

Exact stop With a programmed exact stop instruction, the position stated in a
block is approached precisely and very slowly, if necessary. In order
to reduce the approach time, -> exact stop limits are defined for
rapid traverse and feed.

Exact stop limit When all path axes reach their exact stop limits, the control responds
as if it had reached its precise destination point. The -> part program
continues execution at the next block.

External zero offset Zero offset specified by the -> PLC.

F
Fast retraction from When an interrupt is received, it is possible to initiate a motion via the
contour CNC machining program, which allows the tool to be lifted quickly
from the workpiece contour currently being machined. The retraction
angle and the distance retracted can also be parameterized. An
interrupt routine can also be executed following the fast retraction.
(SINUMERIK 840D).

Feed override The current feedrate setting entered via the control panel or by the
PLC is overlaid on the programmed feedrate (0-200 %). The feedrate
can also be corrected by a programmable percentage factor (1-200
%)
in the machining program.

Finished-part contour Contour of the finished workpiece. See also -> Blank.

Fixed machine point A point defined uniquely by the machine tool, such as the reference
point.

Fixed-point approach Machine tools can approach fixed points such as a tool change point,
loading point, pallet change point, etc. in a defined way. The
coordinates of these points are stored in the control. Where possible,
the control moves these axes in -> rapid traverse.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 Edition A-319
 A A
Appendix 01/2008
B Terms

Frame A frame is an arithmetic rule that transforms one Cartesian coordinate

system into another Cartesian coordinate system. A frame contains
the components -> zero offset, -> rotation, -> scaling, -> mirroring.

G
General reset The following -> CPU memories are erased by a general reset
operation:
• the -> working memory
• the read/write area of the -> load memory
• the -> system memory
• the -> backup memory

Geometry Description of a -> workpiece in the -> workpiece coordinate system.

Geometry axis Geometry axes are used to describe a 2- or 3-dimensional range in

the workpiece coordinate system.

Global main Each global main program/subprogram may appear only once under
program/subprogram its name in the directory. It is not possible to use the same program
name in different directories with different contents as a global
program.

H
Helical interpolation The helical interpolation function is ideal for machining internal and
external threads using form milling cutters and for milling lubrication
grooves. The helix comprises two movements:
1. Circular movement in one plane
2. Linear movement perpendicular to this plane

High-level CNC language The high-level language offers: -> user variable, -> pre-defined user
variable, -> system variable, -> indirect programming, -> mathematical
and trigonometric functions, -> comparison operations and logic
operations, -> program jumps and program branching, -> program
coordination (SINUMERIK 840D), -> macro technology.

High-speed digital The digital inputs can be used for example to start fast CNC program
inputs/outputs routines (interrupt routines). High-speed, program-driven switching
functions can be initiated via the digital CNC outputs (SINUMERIK
840D).

HIGHSTEP Summary of the programming options for the -> PLC in the
AS300/AS400 system.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

A-320 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 Edition
 A A
01/2008 Appendix
B Terms

I
I/O module I/O modules represent the link between the CPU and the process. I/O
modules are:
• ->Digital input/output modules
• ->Analog input/output modules
• ->Simulator modules

Inch measuring system Measuring system, which defines distances in inches and fractions of
inches.

Inclined surface Drilling and milling operations on workpiece surfaces that do not lie in
machining the coordinate planes of the machine can be performed easily using
the function "inclined-surface machining".

Increment Travel path length specification based on number of increments. The

number of increments can be stored as a -> setting data or selected
with keys labeled with 10, 100, 1000, 10,000.

Incremental dimension Also incremental dimension: A destination for axis traversal is defined
by a distance to be covered and a direction referenced to a point
already reached. See also -> absolute dimension.

Initialization block Initialization blocks are special -> program blocks. They contain value
assignments that are performed before program execution.
The primary purpose of initialization blocks is to initialize predefined
data or global user data.

Initialization file It is possible to create an initialization file for each -> workpiece.
Various variable assignments which are intended to apply specifically
to one workpiece can be stored in this file.

Intermediate blocks Traversing movements with tool offset selected (G41/G42) can be
interrupted by a limited number of intermediate blocks (block without
axis movements in the compensation plane) whereby the tool offset
can still be correctly calculated. The permissible number of
intermediate blocks which the control reads ahead can be set in
system parameters.

Interpolator Logical unit of the -> NCK which determines intermediate values for
the movements to be traversed on the individual axes on the basis of
destination positions specified in the parts program.

Interpolatory Interpolatory compensation can be used to compensate for leadscrew

compensation errors and measuring system errors (LEC, MSEC) caused during
production.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 Edition A-321
 A A
Appendix 01/2008
B Terms

Interrupt routine Interrupt routines are special -> subroutines which can be started by
events (external signals) in the machining process. A parts program
block which is currently being worked through is interrupted and the
position of the axes at the point of interruption is automatically saved.

Inverse time feedrate On SINUMERIK 840D controls, it is possible to program the time
required to traverse the path of a block instead of the feedrate speed
for the axis movement (G93).

J
Jog Control operating mode (setup mode): In JOG mode, it is possible to
set up the machine. Individual axes and spindles can be traversed in
JOG mode by means of the direction keys. Other functions available
in JOG mode are -> reference point approach, -> repositioning and ->
preset (setting an actual value).

K
Key switch S7-300: The keyswitch is the mode selector switch on the
-> CPU. The keylock switch is operated by a removable key.

Keywords Words with a specific notation, which have a defined meaning in the
programming language for -> parts programs.

Kv Servo gain factor, a control variable in a control loop.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

A-322 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 Edition
 A A
01/2008 Appendix
B Terms

L
Languages The user guidance display texts and the system messages are
available in five system languages (diskette):
German, English, French, Italian, and Spanish.
The user can select two of the listed languages at a time in the
control.

Leadscrew error Compensation for the mechanical inaccuracies of a leadscrew

compensation participating in the feed. The control uses stored deviation values for
the compensation.

Limit speed Maximum/minimum (spindle) speed: The maximum speed of a spindle

may be limited by values defined in the machine data, the -> PLC or -
> setting data.
Linear axis The linear axis is an axis, which, in contrast to a rotary axis, describes
a straight line.

Linear interpolation The tool travels along a straight line to the destination point while
machining the workpiece.

Load memory With CPU 314 of the -> PLC, the load memory is the equivalent of the
-> working memory.

Look ahead With the look ahead function, a configurable number of traversing
blocks is read in advance in order to calculate the optimum machining
velocity.

Look-ahead detection of The control can recognize and signal the following types of collision:
contour violations 1. The path distance is shorter than the tool radius.
2. The width of the inner corner is smaller than the tool diameter.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 Edition A-323
 A A
Appendix 01/2008
B Terms

M
Machine Operating area of the control.

Machine axes Physically existent axes on the machine tool.

Machine control panel An operator panel on a machine tool with operating elements such as
keys, rotary switches, etc., and simple indicators such as LEDs. It is
used to directly influence the machine tool via the PLC.

Machine coordinate A coordinate system, which is related to the axes of the machine tool.
system
Machine zero A fixed point on the machine tool, which can be referenced by all
(derived) measuring systems.

Machining channel Via a channel structure, parallel sequences of movements, such as

positioning a loading gantry during machining, can shorten
unproductive times. Here, a CNC channel must be regarded as a
separate CNC control system with decoding, block preparation and
interpolation.

Macro technique Grouping of a set of instructions under a single identifier. The identifier
in the program refers to the grouped set of instructions.

Main block A block prefixed by ":" containing all the parameters required to start
execution of a -> parts program.

Main program Parts program identified by a number or identifier in which further

main programs, subroutines or -> cycles may be called.

MDA Control operating mode: Manual Data Automatic. In the MDA mode,
individual program blocks or block sequences with no reference to a
main program or subprogram can be input and executed immediately
afterwards through actuation of the NC start key.

Measuring circuits SINUMERIK 840D: The signals from the sensors are analyzed in the
SIMODRIVE 611D drive modules. The maximum configuration is 8
axes and spindles in total, but including no more than 5 spindles.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

A-324 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 Edition
 A A
01/2008 Appendix
B Terms

Messages All messages programmed in the parts program and -> alarms
recognized by the system are output on the operator panel in plain
text with the date and time and a symbol indicating the cancel
criterion. Alarms and messages are displayed separately.

Metric measurement Standardized system of units: for lengths in millimeters (mm),

system meters (m), etc.

Mirroring Mirroring reverses the signs of the coordinate values of a contour,

with respect to an axis. It is possible to mirror with respect to more
than one axis at a time.

Mounting rail A mounting rail is used to attach the modules of an S7-300.

Mounting system The SINUMERIK 840D is integrated as a compact module into the
SIMODRIVE 611D converter system. The dimensions correspond to a
50 mm wide SIMODRIVE 611D module. The SINUMERIK 840D
module comprises the NCU module and the NCU box.

Multipoint interface The multipoint interface (MPI) is a 9-pin sub-D port. A configurable
number of devices can be connected to a multipoint interface and
then communicate with each other.
• Programming devices
• Operator control and monitoring equipment
• Further automation systems
The "Multipoint Interface MPI" parameter block of the CPU contains
the -> parameters, which define the properties of the multipoint
interface.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 Edition A-325
 A A
Appendix 01/2008
B Terms

N
Names Words in compliance with DIN 66025 are supplemented by identifiers
(names) for variables (arithmetic variables, system variables, user
variables), for subroutines, for keywords and for words with several
address letters. These supplements have the same meaning as the
words with respect to block format. Identifiers must be unique. It is not
permissible to use the same identifier for different objects.

NC Numerical Control: It incorporates all the components of the machine

tool control system: -> NCK, -> PLC, -> COM.
Note: CNC (computerized numerical control) would be more
appropriate for the SINUMERIK 840D: MARS and Merkur controls.

NCK Numerical Control Kernel: Component of the numerical control

system, which executes -> part programs and essentially coordinates
the movements on the machine tool.

Network A network is the interconnection of several S7-300 and other terminal

devices, such as a programming device, by means of -> connecting
cables. A data exchange takes place over the network between the
connected devices.
Node number The node number represents the "contact address" of a -> CPU or the
-> programming device or any other intelligent periphery module if
these are communicating via a -> network with each other. The node
number is assigned to the CPU or the programming device
using the -> "S7 Configuration" S7-Tool.

NRK Numeric Robotic Kernel (operating system of the -> NCK)

NURBS Internal motion control and path interpolation are performed using
NURBS (non-uniform rational B-splines). A standard procedure is thus
available (SINUMERIK 840D) as an internal control function for all
modes of interpolation.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

A-326 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 Edition
 A A
01/2008 Appendix
B Terms

O
OEM The scope for implementing individual solutions (OEM applications)
for the SINUMERIK 840D has been provided for machine
manufacturers, who wish to create their own operator interface or
integrate process-oriented functions in the control.

Offset memory Data range in the control, in which the tool offset data are stored.

Operating mode An operating concept on a SINUMERIK control. The operating modes

-> Jog, -> MDA and -> Automatic are defined.

Operating mode group At all times all of the axles/spindles are assigned to precisely one
channel. Each channel is assigned to one operating mode group.
The same -> mode is always assigned to the channels in a mode
group.

Oriented spindle stop Stops the workpiece spindle with a specified orientation angle, e.g., to
perform an additional machining operation at a specific position.

Oriented tool retraction RETTOOL: If machining is interrupted (e.g., when a tool breaks), a
program command can be used to retract the tool in a user-specified
orientation by a defined distance.

Override Manual or programmable control feature, which enables the user to

override programmed feedrates or speeds in order to adapt them to a
specific workpiece or material.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 Edition A-327
 A A
Appendix 01/2008
B Terms

P
Parameters The S7-300 uses two types of parameter:
1. Parameters of a STEP 7 instruction
A STEP 7 instruction parameter is the address of the operand
to be machined or a constant.
2. Parameter of a -> parameter block
A parameter of a parameter block determines the behavior of
a module.

Part program A sequence of instructions to the NC control which combine to

produce a specific -> workpiece by performing certain machining
operation on a given -> blank Likewise, performing a certain
machining operation on a specific -> blank.

Part program Part programs can be organized according to -> workpieces. The size
management of the user memory determines the number of programs and the
amount of data that can be managed. Each file (programs and data)
can be given a name consisting of a maximum of 24 alphanumeric
characters.

Path axis Path axes are all the machining axes in the -> channel which are
controlled by the -> interpolator such that they start, accelerate, stop
and reach their end positions simultaneously.

Path feedrate Path feed acts on -> path axes. It represents the geometrical sum of
the feeds on the participating -> geometry axes.

Path velocity The maximum programmable path velocity depends on the input
resolution. For example, with a resolution of 0.1 mm the maximum
programmable path velocity is 1000 m/min.

PG Programming device

PLC Programmable Logic Control: -> Programmable Logic Controller.

Component of the -> NC control: Programmable controller for
processing the control logic of the machine tool.

PLC -> Programmable Logic Controller

PLC program memory SINUMERIK 840D:

The PLC user program, the user data and the basic PLC program are
stored together in the PLC user memory. The PLC user memory can
be expanded up to 96 KB with memory expansions.

PLC programming The PLC is programmed with STEP 7 software. STEP 7 programming
software is based on the standard WINDOWS operating system and
incorporates the functionality of STEP5 programming with innovative

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

A-328 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 Edition
 A A
01/2008 Appendix
B Terms

expansions and developments.

Polar coordinates A coordinate system, which defines the position of a point on a plane
in terms of its distance from the origin and the angle formed by the
radius vector with a defined axis.

Polynomial interpolation Polynomial interpolation provides a means of generating a very wide

range of curves, including straight-line, parabolic and exponential
functions (SINUMERIK 840D).

Positioning axis Axis that performs an auxiliary movement on a machine tool (e.g., tool
magazine, pallet transport). Positioning axes are axes that do not
interpolate with -> path axes.

Power On Control is switched off and then switched on again.

Preset The control zero point can be redefined in the machine coordinate
system by means of the Preset function. Preset does not cause the
axes to move; instead, a new position value is entered for the current
axis positions.

Program 1. Operating area of the control.

2. Sequence of instructions to the control.

Program block Program blocks contain the main programs and subroutines of the ->
parts programs.

Programmable frames Programmable -> frames can be used to define new coordinate
system starting points dynamically while the parts program is running.
A distinction is made between absolute definition using a new frame
and additive definition with reference to an existing starting point.

Programmable logic Programmable logic controllers (PLC) are electronic controls, the
controller function of which is stored as a program in the control unit. This
means that the layout and wiring of the device do not depend on the
function of the control. The programmable logic controller has the
same structure as a computer; it consists of a CPU (central module)
with memory, input/output modules and an internal bus system. The
peripherals and the programming language are matched to the
requirements of the control technology.

Programmable working Limitation of the motion space of the tool to a space defined by
area limitation programmed limitations.

Programming key Characters and character sequences, which have a defined meaning
in the programming language for -> parts programs (see
Programming Guide).

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 Edition A-329
 A A
Appendix 01/2008
B Terms

Protection zone Three-dimensional space within the -> working area which the tool tip
is not permitted to enter.

Q
Quadrant error Contour errors at quadrant transitions, which arise as a result of
compensation changing friction conditions on the guideways, can be virtually entirely
eliminated with the quadrant error compensation. Parameterization of
the quadrant error compensation is performed by means of a circuit
test.

R
R parameters Arithmetic parameter for which the programmer of the -> parts
program can freely assign or request values in the program.

Rapid traverse The highest traverse rate of an axis. It is used, for example, to move
the tool from rest to the -> workpiece contour or retract the tool from
the contour.

Reference point Point on the machine tool used to reference the measuring system of
the -> machine axes.

Reference point If the utilized distance measuring system is not an absolute value
approach encoder then it is necessary to perform a reference point approach to
ensure that the actual values returned by the measuring system
match the machine coordinate values.

REPOS 1. Reapproach contour, triggered by operator

REPOS allows the tool to be returned to the interrupt position by
means of the direction keys.

2. Programmed contour reapproach

A selection of approach strategies are available in the form of
program commands: Approach point of interruption, approach start
of block, approach end of block, approach a point on the path
between start of block and interruption.

Retentive address areas Data areas in data blocks and times, counters and markers are
retentive (non-volatile) if their contents are not lost when the system is
restarted or the mains supply is disconnected.

Rigid tapping This function allows threads to be tapped without a compensating

chuck. When the rigid tapping function is used, interpolation of the
spindle acting as a rotary axis and the drilling axis ensures that
threads are cut exactly to the final drilling depth, e.g., tapped blind
hole (requirement: spindles in axis operation).

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

A-330 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 Edition
 A A
01/2008 Appendix
B Terms

Rotary axis Rotary axes apply a workpiece or tool rotation to a defined angular
position.

Rotary axis, turning Depending on the application, the travel range of a rotary axis can be
continuously
limited to less than 360 degrees or the axis can be continuously

turned in both directions. Continuously turning rotary axes are used,

for example, for eccentric machining, grinding and winding.

Rotation Component of a -> frame which defines a rotation of the coordinate

system through a specific angle.
Rounding axis Rounding axes rotate a workpiece or tool to an angular position
corresponding to an indexing grid. When a grid index is reached, the
rounding axis is "in position".

S
S7-300 bus The S7-300 bus is a serial data bus by means of which the modules
communicate with each other and are supplied with the required
voltage. The connections between the modules are made with the ->
bus connectors.

S7-Configuration S7-Configuration is a tool with the aid of which modules can be

parameterized. S7 Configuration is used to set a variety of
-> parameter blocks of the -> CPU and the I/O modules on the
-> programming device. These parameters are transmitted to the
CPU.

Safety functions The controls contain watchdog monitors which are always active.
These monitors detect problems in the CNC, PLC or machine in time
to prevent damage to workpiece, tool or machine as far as possible. In
the event of a fault, the machining operation is interrupted and the
drives stopped. The cause of the malfunction is logged and output as
an alarm. At the same time, the PLC is notified that a CNC alarm has
been triggered.

Scaling Component of a -> frame, which causes axis-specific scale

modifications.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 Edition A-331
 A A
Appendix 01/2008
B Terms

Serial RS-232-C interface For the purpose of data input and output,
MMC modules PCU 50/70 include two RS-232-C interfaces
Machining programs and manufacturer and user data can be loaded
and saved via these interfaces.

Services Operating area of the control.

Setting data Data, which communicates the properties of the machine tool to the
NC control, as defined by the system software.

Simulator module A simulator module is a module

• on which digital input variables can be simulated via control
elements and
• Digital output quantities can be displayed

Soft key A key, whose name appears on an area of the screen. The choice of
softkeys displayed is dynamically adapted to the operating situation.
The freely assignable function keys (softkeys) are assigned defined
functions in the software.

Software limit switch Software limit switches define the limits of the travel range of an axis
and prevent the slide contacting the hardware limit switches. 2 pairs of
values can be assigned on each axis, which can then be activated
separately via the -> PLC.

Spindles The spindle functionality is a two-level construct:

1. Spindles: Speed or position-controlled analog spindle drives
digital (SINUMERIK 840D)
2. Auxiliary spindles: speed-controlled spindle drives, "auxiliary
spindle" function package e.g. for driven tools.

Spline interpolation Using the spline interpolation function, the control is able to generate
a smooth curve from just a small number of specified interpolation
points along a setpoint contour.

SRT Transmission ratio

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

A-332 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 Edition
 A A
01/2008 Appendix
B Terms

Standard cycles Standard cycles are provided for machining operations, which are
frequently repeated:
• Cycles for drilling/milling applications
• for turning technology
The available cycles are listed in the "Cycle support" menu in the
"Program" operating area. Once the desired machining cycle has
been selected, the parameters required for assigning values are
displayed in plain text.

Subblock Block prefixed by "N" containing information for a machining step,

such as a position parameter.

Subprogram A sequence of instructions in a -> parts program, which can be called

repeatedly with various defining parameters. The subprogram is
called from a main program. Every subprogram can be protected
against unauthorized read-out and display. -> Cycles are a form of
subprogram.

Synchronization Instructions in -> parts programs for coordination of sequences in

different -> channels at specific machining points.

Synchronized actions 1. Auxiliary function output

While a workpiece is being machined, technological functions (->
auxiliary functions) can be output from the CNC program to the
PLC. These auxiliary functions are used for example to control
additional equipment for the machine tool, such as quills, grabbers,
clamping chucks etc.

2. High-speed auxiliary function output

For time-critical switching functions, the acknowledgement times
for the -> auxiliary functions can be minimized and unnecessary
stops in the machining process can be avoided.

Synchronized axes Synchronized axes take the same time to traverse their path as the
geometry axes take for their path.

System memory The system memory is a memory in the CPU in which the following
data are stored:
• Data required by the operating system
• The operands times, counters, markers

System variables A variable, which exists although it has not been programmed by the -
> parts program programmer. It is defined by a data type and the
variable name preceded by the character $.
See also -> User-defined variable.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 Edition A-333
 A A
Appendix 01/2008
B Terms

T
Teach In Teach-in is a means of creating or correcting part programs. The
individual program blocks can be input via the keyboard and executed
immediately. Positions approached via the direction keys or
handwheel can also be stored. Additional information such as G

functions, feedrates or

M functions can be entered in the same block.

Text editor -> Editor

Tool A tool is a software tool for inputting and changing the -> parameters
of a parameter block. Tools include:
• S7-Configuration
• S7-TOP
• S7-Info

Tool A part used on the machine tool for machining. Examples include
turning tools, milling cutters, drills, laser beams, etc.

Tool offset By programming a T function (5 decades, integer) in the block, you

can select the tool. Every T number can be assigned up to nine
cutting edges (D addresses). The number of tools to be managed in
the control is set at the configuration stage.

Tool radius In order to program a desired -> workpiece contour directly, the
compensation control must traverse a path equidistant to the programmed contour,
taking into account the radius of the tool used (G41/G42).

Transformation Programming in a Cartesian coordinate system, execution in a non-

Cartesian coordinate system (e.g., with machine axes as rotary axes).

Traversing range The maximum permissible travel range for linear axes is ± 9 decades.
The absolute value depends on the selected input and position control
resolution and the unit of measurement (inch or metric).

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

A-334 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 Edition
 A A
01/2008 Appendix
B Terms

U
User interface The user interface (UI) is the display medium for a CNC control in the
form of a screen. It is laid out with eight horizontal and eight vertical
softkeys.

User memory All programs and data, such as part programs, subroutines,
comments, tool offsets, and zero offsets/frames, as well as channel
and program user data, can be stored in the shared CNC user
memory.

User program User programs for the S7-300 automation systems are created using
the programming language STEP 7. The user program has a modular
layout and consists of individual blocks.
The basic block types are:
Code blocks: these blocks contain the STEP 7 commands.
Data blocks: these blocks contain the constants and variables for the
STEP 7 program.

User-defined variable The user can declare user-defined variables for any use in the ->
parts program or data block (global user data). A definition contains a
data type specification and the variable name. See also -> System
variable.

V
Variable definition A variable definition includes the specification of a data type and a
variable name. The variable names can be used to access the value
of the variables.

Velocity control In order to be able to achieve an acceptable traversing velocity on

very short traverse movements within a single block, predictive
velocity control can be set over several blocks (-> look ahead).

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 Edition A-335
 A A
Appendix 01/2008
B Terms

W
Working area Three-dimensional zone into which the tool tip can be moved on
account of the physical design of the machine tool.
See also -> protection zone.

Working area limitation With the aid of the working area limitation, the traversing range of the
axes can be further restricted in addition to the limit switches. One
value pair per axis may be used to describe the protected working
area.

Working memory The working area is a RAM area in the -> CPU which is accessed by
the processor to access the user program during program execution.

Workpiece Part to be made/machined by the machine tool. A workpiece is saved

as a separate program in a directory.

Workpiece contour Setpoint contour of the -> workpiece to be made/machined.

Workpiece coordinate The starting position of the workpiece coordinate system is the ->
system workpiece zero. In machining operations programmed in the
workpiece coordinate system, the dimensions and directions refer to
this system.

Workpiece zero The workpiece zero is the starting point for the -> workpiece
coordinate system. It is defined by the distance from the machine
zero.

X
Y
Z
Zero/work offset Specification of a new reference point for a coordinate system through
reference to an existing zero point and a -> frame.
1. Settable
SINUMERIK 840D: A configurable number of settable work offsets
are available for each CNC axis. The offsets - which are selected
by means of G functions - take effect alternately.
2. External
In addition to all the offsets, which define the position of the
workpiece zero, it is possible to superimpose an external zero
offset
- By means of a handwheel (DRF offset) or
- PLC
3. Programmable
It is possible to program work offsets for all path and positioning
axes by means of the TRANS statement.

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

A-336 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008 Edition
 I 01/2008 Index
I
I Index Continuous jog 5-177
Contour
_
Cartesian start point 6-206
_TEMPL_ 6-227
Creating 6-204
A
Defining the start point 6-205
Accelerated block search for execution from
Entering an element 6-209
external source 4-101
Graphical illustration 6-203
Access authorization 2-33
Polar start point 6-206
Activate basic frame immediately 5-188
Selecting an element 6-209
Activating remote diagnostics 8-281
Symbolic representation 6-208
Alarm 2-26
Contour programming 2-45
Cancel key 2-23
Control panel keys 2-23
Alarm log 8-268
Coordinate system for changing the actual value
Alt key 2-24
display 4-68
Append contour element 6-210
Copy file 6-234
Approaching a reference point 4-77
Copying of files 6-234
Area switchover key 2-23
Count, ShopMill 5-152
Automatic 2-28
Count, ShopTurn 5-172
Program overview 4-96
Creating a duplo tool
B
ShopMill 5-149
Binary format 7-250
ShopTurn 5-166
Block 6-225
Creating a replacement tool
Blue screen, error status screen 2-56
ShopMill 5-149
C
ShopTurn 5-166
Calculating tool parameters 5-117
Ctrl key 2-24
Chain rule 5-121
Cursor 2-25
Change operand value 8-276
Cycle parameterization 2-51
Change setting data: 5-181
Cycle recompilation 2-51
Changing a contour 6-207
Cycle Start 2-34
Changing operating mode 4-63
Cycle Stop 2-34
Changing the HMI user interface 9-292
CYCLE800 4-72
Channel
Cycles 6-194
Active 2-52
Displaying version 8-271
Interrupted 2-53
D
Reset 2-52
Data
Switchover key 2-23
Activating 7-246
Channel operational messages 2-38
Reading in 7-246
Channel statuses 2-52
Data block 6-225
Channel switchover 2-52
Data structure 4-60
Channels 4-62
Data:reading out 7-246
Cleaning 10-302
Definitions
Color setting 9-292
Displaying version display 8-274
Commissioning
Delete key 2-24
Main screen 9-284
Delete key (backspace) 2-24
Communication error log 8-269
Deleting a file 6-236
CompactFlash Card 9-285
Deleting files 6-236
Compile cycles
Determining a tool offset, HMI Embedded 5-130
version screen 8-273

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
I-337
 I Index 01/2008
I
Diagnostics fitting 2-55
Main screen 8-260 Fitting 2-55
Directories 7-242 Fittings 2-55
Directory Flat D numbers 5-109
Selecting 2-43 Free contour programming 2-51
Directory types 6-226 FST 2-41
Disable magazine location 5-154 G
Display filters 9-288 Geometry axes 4-67
Display G functions 4-72 Grinding allowance 6-214, 6-215
Display options 9-288 H
Display swivel data record 4-72 Handwheel 4-73
Display system resources 9-298 Hidden lines 6-199
Display toolcarrier 4-72 hidden program lines display 6-199
Display transformations 4-72 Hierarchical file structure 7-244
Displaying auxiliary functions 4-71 I
Displaying axis feedrates 4-69 Inc
Displaying machine data 9-286 dimension 4-83
Displaying spindles 4-70 Inch/metric switchover 4-76
Displaying system resources 8-267 Incremental value 2-29
Double editor 2-43 Information key 2-23
DRF 2-41 Initialization block 6-225
DRF offset 4-105 initiate NCK reset 9-296
Drive configuration 9-287 Input
DRY 2-41, 5-179 Canceling 2-47
Dry run feedrate 5-179 Confirming 2-47
Duplo number edit 2-46
ShopMill 5-149 Input help for operands 8-277
ShopTurn 5-166 Input key 2-25
E ISO programs
Edit key 2-24 read in/out via RS-232-C 7-255
Editor settings 2-43, 2-44, 9-295 ISO-Lochstreifenformat 7-255
Emergency Stop key 2-28 ISO-Programm
Enable workpieces/program 6-233 auslesen 7-257
ETC key 2-23 einlesen 7-255
EXTCALL 6-237 J
F Jog 2-28
Feed Start 2-30 Main screen 4-80
Feed Stop 2-30 Jog data 5-177
Feedrate control 2-30 Jog feedrate 5-177
Feedrate DRY 5-179 Jog spindle speed 5-177
Feedrate override 2-30 K
File Key positions 2-33
Save 2-51 Key-operated switch 2-32
File names 7-248 Keys on the machine control panel 2-28
File types 6-225 L
Find/Go to 2-49 Language selection 9-293
Finding an empty location 5-159, 5-170 Licensing 9-299

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

I-338 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 I 01/2008 Index
I
Line end key 2-26 P
Logical drive 9-285 Page down 2-25
Logical drives 6-196 Page up 2-26
M Parameter no. for radius calculation 5-121
M01 2-41 Part program 6-194
Machine area key 2-23 edit 2-47
Machine axes 4-67 Selecting 6-228
Machine functions 2-29, 4-61 Start 4-65
Machines Stop 4-65
Global status display 2-38 Password 2-33, 9-296
Macro block 6-225 Path name 7-246
Magazine PC format 7-250
Positioning, ShopTurn 5-171 PLC settings 9-291
Magazine location Pocket calculator 2-54
Disabling, ShopMill 5-154 Positioning a magazine location 5-160
Enabling, ShopMill 5-154 Predefined package lists 8-272
Managing the magazine list Preset 4-74
ShopMill 5-154 Pre-warning limit, ShopMill 5-152
Manual tools Pre-warning limit, ShopTurn 5-172
ShopMill 5-149 Program 2-26
MCS 2-31, 4-67 Control 4-104
MDA 2-28 Control display 2-41
Memory info 6-237 Displaying level 4-66
MF-II-Tastatur 2-35 Editing 4-97, 6-197
Modal M functions 4-71 Enabling 6-233
Monitoring tool use Executing 4-96
ShopMill 5-152 Main screen 6-195
N Managing 6-224
NC settings 9-290 Overview 2-42
O Saving 4-91
OP 010 2-22 Select 6-231
Opening a file 2-43 Selection 2-42
Operand form 8-278 Simulating 6-219
Operand value Program block 6-225
Input help 8-277 Program control 2-34
Operandenwert Protection levels 2-32
ändern 8-277 Protection zones 5-182
Operands PRT 2-41
Input help 8-277 Punched tape format 7-247
Operating areas 1-18 R
Operating data 10-302 R parameter
Operating mode group 4-62 Deleting 5-175
Operating modes 4-60 Editing 5-175
Output error log 7-254 Finding 5-176
Output transmission log 7-254 Rapid 2-31
Overstoring 4-102 Rapid traverse override 2-30, 2-31
Overwrite 2-49 Rapid traverse override display with G0 4-94

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
I-339
 I Index 01/2008
I
Reading out file types 7-243 Tool management 5-133
Recall key 2-23 ShopMill tool management 5-143
Recompilation 2-51 ShopTurn
Ref 2-29 Tool management 5-133, 5-161
Relocating a tool Simulating milling
ShopTurn 5-169 Before machining 6-221
Renaming a file 6-235 During machining 6-222
Renaming files 6-235 Simulation 2-51
Replacement tool Simulation graphic 6-221
ShopMill 5-149 Single Block 2-34
ShopTurn 5-166 Single Block 2-34
REPOS 2-29 SINUMERIK 840D sl 1-16
Repositioning 4-84 SKP 2-41
Reserved block names 6-226 Softkey 2-36
Reset 2-35 Software version 8-270
RO identifier 6-198 Space character 2-24
Rotary drill, ShopTurn 5-163 Special axes 4-67
ROV 2-41 Spindle control 2-31
S Spindle data 5-178
Safety Integrated 4-85, 8-264 Spindle number 5-121
Scratching 4-86 Spindle override 2-31
Select block 2-49 Spindle start 2-32
Selecting operating mode 4-63 Spindle stop 2-31
Selection key 2-25 SPL 8-266
Selective Program Protection Standard PC keyboard MF-II 2-35
RO 6-198 Status display 6-221
Series machine startup 7-252 Status SI 8-264
Service axis 8-262 Subprogram 6-194
Service display 8-262 Summary of ranges 2-45
Service drive 8-263 Switching the control OFF 1-17
Services Switching the control ON 1-17
Main screen 7-251 System frames display 5-190
Set date 8-279 T
Set time 8-279 TCARR 4-72
Settable work offset Teach In 2-28, 4-89, 4-91
change 5-186 Templates 6-227
Settable zero point system, SZS 4-69 Thread cutting starting angle 5-180
Setting data 5-176 Toggling between menu windows 2-45
Other types 5-181 Tolerance class 2-55
Setting the actual value 4-75 Tool
Setting up logical drives 9-296 Activating monitoring, ShopTurn 5-172
Settingdaten Changing a name 5-165
anzeigen 5-181 Changing a name, ShopMill 5-148
suchen 5-181 Changing a type, ShopMill 5-155
SGE/SGA 8-265 Creating 5-125
Shift key 2-24 Creating a cutting edge, HMI Embedded 5-128
ShopMill

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

I-340 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 I 01/2008 Index
I
Creating more than one cutting edge, ShopMill Tool offset 5-123
5-147 Make effective immediately,
Creating more than one cutting edge, ShopTurn HMI Embedded 5-132
5-165 With D numbers only, HMI Embedded 5-131
Creating, HMI Embedded 5-125 Tool Offset 2-26
Creating, ShopMill 5-146 Tool offset structure 5-109
Creating, ShopTurn 5-163 Tool parameter 5-110
Deleting a cutting edge, HMI Embedded 5-129 Tool status, ShopMill 5-154
Deleting, HMI Embedded 5-127 Tool type 5-110
Deleting, ShopMill 5-155 Drills 5-111
Deleting, ShopTurn 5-167 Grinding tools 5-112
Displaying a cutting edge, HMI Embedded 5- Milling cutter 5-110
129 Turning tools 5-115
Displaying, HMI Embedded 5-126 Tool types
Enter status, ShopMill 5-153 ShopMill 5-145
Entering wear data, ShopMill 5-150 ShopTurn 5-162
Entering wear data, ShopTurn 5-171 Traverse log 8-269, 9-294
Finding a cutting edge, HMI Embedded 5-129 Traverse rate 4-82
Finding, HMI Embedded 5-126, 5-142 Traversing axes 4-82
Loading, HMI Embedded 5-138 U
Loading, ShopMill 5-156 Undo key 2-24
Loading, ShopTurn 5-168 User data
Managing magazine locations, ShopTurn 5-174 Changing 5-191
Monitoring use, ShopTurn 5-173 Searching for 5-192
Monitoring, ShopMill 5-151 user data (GUD)
Positioning, HMI Embedded 5-142 activate 6-200
Relocating, HMI Embedded 5-141 User enabling 4-85
Selecting a list, ShopTurn 5-163 User interface 2-36
Selecting, HMI Embedded 5-136 Utilization display 8-267, 9-298
sort in the tool list ShopMill 5-160 V
Sorting, ShopTurn 5-167 Variable increment 5-177
Unloading all, ShopMill 5-158 W
Unloading all, ShopTurn 5-169 WCS 2-31, 4-67
Unloading, HMI Embedded 5-140 Wear, ShopMill 5-152
Unloading, ShopMill 5-157 Wear, ShopTurn 5-172
Unloading, ShopTurn 5-168 Werkzeug
Tool data 5-109 Zustand eingeben ShopTurn 5-173
Displaying and modifying, Window selection key 2-25
HMI Embedded 5-137 Work offset 4-86, 5-183
Tool life, ShopMill 5-151 activate immediately 5-188
Tool life, ShopTurn 5-172 Global 5-188
Tool list Overview 5-185
Selecting, ShopMill 5-145 Working area limitation 5-176
Tool management Workpiece 6-194
Main screen, HMI Embedded 5-134 Enable 6-233
ShopMill 5-133, 5-143 Selecting 6-228
ShopTurn 5-133, 5-161 Workpiece directory 6-226

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
I-341
 I Index 01/2008
I

© Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.

I-342 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operating Manual HMI-Embedded (BEMsl) - 01/2008
 To Suggestions

Siemens AG Corrections
For Publication/Manual:
A&D MC MS1
P.O. Box 3180
SINUMERIK 840D sl

91050 ERLANGEN, GERMANY HMI-Embedded

Fax: +49 (0)9131 98 63 315 [documentation]

mailto:[email protected] User documentation

http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support
Operating Manual
From
Name: Product code: 6FC5398-1AP10-2BA0
01/2008

Address of your company/department Should you come across any printing

errors when reading this publication,
Address:
please notify us on this sheet.
Postal code: ____________ City: Suggestions for improvements are also
welcomed.
Phone: __________ /

Fax: ________ /

Suggestions and/or corrections

Overview
'RFXPHQW2YHUYLHZ6,180(5,.'VO'LVO
*HQHUDO'RFXPHQWDWLRQ

6,180(5,. 6,180(5,. 6,1$0,&6

'VO 6
'LVO

%URFKXUH &DWDORJ1&  &DWDORJ

'&RQYHUWHUFKDVVLVXQLWV 

8VHU'RFXPHQWDWLRQ

6,180(5,. 6,180(5,. 6,180(5,. 6,180(5,. 6,180(5,.

'VO 'VO 'VO 'VO 'VO
' ' ' 'LVO
'LVO 'LVO 'LVO
'L 'L 'L

2SHUDWLQJ0DQXDO 2SHUDWLQJ0DQXDO 3URJUDPPLQJ0DQXDO 3URJUDPPLQJ0DQXDO 'LDJQRVWLFV0DQXDO 

ದ+0,VO8QLYHUVDO ದ+0,$GYDQFHG  ದ)XQGDPHQWDOV  ದ&\FOHV
7XUQLQJ0LOOLQJ  ದ2SHUDWLRQFRPSDFW ದ-RESODQQLQJ  ದ0HDVXULQJ&\FOHV
ದ+0,(PEHGGHG  ದ3URJUDPPLQJFRPSDFW
ದ6KRS0LOO ದ6\VWHP9DULDEOH/LVWV
ದ6KRS7XUQ ದ,627XUQLQJ0LOOLQJ

0DQXIDFWXUHU6HUYLFH'RFXPHQWDWLRQ

6,180(5,. 6,180(5,. 6,180(5,. 6,180(5,. 6,180(5,.

'VO 'VO 'VO 'LVO 'VO
'LVO 'LVO

0DQXDO 0DQXDO &RPPLVVLRQLQJ ದ&RPPLVVLRQLQJ 3DUDPHWHU0DQXDO 

ದ1&8  2SHUDWRU&RPSRQHQWV 0DQXDO&1& 0DQXDO ದ3DUW
ದ0DFKLQH DQG1HWZRUNLQJ  ದ1&.3/&'ULYH  ದ$', ದ3DUW
FRQILJXUDWLRQ ದ+0,VO 
ದ+0,(PEHGGHG 
ದ+0,$GYDQFHG 
ದ6KRS0LOO6KRS7XUQ

0DQXIDFWXUHU6HUYLFH'RFXPHQWDWLRQ

6,180(5,. 6,180(5,. 6,1$0,&6 6,180(5,. 6,180(5,.

'VO 'VO 6 'VO
' '
'LVO 'LVO
'L 'L

)XQFWLRQ0DQXDO )XQFWLRQ0DQXDO )XQFWLRQ0DQXDO )XQFWLRQ0DQXDO (0&'LUHFWLYHV

ದ%DVLF)XQFWLRQV  ದ7RRO0DQDJHPHQW 'ULYH)XQFWLRQV 6DIHW\,QWHJUDWHG
ದ([WHQGHG)XQFWLRQV ದ,62'LDOHFWV
ದ6SHFLDO)XQFWLRQV ದ6LQX&20
ದ6\QFKURQRXV$FWLRQV

(OHFWURQLF'RFXPHQWDWLRQ

6,180(5,.
6,1$0,&6
0RWRUV

'2&21&' 
'2&21:(% 5HFRPPHQGHGPLQLPXPVFRSHRIGRFXPHQWDWLRQ